Corel Draw X4 Tutorials in Hindi Pdf

User Manual: corel Corel Draw Graphics Suite - X4 - User Guide Free User Guide for Corel Draw Software, Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 514 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Brief contents

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i

Welcome to CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

CorelDRAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Corel PHOTO-PAINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

CorelDRAW Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

Corel PHOTO-PAINT Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

Contents i

Contents

Section I: Welcome to CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4

Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

What's new in CorelDRAW Graphics Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Installing CorelDRAW Graphics Suite applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Changing languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Registering Corel products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Updating Corel products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Corel Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Working with network installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

About Corel Corporation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Learning resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Using the Help, user guide, and tooltips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Using Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Welcome screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

CorelTUTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Insights from the Experts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Training videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Tips and tricks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Using the VBA programming guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Using Web-based resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Using customized training and integration resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Section II: CorelDRAW

CorelDRAW workspace tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

CorelDRAW terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Application window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Workspace tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

ii Contents

CorelDRAW basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Vector graphics and bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Starting and opening drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Finding content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Undoing, redoing, and repeating actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Zooming, panning, and scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Saving drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Closing drawings and quitting CorelDRAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Exploring basic tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Drawing shapes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Drawing rectangles and squares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Drawing ellipses, circles, arcs, and pie shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Drawing polygons and stars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Drawing spirals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Drawing predefined shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Drawing by using shape recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Drawing lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Drawing calligraphic, pressure-sensitive, and preset lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Formatting lines and outlines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Copying, converting, and removing outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Applying brushstrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Spraying objects along a line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Drawing flow and dimension lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Working with objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Selecting objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Transforming objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Copying, duplicating, and deleting objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Creating objects from enclosed areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Creating a boundary around selected objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Copying object properties, transformations, and effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Positioning objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Aligning and distributing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Contents iii

Snapping objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Using dynamic guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Changing the order of objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Grouping objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Combining objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Inserting bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Shaping objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107

Using curve objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Selecting and moving nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Manipulating segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Adding and removing nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Using node types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Breaking the path of curve objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Applying distortion effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Shaping objects by using envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Cropping, splitting, and erasing objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Filleting, scalloping, and chamfering corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Welding and intersecting objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Creating PowerClip objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Working with color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Choosing colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Creating custom color palettes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Filling objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

Applying uniform fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Applying fountain fills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Applying pattern fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Applying mesh fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Applying fills to areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Working with fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Adding three-dimensional effects to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

Contouring objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Applying perspective to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

iv Contents

Creating extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Creating bevel effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Creating drop shadows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Blending objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Changing the transparency of objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159

Applying transparencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Working with pages and layout tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

Specifying the page layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Choosing a page background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Adding, duplicating, renaming, and deleting pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Using the rulers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Setting up the grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Setting up guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Working with tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

Adding tables to drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Selecting, moving, and navigating table components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Inserting and deleting table rows and columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Resizing table cells, rows, and columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Formatting tables and cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Working with text in tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Converting tables to text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Merging and splitting tables and cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Manipulating tables as objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Adding images, graphics, and backgrounds to tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Importing tables in a drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Working with layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185

Creating layers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Changing layer properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Moving and copying layers and objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Adding and formatting text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

Adding and selecting text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Changing the appearance of text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Contents v

Finding, editing, and converting text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Aligning and spacing text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Shifting and rotating text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Moving text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Fitting text to a path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Formatting paragraph text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Combining and linking paragraph text frames. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Wrapping paragraph text around objects and text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Inserting formatting codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Working with bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219

Converting vector graphics to bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Cropping and editing bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Straightening bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Applying special effects to bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Using the Image Adjustment Lab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Editing bitmaps with Corel PHOTO-PAINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Tracing bitmaps and editing traced results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

Tracing bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

PowerTRACE controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Fine-tuning traced results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Adjusting colors in traced results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Setting default tracing options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Tips for tracing bitmaps and editing traced results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Working with templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241

Searching for templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Creating templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Using saved templates to create files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Editing templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Managing color for display, input, and output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247

Understanding the Color Management dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Working with color profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

vi Contents

Printing basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253

Printing your work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Laying out print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Previewing print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Merging files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Working with commercial printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261

Printing printers' marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Printing color separations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Printing to film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Publishing to PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267

Saving documents as PDF files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Importing and exporting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271

Importing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Exporting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Collaborating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277

Using CorelDRAW ConceptShare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Section III: Corel PHOTO-PAINT

Corel PHOTO-PAINT workspace tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281

Corel PHOTO-PAINT terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Exploring the application window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Toolbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Property bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Dockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Color palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Status bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Bringing images into Corel PHOTO-PAINT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293

Opening images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Importing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Acquiring images from scanners and digital cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Contents vii

Creating images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Displaying images and image information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299

Viewing images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Viewing image information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Cropping and changing orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303

Cropping images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Straightening images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Rotating and flipping images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Working with color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309

Choosing colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Using spot color channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Changing color modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315

Changing the color mode of images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Converting images to the paletted color mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Adjusting color and tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319

Using the Image Adjustment Lab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Using individual color-adjustment effects and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Using the Tone Curve filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Working with color channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Changing image dimensions, resolution, and paper size. . . . . . . . . . . .333

Changing image dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Changing image resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Changing paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Retouching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337

Removing red-eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Removing dust and scratch marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Cloning image areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Sharpening images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Erasing image areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

viii Contents

Working with lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347

Creating lenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Editing lenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Combining lenses with the image background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Working with masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355

Distinguishing protected and editable areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Defining editable areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Defining editable areas by using color information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Inverting and removing masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Cutting out images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Applying special effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365

Working with special effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Applying color and tone effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Managing plug-ins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Drawing and painting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369

Drawing shapes and lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Applying brushstrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Spraying images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Using a pressure-sensitive pen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Filling images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377

Applying uniform fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Applying fountain fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Applying bitmap fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Applying texture fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Applying gradient fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Working with objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385

Creating objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Grouping and combining objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Modifying objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391

Transforming objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Changing the edges of objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Contents ix

Adding drop shadows to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Working with raw camera files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401

Using raw camera files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Bringing raw camera files into Corel PHOTO-PAINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

Adjusting the color and tone of raw camera files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Sharpening and reducing noise in raw camera files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Previewing raw camera files and obtaining image information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Creating images for the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411

Exporting and optimizing images for the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Creating and editing rollovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Saving and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417

Saving images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

Exporting images to other file formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

Closing images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

Printing basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423

Printing your work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Laying out print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Previewing print jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427

CorelDRAW Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465

Corel PHOTO-PAINT Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483

Section I: Welcome to

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Welcome 3

Welcome

CorelDRAW® Graphics Suite X4 delivers powerful software for graphic design, page

layout, and photo editing.

In this section, you'll learn about

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 applications

what's new in CorelDRAW Graphics Suite

installing CorelDRAW Graphics Suite applications

changing languages

registering Corel products

updating Corel products

Corel® Support Services™

working with network installations

Corel Corporation

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 applications

This section describes the major applications included in

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4.

CorelDRAW

CorelDRAW is an intuitive graphics design application that is built to meet the

demands of today's graphics professionals. Whether you work in advertising, printing,

publishing, sign making, engraving, or manufacturing, CorelDRAW offers the tools

you need to create accurate and creative vector illustrations, and professional-looking

page layouts and graphic designs.

4CorelDRAWGraphicsSuiteX4UserGuide

Corel PHOTO-PAINT

Corel PHOTO-PAINT® is a complete image-editing application that lets you retouch

and enhance photos. Whether you're correcting red-eye, color, or exposure problems,

cutting out image areas, or creating and preparing images for print and for the Web,

Corel PHOTO-PAINT gives you powerful tools that are fast and easy to use.

What's new in CorelDRAW Graphics Suite

This section outlines the new features in CorelDRAW Graphics Suite.

What's new in CorelDRAW

The enhanced layout tools, text improvem ents, new design assets, redesigned user

interface, and improved workflow can boost your productivity and give you a more

enjoyable work experience.

Independent layers

You can now control and edit layers independently for each page of your document.

Local, independent guidelines can be added for individual pages, and master guidelines

can be added for the entire document.

Tables

A new interactive table feature lets you create and import tables to provide a structured

layout for text and graphics in drawings. You can easily align, resize, or edit tables and

cells to adapt them to your designs.

Live text preview

Live text preview lets you directly interact with on-screen text, experiment with

different settings, and evaluate the results before applying changes.

Easy font identification

You can quickly identify the font in a client's artwork by capturing a sample and

sending it to the WhatTheFont™ page of the MyFonts® Web site (available in English

only): http://www.myfonts.com/WhatTheFont .

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Welcome 5

Mirroring paragraph text

Now you can interactively mirror paragraph text horizontally or vertically, or both,

when preparing your text for output.

Better support for quotation marks

Quotation marks are customized for specific languages. You can edit the quotation

mark styles and choose which styles are automatically inserted when you type in

different languages.

Raw camera file support

When importing raw files directly from your digital camera, you can view information

about file properties and camera settings, adjust image color and tone, and improve

image quality. Interactive controls let you preview changes quickly.

Enhanced compatibility

Supported file formats now include Adobe® Illustrator® CS3 (AI); Photoshop® CS3

(PSD); Acrobat® 8 (PDF); AutoCAD® (DXF™ and DWG™); Microsoft® Word

2007 (DOC or RTF, import only); Micros oft® Publisher 2002, 2003, and 2007 (PUB,

import only); Adobe® Portable Document Format (PDF 1.7 and PDF/A, including

PDF comments); and Corel® Painter™ X.

Templates and search capability for templates

New templates are available to help you ge t started with your design projects. When

starting a new project, you can easily find the right template on your computer. You can

browse, preview, or search for templates by name, category, keywords, or notes. You can

also view useful information about the template, such as category and style.

Extras

The CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 disc puts 4,000 new clipart images at your

fingertips. These high-quality vector graphics in CorelDRAW format can be easily

searched and adapted for use in your designs.

New fonts

An extended selection of new fonts includes single-line engraving fonts and

OpenType® cross-platform fonts that offer enhanced language support for Latin,

Greek, and Cyrillic layouts.

6CorelDRAWGraphicsSuiteX4UserGuide

Enhanced search functionality

You can use keywords, notes, file type, date, or text when you search for CorelDRAW

X4 files from Windows® Explorer. You can add or edit file properties within the

application, or from Windows Explorer, Windows Search, Windows Desktop Search, or

Windows Vista® Search.

Updated user interface and improved thumbnails

Redesigned icons, menus, and controls within the application create a fresh look and

provide a more intuitive working environment. New high-quality thumbnails let you

preview CorelDRAW documents when you browse and organize your files.

Corel PowerTRACE enhancements

Centerline tracing with Corel® PowerTRACE™ produces more accurate curves or

strokes for tracing technical illustrations, line drawings, or signatures. Improved

smoothing, color, and corner control help you optimize traced results. In addition, you

can control the colors of traced results more easily by editing, merging, or deleting

colors.

Review and collaboration tools

CorelDRAW® ConceptShare™ is a valuable collaboration tool that lets you share

designs and ideas and receive real-time feedback from clients in a Web-based

environment. You can create multiple work spaces, upload your designs, and invite

others to post comments.

Improved print merge functionality

Invitations, labels, and other projects that apply person alized text to the same design

are now easier to create. Improved print merge functionality gives you more control and

makes it easier to create and edit merged data.

Search capability when saving and opening files

You can organize your projects more easily by adding keywords or notes when saving

your files. When opening and saving files, Windows Vista users can search by author,

subject, file type, date, keywords, and other file properties.

Enhanced color management

Support has been added for the Adobe Color Management Module (CMM). On the

Windows Vista operating system, you can also use the Windows Color System CMM.

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Welcome 7

Automatic product updates

Now you can receive messages and information about new content, service packs, and

product updates, and conveniently access a product registration site, from within the

application.

What's new in Corel PHOTO-PAINT

Image editing is enhanced by more fl exible tone-curve corrections, a quick

image-straightening feature, new lens effects, added histogram feedback, and the

ability to open and edit raw camera files. In addition, a more efficient workflow,

redesigned user interface, and enhanced file compatibility can help you complete your

graphic design tasks more quickly.

Raw camera file support

When importing raw files from your digital camera, you can view information about

file properties and camera settings, adjust image color and tone, and improve image

quality. Interactive controls let you preview changes quickly.

Added histogram feedback

More features and effects now provide real-time histogram feedback, so you can edit

images more efficiently. You can preview image adjustments and compare results when

you adjust image tone in the Image Adjustment Lab and the Tone Curve dialog box, or

when you process raw camera files.

Improved tone-curve manipulation

Interactive settings and a redesigned user interface let you adjust image tone with

greater flexibility and control. You can easily perform precise tonal corrections by

selecting, adding, or deleting nodes along the tone curve.

Custom image straightening

Images that were scanned or photographed at an angle can be straightened quickly and

easily. Interactive controls let you correct image orientation and preview the results.

New lens effects

With the new lens effects, you can convert individual colors to black and white, mix

color channels for creative effect, map gradient colors, or apply a photographic filter to

your image.

8CorelDRAWGraphicsSuiteX4UserGuide

Enhanced compatibility

You can open or save files in the Photoshop CS3 format, ensuring a smooth

image-editing workflow. You can also open Corel Painter X files or save files in the PDF

1.7 or PDF/A format.

Enhanced search functionality

Now you can use keywords, notes, author, subject, date, or file type when viewing,

organizing, or searching for files from Wi ndows Explorer. You can add or edit file

properties within the application, or from Windows Explorer, Windows Desktop

Search, or Windows Vista Search.

Updated user interface and improved thumbnails

Redesigned icons, menus, and controls within the application create a fresh look and

provide a more intuitive working environment. New, high-quality thumbnails let you

preview Corel PHOTO-PAINT documents when you browse and organize your files.

Extras

The CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 disc includes a selection of high-quality photos on

various subjects and themes to add inspiration to your projects. The high-resolution

images can be easily searched and are suitable for high-quality printing.

Review and collaboration tools

CorelDRAW ConceptShare is a valuable collaboration tool that lets you share designs

and ideas and receive real-time feedback from clients in a Web-based environment. You

can create multiple workspaces, upload your designs, and invite others to post

comments.

Search capability when saving and opening files

You can organize your projects more easily by adding keywords or notes when saving

your files. When opening and saving files, Windows Vista users can search by author,

subject, file type, date, keywords, and other file properties.

Automatic product updates

Now you can receive messages and information about new content and product

updates, and conveniently access a product registration site, from within the

application.

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Welcome 9

Enhanced color management

Support has been added for the Adobe Color Management Module (CMM). On the

Windows Vista operating system, you can also use the Windows Color System CMM.

To highlight what was new in earlier versions of CorelDRAW Graphics Suite

•Click Help ` Highlight what's new , and click one of the following commands:

Since version X3 — highlights menu commands and tools for features

introduced or improved in version X4

Since version 12 — highlights menu commands and tools for features

introduced or improved in versions X3 and X4

Since version 11 — highlights menu commands and tools for features

introduced or improved in version 12 and later

Since version 10 — highlights menu commands and tools for features

introduced or improved in version 11 and later

Since version 9 — highlights menu commands and tools for features introduced

or improved in version 10 and later

No highlight — removes highlighting from menu commands and tools in the

toolbox

Installing CorelDRAW Graphics Suite applications

The installation wizard makes it easy to install CorelDRAW Graphics Suite applications

and components. You can use the installation wizard to quickly install the applications

with the default settings, or you can custom ize the installation by choosing different

options.

You can also use the installation wizard to do the following:

add and delete components in the current installation

repair the current installation by reinstalling all application features

uninstall CorelDRAW Graphics Suite

To install CorelDRAW Graphics Suite applications

1Close all applications, including all virus detection programs.

2Insert the disc in the CD drive.

10 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

If the installation wizard does not start automatically, click Start on the Windows

taskbar, and click Run . Type D:\Setup\Setup , where D is the letter that

corresponds to the CD drive.

3Read the license agreement, and then enable the I accept the terms in the license

agreement check box.

4Click Next.

5Ty p e y o u r n a m e i n t h e User name text box.

6Type your serial number in the Serial number text box.

The serial number is not case-sensitive, and the dashes are optional.

7Click Next.

8Follow the installation wizard instructions for installing the software.

To add or delete components in a CorelDRAW Graphics Suite installation

1Close all applications.

2On the Windows taskbar, click Start ` Control panel .

3Click Add or remove programs (Windows XP).

If your operating system is Windows Vista, click Uninstall a program .

4In the Add or remove programs dialog box, choose

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite from the list, and click Change/Remove.

If your operating system is Windows Vista, double-click

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite from the Uninstall or change a program page.

5Follow the instructions that appear.

To repair a CorelDRAW Graphics Suite installation

1Close all applications.

2On the Windows taskbar, click Start ` Control panel .

3Click Add or remove programs.

If your operating system is Windows Vista, click Uninstall a program .

4In the Add or remove programs dialog box, choose

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite from the list, and click Change/Remove.

If your operating system is Windows Vista, double-click

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite from the Uninstall or change a program page.

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Welcome 11

5Follow the instructions that appear.

To uninstall CorelDRAW Graphics Suite

1On the Windows taskbar, click Start ` Control Panel.

2Click Add/Remove programs.

If your operating system is Windows Vista, click Uninstall a program .

3In the Add or remove programs dialog box, choose

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite from the list, and click Change/Remove.

If your operating system is Windows Vista, double-click

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite from the Uninstall or change a program page.

4Follow the installation wizard instructions.

Changing languages

If an application has been installed in more than one language, you can change the

language of the user interface and Help at any time.

If you did not install a specific Writing Tools language when you first installed the

product, you can do so now.

To change the language of the user interface and Help

1Click To o l s ` Options.

2In the list of categories, click Global .

3Choose a language from the Select the language for the user interface list box.

4Restart the application.

To add a language for Writing Tools

1Close any open programs.

2On the Windows taskbar, click Start ` Control panel.

3Click the Add or remove programs icon.

If your operating system is Windows Vista, click Uninstall a program .

4Choose CorelDRAW Graphics Suite from the Currently installed programs

list.

12 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

If your operating system is Windows Vista, double-click

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite from the Uninstall or change a program page.

5Click Change/Remove.

6On the feature tab, click Writing tools , and enable the check box next to the

language that you want to install.

7Follow the instructions in the installation wizard.

Registering Corel products

Registering Corel products is important. Registration provides you with timely access

to the latest product updates, valuable information about product releases, and access

to free downloads, articles, tips and tricks, and special offers.

You can register in one of the following ways:

online — If you are connected to the Intern et, you can start online registration

when you install the Corel graphics application. You can also register online at a

later date by clicking Help ` Registration. If no Internet connection is detected, a

list of options appears in a dialog box.

by phone — You can call the Corel Customer Service Center nearest you.

Updating Corel products

During product installation, you can choose the option to download product updates

and service packs. You can also receive product updates and service packs by clicking

Help ` Updates.

Corel Support Services

Corel Support Services can provide you with prompt and accurate information about

product features, specifications, pricing, availability, services, and technical support. For

the most current information on support services available for your Corel product,

please visit www.corel.com/support .

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Welcome 13

Working with network installations

If you purchased multiple licenses of CorelDRAW Graphics Suite, you have the option

of deploying the applications to your organization's network. The

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 Deployment Guide can provide more information about

network installations. To acquire a copy of the CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 Deployment

Guide, please contact Corel Support Services.

About Corel Corporation

Corel is a leading developer of graphics, productivity, and digital media software, with

more than 100 million users worldwide. The company's product portfolio includes some

of the world's most popular and widely recognized software brands, including

CorelDRAW® Graphics Suite, Corel® Paint Shop Pro®, Corel® Painter™, Corel

DESIGNER®, Corel® WordPerfect® Office, WinZip®, and iGrafx®. In 2006, Corel

acquired InterVideo, makers of WinDVD®, and Ulead, a leading developer of video,

imaging, and DVD authoring software. Designed to help people become more

productive and express their creative potential, Corel's full-featured software products

set a higher standard for value in being easier to learn and use. The industry has

responded with hundreds of awards reco gnizing Corel's leadership in software

innovation, design, and value. Corel's products are sold in more than 75 countries

through a well-established network of international resellers, retailers, original

equipment manufacturers, online providers, and Corel's global Web sites. With its

headquarters in Ottawa, Canada, the company has major offices in the United States,

the United Kingdom, Germany, China, and Japan. Corel's stock is traded on the

NASDAQ under the symbol CREL and on the TSX under the symbol CRE.

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Learning resources 15

Learning resources

You can learn to use CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 in various ways: by reading the

user guide; by accessing the Help, Hints, and tooltips; by completing project-based

tutorials; and by exploring the resources on the Corel Web site (www.corel.com ). On

the Web site, you can access tips, additional tutorials, and training and integration

resources. You can also check the Readme file (readme.html ), which is installed with

the program, to learn the latest information about the software.

In this section, you'll learn about

using the Help, user guide, and tooltips

using Hints

•Welcome screen

•CorelTUTOR

•Insights from the Experts

training videos

tips and tricks

using the VBA programming guide

using Web-based resources

using customized training and integration resources

Using the Help, user guide, and tooltips

This user guide provides information about commonly used product features. The user

guide is also available in PDF format.

The Help provides comprehensive information about product features from directly

within the program. You can browse through the entire list of topics, check the index,

or search the Help for a given word or phrase. From the Help window, you can also

access the Corel® Knowledge Base™ on the Corel Web site.

Tooltips provide information about the icons and buttons found in th e program. To view

a tooltip, position the pointer over an icon, button, or other application control.

16 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Documentation conventions

The following table describes important conv entions used in the user guide and Help.

To use the Help

1Click Help ` Help topics.

2Click one of the following tabs:

Convention Description Examples

Menu ` Menu command A menu item and menu

command that you need to

click in sequence

Click File ` Open.

list box A list of options that drops

down when a user clicks the

down arrow button

Choose a value from the

Force field list box on the

property bar.

docker A window that contains

available commands and

settings relevant to a specific

tool or task

Double-click the name of the

group in the Object

manager docker.

Enter Enter key Type a value in the Eraser

thickness box on the

property bar, and press

Enter .

A note contains important

information that is relevant

to the preceding steps. It

may describe conditions

under which the procedure

can be performed.

A compound blend cannot

be copied or cloned.

If you click the Equal

margins button, you must

specify values in the To p / l e f t

margin boxes.

A tip contains suggestions

for performing the preceding

steps. It may present

alternatives to the steps, or

other benefits or uses of the

procedure.

Trimming an object can

reduce the drawing file size.

You can also create a

hyperlink by using the

Internet toolbar.

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Learning resources 17

Contents — lets you browse through topics in the Help. To open a topic, click

the topic heading in the left pane.

Index — lets you use the index to find a topic. Use the scroll bar to browse, or

type a word or phrase in the search box to find a particular index entry.

Search — lets you search the full text of the Help for a particular word or phrase

To search the Help

1Click Help ` Help topics.

2Click the Search tab, and type a word or phrase in the search box.

For example, if you are looking for information about the RGB color mode, you can

type "RGB" to display a list of relevant topics. To search for a phrase, type the

phrase, and enclose it in quotation marks (for example, type "dynamic guides" or

"color mode").

3Click the List topics button.

4Choose a topic from the list that appears, and press Enter.

If your search results do not include any relevant topics, check whether you spelled

the search word or phrase correctly. Note that the English Help uses American

spelling (for example, "color ," "favorite," "center," and "r asterize"), so searching for

British spellings ("colour," "favourite," "centre," and "rasterise") produces no

results.

You can also

View context-sensitive Help from within a

dialog box

Click the Help button in the dialog box.

Print a specific Help topic Open a Help topic, click the page that you

want to print, and click Print at the top of

the Help window.

Access the Corel Knowledge Base and other

online resources

Click Resources at the top of the Help

window, and click a link to one of the

resources described under "Using Web-based

resources."

You can also

Search for a word or phrase in a list of topics

generated by the previous search

Enable the Search previous results check

box.

18 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To access the user guide in PDF format

On the Windows Start menu, click Start ` All Programs `

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 ` Documentation `

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide PDF .

Search for all forms of a word Enable the Match similar words check box.

For example, if you type "blend" and enable

this check box, the search results will include

topics that contain the words "blends" and

"blending."

Search only the titles of Help topics Enable the Search titles only check box.

Repeat a recently performed search On the search box, click the arrow that

points down, and choose a word or phrase.

Search by using the Boolean operators AND,

OR, NEAR, or NOT

Type a search term in the box, and click the

flyout arrow that points to the right. Choose

a Boolean operator from the following list,

type another search term in the search box,

and press Enter .

AND — lets you find topics that contain all

search terms in the search box

OR — lets you find topics that contain at

least one of the words in the search box

NEAR — lets you find topics in which the

search terms appear close to each other.

NEAR provides more results than when you

use only a phrase search, and more relevant

results than when you search for individual

words.

NOT — lets you find topics that contain the

search term you type before NOT and that

do not contain the search term you type after

NOT.

You can also

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Learning resources 19

Using Hints

To use Hints

Hints provide information about tools in

the toolbox from within the application.

When you click a tool, a hint appears,

telling you how to use the tool. If you need

additional information about a tool, you

can access a relevant Help topic by clicking

the Help button in the upper-right corner

of the Hints docker.

Hints are displayed by default in the Hints

docker on the right side of the program

window, but you can hide them when you

no longer need them.

Hints docker

To Do the following

Display or hide Hints Click Help ` Hints .

When the Hints command is enabled, the

Hints docker appears and provides

information about the active tool in the

toolbox.

Display information about a tool Click the tool, or perform an action with a

tool that is already active.

Get additional information about the active

tool

Click the Help button in the upper-right

corner of the Hints docker.

Navigate to previously viewed topics Click the Back and Forward buttons at the

bottom of the Hints docker.

20 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Welcome screen

The Welcome screen lets you quickly complete common tasks, such as opening files and

starting files from templates. You can find out about the new features in

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 and get inspired by graphic designs featured on the

Gallery page. In addition, you can access tuto rials and tips, and get the latest product

updates.

The Welcome screen appears when you start CorelDRAW or Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

You can also access the Welcome screen by clicking Help ` Welcome screen.

Welcome screen

CorelTUTOR

CorelTUTOR provides a series of project-based tutorials that introduce you to the basic

and advanced features of CorelDRAW and Corel PHOTO-PAINT. You can access the

tutorials from the Welcome screen.

To access CorelTUTOR

1Click Help ` CorelTUTOR .

The Welcome screen appears.

2On the Learning tools page, click CorelTUTOR .

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Learning resources 21

Insights from the Experts

CorelDRAW Handbook: Insights from the Experts contains a series of tutorials written by

design professionals who use CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 in their daily work. The

tutorials show the workflow that the authors used to create their designs with

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite. The handbook is available both as a printed publication

and in PDF format.

To access Insights from the Experts

1Click Help ` Insights from the experts.

The Welcome screen appears.

2On the Learning tools page, click Insights from the experts.

Training videos

Your software DVD contains video training that lets you learn about a wide range of

tools and basic features in CorelDRAW and Corel PHOTO-PAINT. You can create

interesting and unique designs by following project-based tutorials, and learn about

industry-specific workflows, such as sign making, laser engraving, and screen printing.

In addition, you can learn about basic design principles and guidelines for preparing

images for specific media, such as for print or the Web.

Tips and tricks

Quick tips highlight useful tools and shortcuts, and give you a starting point for

exploring some of the CorelDRAW Graphics Suite features.

To access tips and tricks

1Click Help ` Welcome screen.

The Welcome screen appears.

2Click the Learning tools tab, and click Tips & tricks .

22 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Using the VBA programming guide

The new VBA Programming Guide for CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 will help you

automate tasks and create custom solutions by using Microsoft® Visual Basic® for

Applications (VBA) in CorelDRAW and Core l PHOTO-PAINT. If your installation of

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 includes VBA, the guide is accessible from a link in the

VBA Help for CorelDRAW or the VBA Help for Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

Using Web-based resources

The following Web-based resources can help you get the most out of

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite:

Corel Knowledge Base — articles written by the Corel Technical Support Services

team in response to questions by CorelDRAW Graphics Suite users

CorelDRAW.com community — an online environment to share your experience

with the product, ask questions, and receive help and suggestions from other users

Tips and tricks on the Corel Web site — valuable information provided by the

Corel Documentation Team to help you take full advantage of product features

Tutorials on the Corel Web site — in -depth tutorials in which CorelDRAW

Graphics Suite experts share their knowledge and techniques

An active Internet connection is required to access Web-based resources.

Using customized training and integration resources

Corel Corporation has training partnerships with other firms and provides professional

services for its software products.

Corel customized training

Corel Training Specialists can provide you with customized training, tailored to your

work environment, to help you get the most out of the Corel software that you've

installed. These experts will help you develop a curriculum that is practical and

relevant to the needs of your organization. For more information, please visit

www.corel.com/customizedtraining .

Corel Training Partners

A Corel® Training Partner (CTP) is an independent, officially accredited local

organization that provides training on Corel products. CTPs are located worldwide for

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Learning resources 23

your convenience. To find a partner near you, please visit

www.corel.com/trainingpartners.

Corel Professional Services

Corel Corporation is committed to providing workflow solutions that save you both

time and money. To simplify the process of deploying Corel applications across your

organization, Corel® Professional Services™ offers a comprehensive range of cost-

effective solutions to meet your technology needs. This group brings together highly

skilled experts from across the company who are dedicated to finding top-notch

solutions. You'll receive assistance from this knowledgeable team through all stages of

your project, from application development and support to software systems integration

and training.

For more information, you can visit the Corel Professional Services Web site visit at

www.corel.com/proservices.

Corel Technology Partners

Corel Technology Partners are businesses that embed Corel technology in their

products, develop plug-in applications for Corel software, or integrate standalone

applications into Corel technology solutions. This comprehensive program is designed

especially for developers and consultants. It includes all the necessary components to

successfully design, develop, test, and market custom solutions related to Corel

products.

For more information about Corel Technology Partners, please e-mail Corel Corporation

at techpartner@corel.com .

CorelDRAW: CorelDRAW workspace tour 27

CorelDRAW workspace tour

Becoming familiar with the terminology and workspace of CorelDRAW will help you

easily follow this user guide's concepts and procedures.

In this section, you'll learn about

•CorelDRAW terms

the application window

the workspace tools

CorelDRAW terms

Before you get started with CorelDRAW, you should be familiar with the following

terms.

Term Description

object An element in a drawing such as an image, shape, line,

text, curve, symbol, or layer

drawing The work you create in CorelDRAW; for example,

custom artwork, logos, posters, and newsletters

vector graphic An image generated from mathematical descriptions

that determine the position, length, and direction in

which lines are drawn

bitmap An image composed of grids of pixels or dots

docker A window containing available commands and

settings relevant to a specific tool or task

flyout A button that opens a group of related tools or menu

items

28 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Application window

When you launch CorelDRAW, the application window opens containing a drawing

window. Although more than one drawing window can be opened, you can apply

commands to the active drawing window only.

The CorelDRAW application window appears below.

Circled numbers correspond to the numbers in the following table, which

describes the main components of the application window.

artistic text A type of text to which you can apply special effects,

such as shadows

paragraph text A type of text to which you can apply formatting

options, and which can be edited in large blocks

Term Description

1 432 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13

CorelDRAW: CorelDRAW workspace tour 29

To toggle between displaying and hiding the status bar, click Window `

To o l b a r s ` Status bar.

Part Description

1. Toolbox A floating bar with tools for creating, filling, and

modifying objects in the drawing

2. Title bar The area displaying the title of the currently open drawing

3. Menu bar The area containing pull-down menu options

4. Toolbar A detachable bar that contains shortcuts to menu and

other commands

5. Drawing window The area outside the drawing page bordered by the scroll

bars and application controls

6. Property bar A detachable bar with commands that relate to the active

tool or object. For example, when the text tool is active,

the text property bar displays commands that create and

edit text.

7. Docker A window containing available commands and settings

relevant to a specific tool or task

8. Rulers Horizontal and vertical borders that are used to determine

the size and position of objects in a drawing

9. Document navigator The area at the bottom left of the application window that

contains controls for moving between pages and adding

pages

10. Drawing page The rectangular area inside the drawing window. It is the

printable area of your work area.

11. Status bar An area at the bottom of the application window that

contains information about object properties such as type,

size, color, fill, and resolution. The status bar also shows

the current mouse position.

12. Navigator A button at the lower-right corner that opens a smaller

display to help you move around a drawing

13. Color palette A dockable bar that contains color swatches

30 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Workspace tools

Application commands are accessible through th e menu bar, toolbars, toolbox, property

bar, and dockers. The property bar and dockers provide access to commands that relate

to the active tool or current task. The property bar, dockers, toolbars, and toolbox can

be opened, closed, and moved around your screen at any time.

You can customize many of these workspace tools to suit your needs. For more

information, see "Customizing CorelDRAW" in the Help.

Standard toolbar

The standard toolbar, which appears by default, contains buttons and controls that are

shortcuts to many of the menu commands. For information about customizing the

position, contents, and appearance of toolbars, see "Customizing toolbars" in the Help.

Click this button To

Start a new drawing

Open a drawing

Save a drawing

Print a drawing

Cut selected objects to the Clipboard

Copy selected objects to the Clipboard

Paste the Clipboard contents into a drawing

Undo an action

Restore an action that was undone

CorelDRAW: CorelDRAW workspace tour 31

More about toolbars

In addition to the standard toolbar, CorelDRAW has toolbars for specific kinds of tasks.

For example, the Te x t toolbar contains commands relevant to using the Te x t tool. If

you use a toolbar frequently, you can display it in the workspace at all times.

The following table describes toolbars other than the standard toolbar.

Import a drawing

Export a drawing

Start Corel applications

Open the Welcome screen

Set a zoom level

Enable or disable automatic alignment for the grid,

guidelines, objects, and dynamic guides

Open the Options dialog box

Toolbar Description

Text Contains commands for formatting and aligning text

Zoom Contains commands for zooming in and out of a

drawing page by specifying percentage of original

view, clicking the Zoom tool, and selecting a page

view

Internet Contains commands for Web-related tools for creating

rollovers and publishing to the Internet

Click this button To

32 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To toggle between displaying and hiding a toolbar, click Window ` To o l b a r s ,

and click the command with the toolbar name.

Exploring the toolbox

The toolbox contains tools for drawing and editing images. Some of the tools are visible

by default, while others are grouped in flyouts. Flyouts open to display a set of related

CorelDRAW tools. A small flyout arrow in the lower-right corner of a toolbox button

indicates a flyout. You can access the tools in a flyout by clicking the flyout arrow. After

you open a flyout, you can easily scan the contents of other flyouts by hovering over any

of the toolbox buttons which have flyout arrows. Flyouts function like toolbars when

you drag them away from the toolbox. This lets you view all the related tools while you

work.

In the default workspace, clicking the flyout arrow on the Shape tool opens the

Shape edit flyout.

The following table provides descriptions of the tools in the CorelDRAW toolbox.

Print merge Contains commands for print merge items that

combine text with a drawing such as creating and

loading data files, creating data fields for variable text,

and inserting print merge fields

Transform Contains commands for skewing, rotating, and

mirroring objects

Macros Contains commands for editing, testing, and running

macros

Toolbar Description

Flyout arrow

Toolbox

Flyout

CorelDRAW: CorelDRAW workspace tour 33

Tools

Pick tool

The Pick tool lets you select, size, skew, and rotate

objects.

Shape Edit tools

The Shape tool lets you edit the shape of objects.

The Smudge brush tool lets you distort a vector

object by dragging along its outline.

The Roughen brush tool lets you distort the outline

of a vector object by dragging along the outline.

The Tr a n s f o r m tool lets you transform an object by

using the Free rotation , Free angle reflection , Free

scale, and Free skew tools.

Crop tools

The Crop tool lets you remove unwanted areas in

objects.

The Knife tool lets you cut through objects.

The Eraser tool lets you remove areas of your

drawing.

The Virtual segment delete tool lets you delete

portions of objects that are between intersections.

Zoom tools

The Zoom tool lets you change the magnification

level in the drawing window.

The Hand tool lets you control which part of the

drawing is visible in the drawing window.

Curve tools

34 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

The Freehand tool lets you draw single line segments

and curves.

The Bézier tool lets you draw curves one segment at a

time.

The Artistic media tool provides access to the Brush ,

Sprayer , Calligraphic , and Pressure tools.

The Pen tool lets you draw curves one segment at a

time.

The Polyline tool lets you draw lines and curves in

preview mode.

The 3-point curve tool lets you draw a curve by

defining the start, end, and center points.

The Connector tool lets you join two objects with a

line.

The Dimension tool lets you draw vertical,

horizontal, slanted, or angular dimension lines.

Smart tools

The Smart fill tool lets you create objects from

enclosed areas and then apply a fill to those objects.

The Smart drawing tool converts your freehand

strokes to basic shapes and smoothed curves.

Rectangle tools

The Rectangle tool lets you draw rectangles and

squares.

The 3-point rectangle tool lets you draw rectangles

at an angle.

Ellipse tools

The Ellipse tool lets you draw ellipses and circles.

CorelDRAW: CorelDRAW workspace tour 35

The 3-point ellipse tool lets you draw ellipses at an

angle.

Object tools

The Polygon tool lets you draw symmetrical polygons

and stars.

The Star tool lets you draw perfect stars.

The Complex star tool lets you draw complex stars

that have intersecting sides.

The Graph paper tool lets you draw a grid of lines

similar to that on graph paper.

The Spiral tool lets you draw symmetrical and

logarithmic spirals.

Perfect Shapes tools

The Basic shapes tool lets you choose from a full set

of shapes, including hexagram, a smiley face, and a

right-angle triangle.

The Arrow shapes tool lets you draw arrows of

various shape, direction, and number of heads.

The Flowchart shapes tool lets you draw flowchart

symbols.

The Banner shapes tool lets you draw ribbon objects

and explosion shapes.

The Callout shapes tool lets you draw callouts and

labels.

Text tool

The Te x t tool lets you type words directly on the

screen as artistic or paragraph text.

36 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Table tool

The Ta b l e tool lets you draw and edit tables.

Interactive tools

The Blend tool lets you blend two objects.

The Contour tool lets you apply a contour to an

object.

The Distort tool lets you apply a Push or Pull

distortion, a Zipper distortion, or a Twister distortion

to an object.

The Drop shadow tool lets you apply a drop shadow

to an object.

The Envelope tool lets you shape an object by

dragging the nodes of the envelope.

The Extrude tool lets you apply the illusion of depth

to objects.

The Tr a n s p a r e n c y tool lets you apply transparencies

to objects.

Eyedropper tools

The Eyedropper tool lets you select and copy object

properties, such as fill, line thickness, size, and effects,

from an object on the drawing window.

The Paintbucket tool lets you apply object

properties, such as fill, line thickness, size and effects,

to an object in the drawing window after you select

these properties with the Eyedropper tool.

Outline tool

The Outline tool opens a flyout that gives you quick

access to items such as the Outline pen dialog box

and Outline color dialog box.

CorelDRAW: CorelDRAW workspace tour 37

Property bar

The property bar displays the most commonly used functions that are relevant to the

active tool or to the task you're performing. Although it looks like a toolbar, the

property bar content changes depending on the tool or task.

For example, when you click the Te x t tool in the toolbox, the property bar di splays text-

related commands. In the example below, the property bar displays text, formatting,

alignment, and editing tools.

You can customize the contents and position of the property bar to suit your needs. For

more information, see "Customizing the property bar" in the Help.

To toggle between displaying and hiding the property bar, click Window `

To o l b a r s ` Property bar .

Dockers

Dockers display the same types of controls as a dialog box, such as command buttons,

options, and list boxes. Unlike most dialog boxes, you can keep dockers open while

working on a document, so you can readily access the commands to experiment with

different effects. Dockers have features similar to palettes in other graphics programs.

To access a docker, click Window ` Dockers , and click a docker.

Dockers can be either docked or floating. Docking a docker attaches it to the edge of

the application window. Undocking a docker detaches it from other parts of the

Fill tool

The Fill tool opens a flyout that gives you quick access

to items such as the fill dialog boxes.

Interactive fill tools

The Interactive fill tool lets you apply various fills.

The Mesh fill tool lets you apply a mesh grid to an

object.

38 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

workspace, so it can be easily moved around. You can also collapse dockers to save screen

space.

If you open several dockers, they usually appear nested, with only one docker fully

displayed. You can quickly display a docker hidden from view by clicking the docker's

tab.

Left: Docked and nested dockers. Right: A floating docker. To dock a floating

docker, click the docker's title bar, and drag to position the pointer on the edge

of the drawing window. To close a docker, click the X button at the top corner;

to collapse or expand a docker, click the arrow button at the top corner.

Status bar

The status bar displays information about selected objects (such as color, fill type, and

outline, cursor position, and relevant commands).

See "Customizing the status bar" in the Help for information about customizing the

contents and appearance of the status bar.

CorelDRAW: CorelDRAW basics 39

CorelDRAW basics

CorelDRAW lets you create and edit drawings.

In this section, you'll learn about

vector graphics and bitmaps

starting and opening drawings

finding content

undoing, redoing, and repeating actions

zooming, panning, and scrolling

saving drawings

closing drawings and quitting CorelDRAW

exploring basic tasks

Vector graphics and bitmaps

The two main types of computer graphics are vector graphics and bitmaps. Vector

graphics are made of lines and curves, and they are generated from mathematical

descriptions that determine the position, length, and direction in which lines are drawn.

Bitmaps, also known as raster images, are composed of tiny squares called pixels; each

pixel is mapped to a location in an image and has numerical color values.

Vector graphics are ideal for logos and illustrations because they are resolution-

independent and can be scaled to any size, or printed and displayed at any resolution,

without losing detail and quality. In addition, you can produce sharp and crisp outlines

with vector graphics.

Bitmaps are excellent for photographs and digital paintings because they reproduce

color gradations well. Bitmaps are resolution-dependent — that is, they represent a

fixed number of pixels. While they look good at their actual size, they can appear jagged

or lose image quality when scaled, or when displayed or printed at a resolution higher

than their original resolution.

40 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

You can create vector graphics in CorelDRAW. You can also import bitmaps (such as

JPEG and TIFF files) in CorelDRAW and integrate them into your drawings. For

information about working with bitmaps, see "Working with bitmaps" on page 219.

The top illustration is a vector graphic consisting of lines and fills. The bottom

version is a bitmap made up of pixels.

Starting and opening drawings

CorelDRAW lets you start a new drawing from a blank page, from a template, or from

an existing drawing. A blank page gives you the freedom to specify every aspect of a

drawing. A template provides you with a starting point and leaves the amount of

customization up to you. Basing a new drawing on an existing drawing lets you reuse

objects and page settings. CorelDRAW lets you open existing drawings saved to the

CorelDRAW (CDR) format as well as drawings and projects saved to various file formats

such as Corel DESIGNER (DSF or DES), Adobe Illustrator (AI), Adobe Portable

Document Format (PDF), Encapsulated PostScript® (EPS), and Computer Graphics

Metafile (CGM). However, you may not be able to open certain files, depending on their

file type and contents. In such cases, you can try importing the files as objects in an open

drawing. For information about the file formats you can import in CorelDRAW, see

"Supported file formats" in the Help.

CorelDRAW: CorelDRAW basics 41

If the drawing you are opening is from an earlier version of CorelDRAW and contains

text in a language different from the langua ge of your operating system, you can choose

code page settings to ensure that text is properly converted according to the Unicode™

Standard. Code page settings help you correctly display text outside the drawing

window, such as keywords, file names, and text entries in the Object manager and

Object data manager dockers. To display text correctly in the drawing window, you

need to use encoding settings. For more information, see "Encoding text" in the Help.

If the drawing you are opening contains an embedded International Color

Consortium® (ICC) profile, you can extract and save the profile. You can also preserve

a drawing's layers and pages.

If you are using Windows Vista, you can search for drawings by different criteria, such

as filename, text within the file, and other properties attached to the file. For more

information about searching for files on Windows Vista, see the Windows Vista Help.

You can also display previous versions of a drawing.

To start CorelDRAW

•Click Start ` All programs ` CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 `

CorelDRAW X4.

To start a drawing

When you start a drawing from a blank page, the drawing is based on the

default CorelDRAW template.

You can specify different page layout settings. For more information, see

"Specifying the page layout" on page 161.

To Do the following

Start a drawing from a blank page Do one of the following:

•On the Welcome Page, click Quick Start

` New Blank Document.

•In the application window, click File `

New .

Start a drawing from a template Click File ` New from template, choose a

template, and click Open .

42 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To open a drawing

1Click File ` Open.

2Locate the folder where the drawing is stored.

3Click a filename.

4Click Open.

You can also

Embed International Color Consortium

(ICC) profile to the color folder in which the

application is installed

Enable the Extract embedded ICC profile

check box.

This option is not available for all file

formats.

Maintain layers and pages when you open

files

Enable the Maintain layers and pages

check box.

If you disable the check box, all layers are

combined in a single layer.

This option is not available for all file

formats.

View thumbnail of a drawing (Windows Vista) Click the arrow button

next to the Views button, and click Extra

Large Icons, Large Icons, Medium Icons,

or Small Icons .

(Windows XP) Do one of the following:

•Enable the Preview check box.

•Click the View menu button, and select

Thumbnails.

Choose a code page (Windows Vista) Choose a code page from

the Select code page list box. This option is

not available for all file formats.

(Windows XP) Choose a code page from the

Code page list box.

CorelDRAW: CorelDRAW basics 43

You can also open a drawing by clicking the Open button on the toolbar.

Finding content

You can browse for clipart, photo images, and other content by using such user-tagged

data as keyword, title, author, note, subject, date modified, or rating. CorelDRAW is

fully integrated with the search capabilities that are offered by Windows Vista. If your

operating system is Windows XP, you can use the Windows Desktop Search to find files.

To search for content with Windows Vista

1Do one of the following:

• Click File ` Open to open a file.

• Click File ` Import to import a file into your current drawing.

2Type a word or phrase in the Search box.

Search for a drawing (Windows Vista) Type a word or phrase in the search box.

The search box looks for files only in the

current folder and subfolders. To search for a

drawing in another location, you must first

navigate to the folder where the drawing is

stored.

Access a previous version of a file (Windows

Vista)

Do one of the following:

•Click the arrow button next to the Open

button, and click Show previous

versions.

•Right-click a file, and click Restore

previous versions.

You can access a previous version of a file

only if System Protection is turned on.

For detailed information about accessing

previous versions of files, see the Windows

Vista Help.

You can also

44 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

You can search for data such as filename, title, subject, author, keyword, comment,

bitmap names, or object names. For more information on searching, see the

Windows Vista Help.

To browse for images online, you must be connected to the Internet.

To search for content with Windows XP

1Use the Windows Desktop Search to find the file.

2Click and drag the file into CorelDRAW.

Undoing, redoing, and repeating actions

You can undo the actions you perform in a drawing, starting with the most recent

action. If you don't like the result of undoing an action, you can redo it. Reverting to

the last saved version of a drawing also lets you remove one or more actions. Certain

actions applied to objects, such as stretching, filling, moving and rotating, can be

repeated to create a stronger visual effect.

Customizing the undo settings lets you increase or decrease the number of actions that

you can undo or redo.

To undo, redo, and repeat actions

To Do the following

Undo an action Click Edit ` Undo .

Redo an action Click Edit ` Redo .

Undo or redo a series of actions Click To o l s ` Undo . In the Undo docker,

choose the action that precedes all the

actions you want to undo, or choose the last

action you want to redo.

Revert to the last saved version of a drawing Click File ` Revert .

Repeat an action Click Edit ` Repeat .

CorelDRAW: CorelDRAW basics 45

When you undo a series of actions in the Undo docker, all actions listed below

the action you choose are undone.

When you redo a series of actions in the Undo docker, the action you choose

and all actions listed between it and the last undone action are redone.

You can repeat an action on another object or group of objects by selecting the

object or objects and clicking Edit ` Repeat.

You can also undo or redo actions by clicking the Undo button or Redo

button on the Standard toolbar.

You can also undo or redo a series of actions by clicking the arrow button next

to the Undo button or Redo button on the Standard toolbar and

choosing an action from the list.

Zooming, panning, and scrolling

You can change the view of a drawing by zooming in to get a closer look or by zooming

out to see more of the drawing. You can experiment with a variety of zoom options to

determine the amount of detail you want. Another way in which you can view specific

areas of a drawing is by panning. When you work at high magnification levels or with

large drawings, you may not be able to see the whole drawing. Panning and scrolling

let you view areas that aren't displayed by moving the page around in the drawing

window.

You can use the Hand tool to pan around a large image and view particular

areas.

46 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

You can zoom in and out while you are panning, and you can pan while you are

zooming; this saves you from having to alternate between the two tools.

If you use a mouse wheel, by default the wheel will zoom in to or out from the

image.

To scroll vertically using a mouse wheel, press Alt while you move the wheel.

To scroll horizontally, press Ctrl while you move the wheel.

To zoom

1In the toolbox, click the Zoom tool .

2On the property bar, click one of the following buttons:

Zoom in

Zoom out

Zoom to selected

Zoom to all objects

Zoom to page

Zoom to page width

Zoom to page height

The Zoom to selected button is available only when you select one or more

objects before you click the Zoom tool.

When you are not editing text, you can also access the Zoom tool by pressing

the Z key.

You can also zoom in by double-clicking or dragging anywhere in the drawing

window using the Hand tool . To zoom out, right-click in the drawing

window.

To pan in the drawing window

1In the toolbox, click the Hand tool .

2Drag in the drawing window until the area you want to view appears.

CorelDRAW: CorelDRAW basics 47

When you are not editing text, you can also access the Hand tool by pressing

the H key.

If you want to pan in the drawing window while zoomed in on the drawing,

click the Navigator button in the bottom-right corner of the drawing

window or press the N key and drag the cross-haired pointer around in the

Navigator pop-up window.

You can quickly center the page in the drawing window by double-clicking the

Zoom tool in the toolbox.

Using the Navigator, you can display any part of a drawing without having

to zoom out.

Saving drawings

By default, drawings are saved to the CorelDRAW file format (CDR) and are

compatible with the latest version of the application. You can also save a drawing that

is compatible with an earlier version of CorelDRAW Graphics Suite. This is especially

useful if you want to use the drawing with Corel R.A.V.E.™

You can save a drawing to other vector file formats as well. If you want to use a drawing

in another application, you must save it to a file format that is supported by that

application. For information about file formats supported by CorelDRAW, see

"Supported file formats" in the Help.

When you save a drawing, CorelDRAW lets you add reference information so that you

can easily find and organize drawings later on. In Windows Vista, you can attach tags

48 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

(also known as properties) such as title, subject, and rating. In Windows XP, you can

assign notes and keywords to a drawing.

If your drawing will be viewed on a system that does not have all of the fonts used in

the drawing, you can embed all fonts to ensure that text will appear as originally

created.

You can also save selected objects in a drawing. For large drawings, saving only the

selected objects reduces the file size, which can decrease the time it takes to load the

drawing.

A drawing can also be saved as a template, allowing you to create other drawings with

the same properties. For information abou t saving a drawing as a template, see

"Working with templates" on page 241.

To save a drawing

1Click File ` Save as.

2Type a filename in the File name list box.

3Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

If you want the drawing to be compatible with a previous version of CorelDRAW,

choose a version from the Version list box.

If you want to save the drawing to a vector file format other than CorelDRAW

(CDR), choose a file format from the Save as type list box.

You can also

Save only selected objects Select the objects. Click File ` Save as.

Enable the Selected only check box. Locate

the folder where you want to save the file.

Type a filename in the File name list box.

Click Save .

Add reference information (Windows Vista) Do any the following:

•Type a title, subject, tag, comment,

author, or revision number in the

corresponding box.

•Assign a rating to the file.

•Add copyright information.

Save notes or keywords with the file

(Windows XP)

Type notes or keywords in the corresponding

box.

CorelDRAW: CorelDRAW basics 49

Saving a drawing to a previous version of CorelDRAW may result in loss of

certain effects that were not available in the previous version of the application.

When you save to a previous version of CorelDRAW, the content and

appearance of the document is maintained, but layers are affected in the

following ways:

Layer names are reset to CorelDRAW default names.

The number of layers per page is set according to the page with the

most layers.

Master layers are converted to local layers, with the exception of the

default master layers (Guides , Grid, Desktop ).

Local Guides layers are converted to regular layers.

For more information about layers, see "Working with layers" on page 185.

You can also save a drawing by clicking File ` Save .

Closing drawings and quitting CorelDRAW

You can close one or all open drawings at any time before quitting CorelDRAW.

To close drawings

Embed fonts in a drawing Enable the Embed fonts using

Tr u e D o c ( T M ) check box.

To Do the following

Close one drawing Click File ` Close .

Close all open drawings Click Window ` Close all.

You can also

50 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To quit CorelDRAW

•Click File ` Exit.

You can also quit CorelDRAW by pressing Alt + F4 .

Exploring basic tasks

CorelDRAW has a virtually unlimited number of tools and capabilities to help you

create drawings. The following table prov ides you with the basic features of

CorelDRAW to help you get started.

For information about See

Drawing lines "Working with lines, outlines, and

brushstrokes" on page 63

Drawing shapes "Drawing shapes" on page 51

Creating and manipulating objects "Working with objects" on page 81

Adding color to objects "Filling objects" on page 137

Adding text to a drawing "Adding and selecting text" on page 195

Creating drawings for use on the Web "Publishing to the Web" in the Help

Printing drawings "Printing basics" on page 253

Need more information?

The CorelDRAW Help has more informatio n to help you get started with the

program. To access this information, see "CorelDRAW basics" in the "Getting

started" section of the Help.

CorelDRAW: Drawing shapes 51

Drawing shapes

CorelDRAW lets you draw basic shapes, which you can modify by using special effects

and reshaping tools.

In this section, you'll learn about

drawing rectangles and squares

drawing ellipses, circles, arcs, and pie shapes

drawing polygons and stars

drawing spirals

drawing predefined shapes

drawing by using shape recognition

Drawing rectangles and squares

CorelDRAW lets you draw rectangles and squares. You can draw a rectangle or square

by dragging diagonally with the Rectangle tool or by specifying the width and height

with the 3-point rectangle tool. The 3-point rectangle tool lets you quickly draw

rectangles at an angle.

After you draw a rectangle or square, you can reshape it by rounding one or more of its

corners.

You can create a rectangle by first drawing its baseline and then drawing its

height. The resulting rectangle is angled.

52 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To draw a rectangle or square by dragging diagonally

You can draw a rectangle from its center outward by holding down Shift as

you drag. You can also draw a square from its center outward by holding down

Shift + Ctrl as you drag.

You can draw a rectangle that covers the drawing page by double-clicking the

Rectangle tool.

To round the corners of a rectangle or square

1Click a rectangle or square.

2Type values in the Corner roundness areas on the property bar.

To apply the same roundness to all corners, click the Round corners together

button on the property bar.

You can also round the corners of a selected rectangle or a square by filleting.

For more information, see "Filleting, scalloping, and chamfering corners" on

page 124.

You can also round the corners of a selected rectangle or square by using the

Shape tool to drag a corner node toward the shape's center.

To set default corner roundness, click To o l s ` Options, and double-click

To o l b o x from the Wor ksp ace list of categories. Then, click Rectangle tool ,

and move the slider or enter a number.

To Do the following

Draw a rectangle In the toolbox, click the Rectangle tool .

Drag in the drawing window until the

rectangle is the size you want.

Draw a square In the toolbox, click the Rectangle tool .

Hold down Ctrl , and drag in the drawing

window until the square is the size you want.

CorelDRAW: Drawing shapes 53

Drawing ellipses, circles, arcs, and pie shapes

You can draw an ellipse or circle by dragging diagonally with the Ellipse tool, or you

can draw an ellipse by using the 3-point ellipse tool to specify its width and height.

The 3-point ellipse tool lets you quickly create an ellipse at an angle, eliminating the

need to rotate the ellipse.

Using the Ellipse tool, you can draw a new arc or pie shape, or you can draw an ellipse

or circle and then change it to an arc or a pie shape.

Using the 3-point ellipse tool, you can draw an ellipse by first drawing its

centerline and then drawing its height. This method lets you draw ellipses at

an angle.

To draw an ellipse or a circle by dragging diagonally

You can draw an ellipse or a circle from its center outward by holding down

Shift as you drag.

To draw an ellipse by specifying width and height

1In the toolbox, click the 3-point ellipse tool .

2In the drawing window, drag to draw the centerline of the ellipse at the angle you

want.

To Do the following

Draw an ellipse In the toolbox, click the Ellipse tool .

Drag in the drawing window until the ellipse

is the shape you want.

Draw a circle In the toolbox, click the Ellipse tool .

Hold down Ctrl , and drag in the drawing

window until the circle is the size you want.

54 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

The centerline runs through the center of the ellipse and determines its width.

3Move the pointer to define the height of the ellipse, and click.

To draw an arc or a pie shape

To draw an arc, the ellipse or circle must have an outline.

You can change the direction of a selected arc or pie shape by clicking the

Clockwise/counterclockwise arcs or pies button on the property bar.

You can constrain the movement of the node to 15-degree increments by

holding down Ctrl as you drag.

To use the Shape tool to create a pie shape, drag the node of the ellipse (left) to

the inside of the ellipse (center). To create an arc, drag the node to the outside

of the ellipse (right).

To Do the following

Draw an arc In the toolbox, click the Ellipse tool. Click

the Arc button on the property bar. Drag in

the drawing window until the arc is the

shape you want.

Draw a pie shape In the toolbox, click the Ellipse tool. Click

the Pie button on the property bar. Drag in

the drawing window until the pie is the

shape you want.

CorelDRAW: Drawing shapes 55

Drawing polygons and stars

CorelDRAW lets you draw polygons and two types of stars: perfect and complex.

Perfect stars are traditional-looking stars and can have a fill applied to the entire star

shape. Complex stars have intersecting sides and produce original results with a fill

applied.

Left to right: Polygon, perfect star, and complex star, each with a fountain fill

applied

You can modify polygons and stars. For example, you can change the number of sides

on a polygon or the number of points on a star, and you can sharpen the points of a star.

You can also use the Shape tool to reshape polygons and complex stars, just as you

would with any other curve object. For more information about working with curve

objects, see "Using curve objects" on page 107. Perfect stars can also be reshaped, but

with some restrictions.

To draw a polygon

In the toolbox, click the Polygon tool , and drag in the drawing window until

the polygon is the size you want.

You can draw a polygon from its center by holding down Shift as you drag.

You can draw a symmetrical polygon by holding down Ctrl as you drag.

56 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To draw a star

You can draw a star from its center by holding down Shift as you drag.

You can draw a symmetrical star by holding down Ctrl as you drag.

To modify a polygon

Left to right: The Shape tool was used to change a polygon into a star that

can be shaped as a curve object. The line segments of the star were then converted

to curves and adjusted to produce the starfish shape.

To Do the following

Draw a perfect star In the toolbox, click the Star tool , and

drag in the drawing window until the star is

the size you want.

Draw a complex star In the toolbox, click the Complex star tool

, and drag in the drawing window until

the star is the size you want.

To Do the following

Change the number of sides of a polygon Select a polygon, type a value in the

Number of points or sides on polygon,

star or complex star box on the property

bar, and press Enter .

Reshape a polygon into a star Select a polygon, click the Shape tool ,

and drag a node on the polygon until the

star is the shape you want.

CorelDRAW: Drawing shapes 57

To modify a star

When you use the Shape tool to reshape a perfect star, the node movement is

constrained. Also, on perfect stars, you cannot add or delete nodes, nor can you

convert line segments to curves.

Drawing spirals

You can draw two types of spirals: symmetrical and logarithmic. Symmetrical spirals

expand evenly so that the distance between each revolution is equal. Logarithmic spirals

expand with increasingly larger distances between revolutions. You can set the rate by

which a logarithmic spiral expands outward.

A symmetrical spiral (left) and a logarithmic spiral (right)

To Do the following

Change the number of points on a star Select a star, type a value in the Number of

points or side on polygon, star or

complex star box on the property bar, and

press Enter .

Sharpen a star's points Select a star, and type a value in the

Sharpness of star and complex star box

on the property bar.

Reshape a star Select a star, click the Shape tool , and

drag a node on the star.

58 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To draw a spiral

1In the toolbox, click the Spiral tool .

2Type a value in the Spiral revolutions box on the property bar.

3On the property bar, click one of the following buttons:

Symmetrical spiral

Logarithmic spiral

If you want to change the amount by which the spiral expands as it moves

outward, move the Spiral expansion slider.

4Drag diagonally in the drawing window until the spiral is the required size.

You can draw a spiral from its center outward by holding down Shift as you

drag.

You can also draw a spiral with even horizontal and vertical dimensions by

holding down Ctrl as you drag.

Drawing predefined shapes

Using the Perfect Shapes™ collection, you can draw predefined shapes. Certain

shapes — specifically basic shapes, arrow shapes, banner shapes, and callout shapes

contain glyphs. You can drag a glyph to modify the appearance of a shape.

Using the Shape tool, you can drag a glyph to alter a shape.

You can add text to the inside or outside of the shape. For example, you might want to

put a label inside a flowchart symbol or a callout.

CorelDRAW: Drawing shapes 59

To draw a predefined shape

1In the toolbox, click one of the following tools:

Basic shapes

Arrows shapes

Flowchart shapes

Banner shapes

Callout shapes

2Open the Perfect Shapes picker on the property bar, and click a shape.

3Drag in the drawing window until the shape is the size you want.

Like other shapes, shapes that are drawn with a Perfect Shapes tool can be

modified.

To modify a predefined shape

1Select a shape that contains a glyph.

2Drag a glyph until you achieve the shape you want.

The right-angle, heart, lightning bolt, explosion, and flowchart shapes do not

contain glyphs.

To add text to a predefined shape

1Click the Te x t tool .

2Position the cursor inside the shape's outline until it changes to a text cursor .

3Type inside the shape, choose a font, and format the text.

Drawing by using shape recognition

You can use the Smart drawing tool to draw freehand strokes that can be recognized

and converted to basic shapes. Rectangles and ellipses are translated to native

CorelDRAW objects; trapezoids and parallel ograms are translated to Perfect Shapes

objects; lines, triangles, squares, diamonds, circles, and arrows are translated to curve

objects. If an object is not converted to a shape, it is smoothed. Objects and curves

drawn with shape recognition are editable. You can set the level at which CorelDRAW

60 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

recognizes shapes and converts them to objects. You can also specify the amount of

smoothing applied to curves.

You can set the amount of time to elapse between making a pen stroke and the

implementation of shape recognition. For example, if the timer is set to one second and

you draw a circle, shape recognition takes effect one second after you draw the circle.

You can make corrections as you draw. You can also change the thickness and line style

of a shape that was drawn by using shape recognition.

Shapes created with the Smart drawing tool are recognized and smoothed.

To draw a shape or line by using shape recognition

1Click the Smart drawing tool .

2Choose a recognition level from the Recognition level list box on the property bar.

3Choose a smoothing level from the Smoothing level list box on the property bar.

4Draw a shape or line in the drawing window.

The Smart drawing tool property bar is displayed only when the Smart

drawing tool is selected.

To set shape recognition delay

1Click To o l s ` Customization.

2In the To o l b o x list of categories, click Smart drawing tool.

3Move the Drawing assistance delay slider.

The minimum delay is 10 milliseconds; the maximum is 2 seconds.

CorelDRAW: Drawing shapes 61

To make a correction while using shape recognition

Before the delay recognition period has elapsed, hold down Shift , and drag over the

area you want to correct.

You must start erasing the shape or line from the last point drawn.

If you are drawing a freehand shape consisting of several curves, you can delete

the last curve drawn by pressing Esc .

Need more information?

For more information about drawing shap es, see "Drawing shapes" in the "Lines,

shapes, and outlines" section of the Help.

CorelDRAW: Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes 63

Working with lines,

outlines, and brushstrokes

CorelDRAW lets you add lines and brushstrokes by using a variety of techniques and

tools. After you draw lines or apply brushstrokes to lines, you can format them. You

can also format the outlines that surround objects.

CorelDRAW provides preset objects that you can spray along a line. You can also create

flow and dimension lines in drawings.

You can also draw lines by using shape recognition. For more information, see "Drawing

by using shape recognition" on page 59.

In this section, you'll learn about

drawing lines

drawing calligraphic, pressure-sensitive, and preset lines

formatting lines and outlines

copying, converting, and removing outlines

applying brushstrokes

spraying objects along a line

drawing flow and dimension lines

Drawing lines

A line is a path between two points. Lines can consist of multiple segments, and the line

segments can be curved or straight. The line segments are connected by nodes, which

are depicted as small squares. CorelDRAW provides various drawing tools that let you

draw curved and straight lines, and lines containing both curved and straight segments.

Freehand and Polyline tools

The Freehand and Polyline tools let you draw freehand lines as if you were

sketching on a sketchpad. If you make a mistake while drawing, you can erase the

unwanted part immediately and continue drawing. When drawing straight lines or

segments, you can constrain them to straight vertical or horizontal lines.

64 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

The Freehand tool lets you control the smoothness of the curved line you are drawing

as well as add segments to an existing line. However, the Polyline tool is easier to use

for quickly drawing a complex line that consists of alternating curved and straight

segments.

Bézier and Pen tools

The Bézier and Pen tools let you draw lines one segment at a time by placing

each node with precision and controlling the shape of each curved segment. When using

the Pen tool, you can preview the line segments you are drawing.

You can draw lines with multiple segments by using the Bézier tool and

clicking each time you want the line to change direction.

3-point curve tool

The 3-point curve tool lets you draw simple curved lines by specifying their width

and height. Use this tool to create arc sh apes quickly without manipulating nodes.

CorelDRAW: Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes 65

You can draw a curved line by specifying its width (left), and then specifying

its height and clicking the page (right).

Smart drawing tool

The Smart drawing tool lets you use shape recognition to draw straight and curved

lines. For more information, see "Drawing by using shape recognition" on page 59.

Using nodes and control handles

Some lines have nodes and control handles that you can manipulate to shape lines as

you draw. For information about node types, see "Using curve objects" on page 107.

To draw a line by using the Freehand tool

1In the toolbox, click the Freehand tool .

2Perform a task from the following table.

To Do the following

Draw a curved line Click where you want to start the curved

line, and drag.

Draw a straight line Click where you want to start the line, and

then click where you want the line to end.

Control the smoothness of a curved line Type a value in the Freehand smoothing

box on the property bar. Higher values

produce smoother curves.

66 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

You can constrain a line created with the Freehand tool to a predefined angle,

called a constrain angle, by holding down Ctrl while you drag. This feature is

useful for drawing straight vertical and horizontal lines.

You can erase a portion of a curved freehand line by holding down Shift and

dragging backward over the line before releasing the mouse button.

To draw a line by using the Polyline tool

1In the toolbox, click the Polyline tool .

2Do one of the following:

• To draw a straight segment, click where you want to start the line segment, and

then click where you want to end it.

• To draw a curved segment, click where you want to start the segment, and drag

across the drawing page.

You can add as many segments as you want and alternate between curved and

straight segments.

3Double-click to end the line.

You can close an open object by clicking the Auto-close curve button on

the property bar.

To draw a line by using the Bézier tool

1In the toolbox, click the Bézier tool .

2Do one of the following:

To draw a curved segment, click where you want to place the first node, and drag

the control handle to where you want to place the next node. Release the mouse

button, and drag the control handle to create the curve.

Add line segments to an existing line Click the end node of a selected line, and

click where you want the new segment to

end.

Create a closed shape from two or more

connected lines

In a line that contains two segments, click

the end node, and then click the start node.

To Do the following

CorelDRAW: Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes 67

• To draw a straight segment, click where you want to start the line segment, and

click where you want to end it.

You can add as many segments as you want.

3Press the Spacebar to finish the line.

To draw a line by using the Pen tool

1In the toolbox, click the Pen tool .

2Do one of the following:

To draw a curved segment, click where you want to place the first node, and drag

the control handle to where you want to place the next node. Release the mouse

button, and drag the control handle to create the curve you want.

• To draw a straight segment, click where you want to start the line segment, and

click where you want to end it.

You can add as many segments as you want and alternate between curved and

straight segments. For more information about alternating curved and straight

segments, see "To draw a line by using the Bézier tool" on page 66.

3Double-click to finish the line.

You can also

Draw a curved segment followed by a

straight segment

Draw a curved segment, double-click the

end node, and click where you want the

straight segment to end.

Draw a straight segment followed by a

curved segment

Draw a straight segment. Click the endpoint

of the segment, drag to where you want, and

release the mouse button. Drag to draw a

curve.

Change curve angle to preset increments as

you draw

While holding down Ctrl , drag a control

handle.

You can also

Preview a line while drawing Enable the Preview mode button in the

property bar. Click on the drawing page, and

release the mouse button. Move the mouse,

and click to finish the line.

68 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To draw a curve by specifying width and height

1In the toolbox, click the 3-point curve tool .

2Click where you want to start the curve, and drag to where you want the curve to

end.

3Release the mouse button, and click where you want the center of the curve to be.

Drawing calligraphic, pressure-sensitive, and preset lines

CorelDRAW lets you simulate the effect of a calligraphic pen when you draw lines.

Calligraphic lines vary in thickness according to the direction of the line and the angle

of the pen nib. By default, calligraphic lines appear as closed shapes drawn with a pencil.

You can control the thickness of a calligraphic line by changing the angle of the line you

draw in relation to the calligraphic angle you choose. For example, when the line you

draw is perpendicular to the calligraphic angle, the line is at the maximum thickness

specified by the pen width. Lines drawn at the calligraphic angle, however, have little

or no thickness.

Add a node to a line Enable the Auto add-delete button on

the property bar. Point to where in the line

you want to add a node, and click when the

pointer changes to the Add node state .

Delete a node from a line Point to a node, and click when the pointer

changes to the Delete node state .

You can also

CorelDRAW: Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes 69

A calligraphic pen allows you to draw lines of various thicknesses.

CorelDRAW lets you create pressure-sensitive lines which vary in thickness. You can

create this effect using the mouse or a pressure-sensitive pen and graphics tablet. Both

methods result in lines with curved edges and varying widths along a path. For

information about using a pressure-sensitive pen on a graphics tablet, see the

manufacturer's instructions.

A flower drawn by using three different artistic media lines: calligraphic lines

(left), pressure-sensitive lines of variable thickness (center), and flat preset lines

(right).

CorelDRAW provides preset lines that let you create thick strokes in a variety of shapes.

After you draw a calligraphic or preset line, you can apply a fill to it as you would to any

other object. For information about applying fills, see "Filling objects" on page 137.

70 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To draw a calligraphic line

1In the toolbox, click the Artistic media tool .

2Click the Calligraphic button on the property bar.

If you want to set the width of the line, type a value in the Artistic media tool

width box on the property bar.

3Type a value in the Calligraphic angle box on the property bar.

If you want to smooth the edges of the line, type a value in the Freehand

smoothing box on the property bar.

4Drag until the line is the shape you want.

The width you set is the maximum line width. The angle of the line you draw

in relation to the calligraphic angle determines the line's actual width.

To draw a pressure-sensitive line

1In the toolbox, click the Artistic media tool .

2Click the Pressure button on the property bar.

If you are using the mouse, press the Up arrow or Down arrow to simulate

changes in pen pressure and change the width of the line.

3Drag until the line is the shape you want.

If you want to change the width of the line, type a value in the Artistic media tool

width box on the property bar.

To draw a preset line

1In the toolbox, click the Artistic media tool .

2Click the Preset button on the property bar.

3Choose a preset line shape from the Preset stroke list list box.

If you want to smooth the edges of the line, type a value in the Freehand

smoothing box on the property bar.

4Drag until the line is the shape you want.

If you want to set the width of the line, type a value in the Artistic media tool

width box on the property bar.

CorelDRAW: Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes 71

Formatting lines and outlines

Lines are treated the same way as outlines of closed shapes, such as ellipses and

polygons. You can change the appearance of both lines and outlines by using the

controls of the Outline pen dialog box, the Outline page of the Object properties

docker, and the property bar. For example, you can specify the color, width, and style

of lines and outlines.

You can choose a corner style to control the corner shape in lines and choose a line cap

style to change the appearance of a line's endpoints. By default, an outline is applied on

top of an object's fill, but you can apply it behind the fill, with the fill overlapping the

outline. You can also link the outline thickness to an object's size so that the outline

increases when you increase the object's size and decreases when you decrease the

object's size.

When an object contains lines that meet at sharp angles, you can set the miter limit to

determine their corner shape. Corners with angles above the miter limit are pointed

(mitered); corners with angles below the miter limit are beveled (squared off).

You can create calligraphic outlines. A calligraphic outline varies in thickness, creating

the effect of a hand-made drawing. In addition, you can add arrowheads to lines and

curves. You can create new arrowheads and edit existing arrowheads.

The default line and outline properties for each new object that you draw are as follows:

hairline width

CMYK black color

•solid line

square corner and line cap styles

no arrowheads applied

outline applied on top of an object's fill

In some programs, outlines are known as strokes or thick lines.

Creating cuttable outlines

To create a cuttable outline for devices such as plotters and vinyl cutters, which cannot

interpret outline width; you need first to convert the outline to an object. For more

information, see "Copying, converting, and removing outlines" on page 73.

Another way to create a cuttable outline is by using a contour effect. For more

information, see "To contour an object" on page 148.

72 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To specify line and outline settings

1Select an object.

2In the toolbox, click the Outline tool , and click Outline pen.

3Open the color picker, and click a color.

4Type a value in the Width box.

5Choose a line style from the Style box.

You can quickly access the Outline pen dialog box by double-clicking the

Outline icon on the status bar.

You can also change the outline width of a selected object by typing a value in

the Outline width box on the property bar.

To create a calligraphic outline

1Select an object.

2In the toolbox, click the Outline tool , and click Outline pen.

You can also

Set the shape of corners In the Corners area, choose a corner style.

Set the appearance of endpoints in open

paths

Choose a cap style in the Line caps area.

Apply an outline behind an object's fill Enable the Behind fill check box.

Link the outline thickness to an object's size Enable the Scale with image check box.

Create a line style Click Edit style , and move the slider in the

Edit line style dialog box. By clicking the

boxes to the left of the slider, you can specify

the placement and frequency of the dots in

the new line style you create. Click Add .

Edit a line style Choose a line style from the Style list box,

and click Edit style . Create a line style in the

Edit line style dialog box, and click

Replace.

Set the miter limit Type a value in the Miter limit box.

CorelDRAW: Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes 73

3In the Corners area, enable a corner style.

4In the Calligraphy area, type a value in the Stretch box to change the width of the

pen's nib.

The value range is from 1 to 100, with 100 as the default setting. Reducing the

value makes square nibs rectangular and round nibs oval, creating a more

pronounced calligraphic effect.

5Ty p e a v a l u e i n t h e Angle box to change the orientation of the pen in relation to the

drawing surface.

To reset Stretch and Angle values to their original values, click Default .

You can also adjust the Stretch and Angle values by dragging in the Nib

shape preview box.

To add an arrowhead

1Select a line or curve.

2In the toolbox, click the Outline tool , and click Outline pen.

3In the Arrows area, open the Start arrowhead picker, and click a line-ending

shape.

4Open the End arrowhead picker, and click a line-ending shape.

Copying, converting, and removing outlines

CorelDRAW lets you copy outline properties to other objects. For information about

copying outline properties, see "To copy fill, outline, or text properties from one object

to another" on page 91.

You can also convert an outline to an object, and you can remove an outline. Converting

an outline to an object creates an unfilled cl osed object with the outline's shape. You can

apply fills and special effects to the new object. Converting outline to an object can be

used to create cuttable outlines for devices such as plotters, engraving machines, and

vinyl cutters, which cannot interpret outline width in CorelDRAW files.

74 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To convert an outline to an object

1Select an object.

2Click Arrange ` Convert outline to object.

The outline becomes an unfilled closed object independent of the original object's

fill. If you want to apply a fill to the new object, the fill is applied to the area, which

was the original object's outline.

A star with an outline applied (left); the outline has been converted to an object

independent of the original fill (center); a fountain fill was applied to the new

closed object.

To remove the outline of an object

1Select an object.

2On the property bar, choose None from the Outline width list box.

You can also remove an object's outline by selecting the object and right-

clicking No Color on the color palette.

Applying brushstrokes

CorelDRAW lets you apply a variety of preset brushstrokes, ranging from strokes with

arrowheads to ones that are filled with rainbow patterns. When you draw a preset

brushstroke, you can specify some of its attributes. For example, you can change the

width of a brushstroke and specify its smoothness.

You can also create custom brushstrokes by using an object or a group of vector objects.

When you create a custom brushstroke, you can save it as a preset.

CorelDRAW: Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes 75

To apply a preset brushstroke

1In the toolbox, click the Artistic media tool .

2Click the Brush button on the property bar.

3Choose a brushstroke from the Brushstroke list box.

If you want to smooth the edges of the brushstroke, type a value in the Freehand

smoothing box on the property bar.

4Drag until the stroke is the shape you want.

If you want to set the width of the stroke, type a value in the Artistic media tool

width box on the property bar.

If you have access to a brushstroke that isn't listed in the Brushstroke list box,

you can apply it by clicking the Browse button on the property bar and

locating the brushstroke file.

To create a custom brushstroke

1Select an object or a set of grouped objects.

2In the toolbox, click the Artistic media tool .

3Click the Brush button on the property bar.

4Click the object or grouped objects.

5Click the Save artistic media stroke button on the property bar.

6Type a filename for the brushstroke.

7Click Save.

Custom brushstrokes can be accessed from the Brushstroke list box on the

property bar.

To delete a custom brushstroke, choose the brushstroke from the Brushstroke

list box on the property bar, and click the Delete button .

You can create custom brushstrokes by clicking Effects ` Artistic media and

specifying the settings you want in the Artistic media docker.

76 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Spraying objects along a line

CorelDRAW lets you spray a series of objects in a line. Besides graphic and text objects,

you can import bitmaps and symbols to spray along a line.

You can control how a sprayed line appears by adjusting the spacing between objects,

so they are closer or farther apart from each other. You can also vary the order of objects

in the line. For example, if you are spraying a series of objects that includes a star, a

triangle, and a square, you can change the spray order so that the square appears first,

followed by the triangle and then the star. CorelDRAW also lets you shift the position

of objects in a sprayed line by rotating them along the path or offsetting them in one of

four different directions: alternating, left , random, or right. For example, you can

choose a left offset direction to align the objects you spray to the left of the path.

You can also create a new spraylist with objects of your own.

Objects sprayed along a curved line (left). The objects and line were edited after

the objects were sprayed (right).

To spray a line

1In the toolbox, click the Artistic media tool .

2Click the Sprayer button on the property bar.

3Choose a spraylist from the Spraylist file list box on the property bar.

If the spraylist you want is not listed, click the Browse button on the property bar

to select the folder in which the file is located.

4Drag to draw the line.

CorelDRAW: Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes 77

Increasing the value for the size of spray objects along the line causes objects to

become larger as they are distributed along the path.

Spraylists that have more complex objects use more system resources.

CorelDRAW requires more time to produce lines when complex objects are

used, and these objects increase the file size. Using symbols for each group in

the list can help reduce file size and ease the demands on your system. For more

information about creating symbols, see "Working with symbols" in the Help.

To create a new spraylist

1Click Effects ` Artistic media.

2Select an object, a set of grouped objects, or a symbol.

3Click the Save button on the Artistic media docker.

4Enable Object sprayer .

5Click OK.

You can also

Adjust the number of objects sprayed at each

spacing point

Type a number in the top box of the Dabs/

spacing of objects to be sprayed

box on the property bar.

Adjust the spacing between dabs Type a number in the bottom box of the

Dabs/spacing of objects to be sprayed

box on the property bar.

Set the spray order Choose a spray order from the Choice of

spray order list box on the property bar.

Adjust the size of spray objects Type a number in the top box of the Size of

objects to be sprayed box on the property

bar.

Increase or decrease the size of the spray

objects as they progress along the line

Type a number in the bottom box of the Size

of objects to be sprayed box on the

property bar.

Reset a spraylist to its saved settings Click the Reset values button on the

property bar.

78 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

6Type a filename in the Filename box.

7Click Save.

Spraylists are saved as CorelDRAW (CDR) files and can be accessed from the

Spraylist file list box on the Artistic media property bar.

Drawing flow and dimension lines

You can draw flow lines in flowcharts and organizational charts to connect chart shapes.

Objects stay connected by these lines even when you move one or both objects. For

information about drawing flowchart shapes, see "Drawing predefined shapes" on

page 58.

You can draw callout lines that label and draw attention to objects.

You can also draw dimension lines to indicate the distance between two points in a

drawing or the size of objects. By default, dimension lines and the measurements shown

on the lines change when you change an object's size.

Dimension lines can show the sizes of parts of an object.

To be able to use flow, callout, and dimension lines with precision, you need to snap

them to specific nodes in objects. For more information about snapping and snapping

modes, see "Snapping objects" on page 98.

CorelDRAW: Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes 79

To draw a flow line between two or more objects

1In the toolbox, click the Connector tool .

2On the property bar, click one of the following buttons:

Angled connector — to create a flow line containing right angles. The flow

line can be a sequence of vertical or horizontal segments, or both.

Straight connector — to create a straight flow line at any angle

3Drag from a node on one object to a node on another object.

To draw a callout

1In the toolbox, click the Dimension tool .

2Click the Callout tool on the property bar.

3Click where you want the first callout segment to start.

4Click where you want the second segment to start.

5Click where you want the second segment to end.

A text cursor is displayed at the end of the callout line, indicating where to type

a label for the object.

6Type the callout text.

To draw a dimension line

1In the toolbox, click the Dimension tool .

2On the property bar, click one of the following buttons:

Vertical dimension tool — to create a vertical dimension line that measures

the vertical distance between any two nodes (along the y-axis)

Horizontal dimension tool — to create a horizontal dimension line that

measures the horizontal distance between any two nodes (along the x-axis)

Slanted dimension tool — to create a slanted dimension line that measures

the length of slanted line segments

Auto dimension tool — to create a vertical or horizontal dimension line

3Click the start point and endpoints of the dimension line.

4Click where you want to place the dimension text.

80 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

You can also

Draw an angular dimension line Click the Angular dimension tool button

on the property bar. Click where you

want the two lines that measure the angle to

intersect. Click where you want the first line

to end, and click where you want the second

line to end. Click where you want the angle's

label to appear.

Need more information?

For more information about working with lines, outlines, and brush strokes, see

"Working with lines, outlines, and brush strokes" in the "Lines, shapes, and

outlines" section of the Help.

CorelDRAW: Working with objects 81

Working with objects

Working with objects is an essential part of creating drawings.

In this section, you'll learn about

selecting objects

transforming objects

copying, duplicating, and deleting objects

creating objects from enclosed areas

creating a boundary around selected objects

copying object properties, transformations, and effects

positioning objects

aligning and distributing objects

snapping objects

using dynamic guides

changing the order of objects

•grouping objects

•combining objects

inserting bar codes

Selecting objects

Before you can change an object, you must select it. You can select visible objects,

objects that are hidden from view by other objects, and a single object in a group or a

nested group. In addition, you can select objects in the order in which they were created,

select all objects at once, and deselect objects.

82 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

A bounding box appears around a selected object, and an "X" appears at its

center.

To select objects

The status bar displays a description of each hidden object as you select it.

To Do the following

Select an object Click the Pick tool , and then click an

object.

Select multiple objects Click the Pick tool , hold down Shift,

and click each object that you want to select.

Select all objects Click Edit ` Select all ` Objects.

Select an object in a group Hold down Ctrl , click the Pick tool, and

then click an object in a group.

Select an object in a nested group Hold down Ctrl, click the Pick tool , and

then click an object one or more times, until

a selection box appears around it.

Select an object hidden from view by other

objects

Hold down Alt , click the Pick tool , and

then click the topmost object one or more

times, until a selection box appears around

the hidden object.

CorelDRAW: Working with objects 83

You can also select one or more objects by clicking the Pick tool and then

dragging around the object or object s. This method is known as marquee

selecting.

To deselect objects

Transforming objects

You can change the appearance of objects in the drawing window by using the following

transformations.

To Do the following

Deselect all objects Click the Pick tool , and click a blank

space in the drawing window.

Deselect a single object among multiple

selected objects

Hold down Shift , click the Pick tool ,

and then click the object.

Transformation Example

Sizing lets you change the width and height

of an object.

Scaling lets you size an object to a

percentage of its original size.

84 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Skewing lets you slant an object to one side.

Stretching lets you change the height and

width of an object nonproportionally.

Rotating lets you turn an object around its

center axis or a point relative to its position.

Mirroring lets you create a horizontal or

vertical mirror image of an object.

Transformation Example

CorelDRAW: Working with objects 85

Transforming objects interactively

You can transform an object interactively by using the mouse and the Pick tool. This

method is the quickest, but it is not recommended if you want to transform an object

with precision.

Other methods for transforming objects

You can transform an object in any of the following ways:

For more precise results, you can select an object with the Pick tool and adjust

settings on the property bar. For example, you can specify a precise rotation angle

or specify the size of an object.

•The Transformation docker lets you transform objects with precision and apply

the transformation to the duplicate of an object, which is created automatically.

This feature lets you experiment with transformations without affecting the

original object. You can access the Tr a n s f o r m a t i o n docker by clicking Arrange `

Tr a n s f o r m a t i o n s and clicking a command.

•The Tr a n s f o r m toolbar also lets you transform objects with precision. You can

access the Tr a n s f o r m toolbar by clicking Windows ` To o l ba r s ` Tr an s f o r m .

Each of these methods lets you apply transfor mations to a single object or to multiple

objects simultaneously.

Clearing and redoing transformations

All transformations can be simultaneously cleared at any time.

To transform an object interactively

1Select an object by using the Pick tool.

The bounding box of the object appears. The bounding box includes eight selection

handles that you can use to size, stretch, and mirror the object. If you re-click the

86 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

object, new handles appear. You can use these handles to rotate and skew the

object.

Handle types: selection (1), rotation (2), and skew (3)

2Perform a task from the following table.

To clear all transformations applied to an object

1Select an object.

2Click Arrange ` Clear transformations.

Copying, duplicating, and deleting objects

CorelDRAW provides you with several ways to copy objects. When you no longer need

an object, you can delete it.

To Do the following

Size or scale an object Drag a corner selection handle.

Stretch an object Drag a middle selection handle.

Skew an object Click the object to display the skew handles,

and drag a skew handle.

Rotate an object Click the object to display the rotation

handles, and drag a rotation handle.

Mirror an object Hold down Ctrl, and drag a selection handle

to the opposite side of the object.

CorelDRAW: Working with objects 87

Cutting, copying, and pasting

You can cut or copy an object to place it on the Clipboard and paste it into a drawing

or another application. Cutting an object places it on the Clipboard and removes it from

the drawing. Copying an object places it on the Clipboard but keeps the original in the

drawing.

Duplicating

Duplicating an object places a copy directly in the drawing window and does not use

the Clipboard. Duplicating is faster than copying and pasting. Also, when duplicating

an object, you can specify the distance between the duplicate and the original object

along the x and y axes. This distance is known as the offset.

Copying objects at a specified position

You can create multiple copies of objects simultaneously, while specifying their position,

without using the Clipboard. For example, you can distribute object copies horizontally,

to the left or right of the original object; or you can distribute copies of objects vertically,

below or above the original object. You can specify the spacing between copies of

objects, or you can specify the offset at which copies of objects are created in relation to

each other.

To cut or copy an object

1Select an object.

2Click Edit , and click one of the following:

• Cut

• Copy

To paste an object into a drawing

•Click Edit ` Paste .

You can use this procedure to paste an object from another application.

To paste an object from an unsupported file format, or to specify options for

the pasted object, click Edit ` Paste special.

To duplicate an object

1Select an object.

88 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

2Click Edit ` Duplicate.

When you duplicate objects for the first time, the Duplicate offset dialog box

appears. To specify the distance between the duplicate and the original object along

the x and y axes, type values in the Horizontal offset and Vertical offset boxes.

• Offset values of 0 place the duplicate on top of the original.

• Positive offset values place the duplic ate up and to the right of the original.

• Negative offset values place the duplicate down and to the left of the original.

Duplicating an object is useful for creating cuttable drop shadows for devices

such as vinyl cutters and plotters.

You can change the offset at which duplicates are created. Click To o l s `

Options and in the Document list of categories, click General, and type

values in the Horizontal offset and Vertical offset boxes.

To create copies of an object at a specified position

1Select an object.

2Click Edit ` Step and Repeat.

3In the Step and repeat docker, type a value in the Number of copies box.

To Do the following

Distribute copies of objects horizontally In the Vertical settings area, choose No

offset from the Mode list box. In the

Horizontal offset area, choose Spacing

between objects from the Mode list box. To

specify the spacing between object copies,

type a value in the Distance box. To place

the object copies to the right or left of the

original, choose Right or Left from the

Direction list box.

CorelDRAW: Working with objects 89

Multiple copies of an object are offset by a specified distance.

To delete an object

1Select an object.

2Click Edit ` Delete.

To retrieve a deleted object, you must use the Undo command. For more

information, see "Undoing, redoing, and repeating actions" on page 44.

Distribute copies of objects vertically In the Horizontal settings area, choose No

offset from the Mode list box. In the

Vertica l off set area, choose Spacing

between objects from the Mode list box. To

specify the spacing between copies of objects,

type a value in the Distance box. To place

the copies above or below the original,

choose Up or Down from the Direction list

box.

Offset all copies of objects by a specified

distance

In the Horizontal offset and Vertical offset

areas, choose Offset from the Mode list box,

and type values in the Distance boxes.

To Do the following

90 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Creating objects from enclosed areas

You can create objects from areas enclosed by other objects. For example, if you draw a

freehand line that crosses over itself to create loops, you can create an object from the

loop shape. You can create an object in the shape of the area if the area is totally

enclosed, regardless of the number of surrounding shapes and lines.

For more information about creating objects from enclosed areas, see "Applying fills to

areas" on page 143.

The Smart fill tool is used to enclose the areas created by the two spiral objects

(left), so that new objects are created from the enclosed areas. In this example,

the original spiral objects are deleted (right), and the newly created objects

remain.

Creating a boundary around selected objects

You can automatically create a path around selected objects on a layer to create a

boundary. This boundary can be used for various purposes, such as to produce keylines

or cut lines.

You can create a boundary around selected objects (left). The boundary is

created as a new object (middle) that can be used as a cut line or keyline for a

finished logo (right).

CorelDRAW: Working with objects 91

The boundary is created by a closed path that follows the shape of the selected objects.

The default fill and outline properties apply to the object created by the boundary.

To create a boundary around selected objects

1Select the objects that you want to surround with a boundary.

2Click Effects ` Create boundary.

Copying object properties, transformations, and effects

CorelDRAW lets you copy attributes from one object to another. You can copy object

properties such as outline, fill, and text pr operties. You can copy object transformations

such as sizing, rotating, and positioning. You can also copy effects applied to an object.

To copy fill, outline, or text properties from one object to another

1In the toolbox, click the Eyedropper tool .

2On the property bar, choose Object attributes from the list box.

3Click the Properties flyout on the property bar, and enable any of the following

check boxes:

• Outline

• Fill

• Text

4Click the edge of the object whose properties you want to copy.

5In the toolbox, click the Paintbucket tool .

6Click the edge of the object to which you want to apply the copied properties.

Options that are enabled in the Tr a ns f o r m a t i o n s and Effects flyouts on the

property bar are also applied when you copy properties.

To copy size, position, or rotation from one object to another

1In the toolbox, click the Eyedropper tool .

2On the property bar, choose Object attributes from the list box.

3Click the Tr a n s f o r m a t i o n s flyout on the property bar, and enable any of the

following check boxes:

92 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

• Size

• Rotation

• Position

4Click the edge of the object whose transformations you want to copy.

5In the toolbox, click the Paintbucket tool .

6Click the edge of the object to which you want to apply the copied transformations.

To copy effects from one object to another

1In the toolbox, click the Eyedropper tool .

2Choose Object attributes from the list box on the property bar.

3Click the Effects flyout on the property bar, and enable any of the following check

boxes:

• Perspective

• Envelope

• Blend

• Extrude

• Contour

• Lens

• PowerClip

• Drop shadow

• Distortion

4Click the edge of the object whose effects you want to copy.

5In the toolbox, click the Paintbucket tool .

6Click the edge of the object to which you want to apply the copied effects.

Positioning objects

You can position objects by dragging them to a new location, by nudging, or by

specifying their horizontal and vertical coordinates.

Nudging lets you move an object in increments by pressing the Arrow keys. The

increment value is known as nudge distance. Micro-nudging lets you move an object by

a fraction of the nudge distance. Super-nudging lets you move an object by a multiple

of the nudge distance. By default, you can nudge objects in 0.1-inch increments, but

you can change this increment value to suit your needs. You can also change micro-

nudge and super-nudge values.

CorelDRAW: Working with objects 93

To position an object, you can set horizontal and vertical coordinates that are relative to

the center anchor point, or othe r anchor point, of the object.

You can also move an object to another page. For more information, see "To move an

object to another page" on page 165.

To move an object

1Select an object.

2Point to the center of the bounding box.

3When the position cursor appears, drag the object to a new position in the

drawing.

You can move an object to another page by dragging the object over a page

number tab at the bottom of the docu ment window and then dragging the

object into the document window.

To move an object while drawing

1Start drawing a shape such as a rectangle, ellipse, or polygon.

2Hold down the right mouse button without releasing the left mouse button, and

drag the unfinished object to its new position.

3Release the right mouse button, and continue drawing.

Moving an object while drawing

94 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To nudge an object

To set nudge distances

1Click To o l s ` Options.

2In the Document list of categories, click Rulers.

3Type a value in the Nudge box.

4Type a value in one of the following boxes:

• Super nudge

• Micro nudge

You can also set the nudge distance by deselecting all objects and typing a

value in the Nudge offset box on the property bar.

To save the new nudge distances to use in new drawings, click To o l s ` Save

settings as default.

To position an object by x and y coordinates

1Select an object.

2On the property bar, type values in the following boxes:

x — lets you position the object on the x-axis

y — lets you position the object on the y-axis

3Press Enter .

To Do the following

Nudge a selected object by the nudge

distance

Press an Arrow key.

Nudge a selected object by a fraction of the

nudge distance (micro-nudge)

Hold down Ctrl , and press an Arrow key.

Nudge a selected object by a multiple of the

nudge distance (super-nudge)

Hold down Shift , and press an Arrow key.

CorelDRAW: Working with objects 95

Aligning and distributing objects

CorelDRAW lets you precisely align and distribute objects in a drawing. You can align

objects with each other and with parts of the drawing page, such as the center, edges,

and grid. When you align objects with objects, you can line them up by their centers or

by their edges.

You can align multiple objects horizontally or vertically with the center of the drawing

page. Single or multiple objects can also be arranged along the edge of the page and to

the nearest point on a grid.

Distributing objects automatically adds spacing between them based on their width,

height, and center points. You can distribute objects so that their center points or

selected edges (for example, top or right) appear at equal intervals. You can also

distribute objects so that there is equal space between them. You can distribute objects

over the extent of the bounding box surrounding them or over the entire drawing page.

Scattered objects (left) are vertically aligned and equally distributed (right).

To align an object with another object

1Select the objects.

The object used as a reference for aligning the left, right, top, or bottom edge is

determined by either the order of creation or order of selection. If you marquee

select the objects before you align them, the last object created is used. If you select

the objects one at a time, the last object selected is the reference point for aligning

the other objects.

2Click Arrange ` Align and distribute ` Align and distribute.

3Click the Align tab.

96 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

4Specify vertical alignment, horizontal alignment, or both:

• To align objects along the vertical axis, enable the Left , Center , or Right check

box.

• To align objects along the horizontal axis, enable the To p , Center , or Bottom

check box.

5From the Align objects to list box, choose Active objects.

If you are aligning text objects, choose one of the following from the For text

source objects use list box:

First line baseline uses the baseline of the first line of text as a reference

point

Last line baseline — uses the baseline of the last line of text as a reference point

Bounding box — uses the bounding box of a text object as a reference point

You can also align objects with another object quickly, without using the Align

and distribute dialog box, by clicking Arrange ` Align and distribute and

clicking any of the first six alignment commands. The letter next to a

command name indicates the keyboard shortcut that you can use to align

objects. For example, the letter L next to the Align left command shows that

you can press L to align objects with the leftmost point of the object that is used

as a reference point.

To align an object with the page center

1Select an object.

If you want to align multiple objects, marquee select the objects.

2Click Arrange ` Align and distribute , and then click one of the following:

Center to page — aligns all objects with the page center, both vertically and

horizontally

Center to page vertically aligns objects with the page center along a vertical

axis

Center to page horizontally — aligns objects with the page center along a

horizontal axis

You can also align all objects with the page center, vertically and horizontally,

by pressing P .

CorelDRAW: Working with objects 97

To distribute objects

1Select the objects.

2Click Arrange ` Align and distribute ` Align and distribute.

3Click the Distribute tab.

4To distribute the objects horizontally, enab le one of the following options from the

top-right row:

Left — evenly spaces the left edges of the objects

Center — evenly spaces the center points of the objects

Spacing — places equal intervals between the selected objects

Right — evenly spaces the right edges of the objects

5To distribute the objects vertically, enable one of the following options from the

column on the left:

To p — evenly spaces the top edges of the objects

Center — evenly spaces the center points of the objects

Spacing — places equal intervals between the selected objects

Bottom — evenly spaces the bottom edges of the objects

6To indicate the area over which the objects are distributed, enable one of the

following options:

Extent of selection — distributes the objects over the area of the bounding box

surrounding them

Extent of page — distributes the objects over the drawing page

98 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Top row: Options for distributing objects horizontally. 1) The Left option

evenly spaces the left edges. 2) The Center option evenly spaces the center points.

Bottom row: Options for distributing objects vertically. 3) The Top option

evenly spaces the top edges. 4) The Center option evenly spaces the center points.

Snapping objects

When you move or draw an object, you can snap it to another object in a drawing. You

can snap an object to various snap points on the target object. When you move the

pointer close to a snap point, the snap point becomes highlighted, which identifies it as

the pointer's snapping target.

To snap an object to another object with grea ter precision, you first snap the pointer to

a snap point in the object, and then snap the object to a snap point in the target object.

For example, you can snap the pointer to the center of a rectangle, drag the rectangle

by the center, and then snap the rectangle to the center of another rectangle.

CorelDRAW: Working with objects 99

The pointer was snapped to an end node of the screw (left), and then the screw

was dragged to snap to the center of an ellipse (right).

Snapping modes determine which snap points you can use in an object. The table below

includes descriptions of all available snapping modes.

Snapping mode Description

Snapping

mode

indicator

Node Lets you snap to a node on an object

Intersection Lets you snap to a geometric intersection of objects

Midpoint Lets you snap to a line segment midpoint

Quadrant Lets you snap to points that are at 0°, 90°, 180°, and

270° on a circle, ellipse, or arc

Tangent Lets you snap to a point on the outside edge of an arc,

circle, or ellipse where a line touches, but does not

intersect, the object

Perpendicular Lets you snap to a point on the outside edge of a

segment where a line is perpendicular to the object

Edge Lets you snap to a point that touches the edge of an

object

Center Lets you snap to the center of the closest object (arc,

regular polygon, or curve centroid)

100 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

You can choose a number of snapping options. For example, you can disable some or

all snapping modes to make the application run faster. You can also set a snapping

threshold, which specifies the distance from the pointer at which a snap point becomes

active. You can also turn snapping on and off.

To turn snapping on or off

•Click View ` Snap to objects.

A check mark next to the Snap to objects command indicates that snapping is

turned on.

You can also press Alt + Z to toggle snapping on and off.

To snap objects

1Select the object that you want to snap to the target object.

2Move the pointer over the object until the snap point becomes highlighted.

3Drag the object close to the target object until the snap point on the target object

becomes highlighted.

To snap an object as you draw it, drag in the drawing window until the snap

point in the target object becomes highlighted.

Using dynamic guides

You can display dynamic guides to help you precisely move, align, and draw objects in

relation to other objects. Dynamic guides are temporary guidelines that you can pull

from the following snap points in objects — center, node, quadrant, and text baseline.

For more information about snap points and snapping modes, see "Snapping objects"

on page 98.

Text baseline Lets you snap to a point on the baseline of artistic or

paragraph text

Snapping mode Description

Snapping

mode

indicator

CorelDRAW: Working with objects 101

As you drag an object along a dynamic guide, you can view the distance of the object

from the snap point that was used to create the dynamic guide, which helps you position

the object precisely. You can use dynamic guides to place objects in relation to other

objects as you draw them. You can also display intersecting dynamic guides and then

place an object at the intersection.

You can turn off dynamic guides at any time.

To enable or disable dynamic guides

•Click View ` Dynamic guides.

A check mark beside the Dynamic guides command indicates that dynamic

guides are enabled.

To display dynamic guides

1With dynamic guides enabled, click a drawing tool.

2Move the pointer over, and then off, an eligible snap point of an object.

3Repeat step 2 with other objects to display other dynamic guides.

The snap points you point to are registered in a queue and are used to create

dynamic guides.

The eligible snap points — the node, center, quadrant, and text baseline snap

points — appear only when the corresponding snapping modes are activated.

For more information about snap points and snapping modes, see "Snapping

objects" on page 98.

To avoid displaying too many dynamic guides, you can clear the queue of

points at any time by clicking in the drawing window or pressing Esc .

Changing the order of objects

You can change the stacking order of objects on a layer or a page by sending objects to

the front or back, or behind or in front, of other objects. You can also position objects

precisely in the stacking order, as well as reverse the stacking order of multiple objects.

102 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To change the order of an object

1Select an object.

2Click Arrange ` Order , and then click one of the following:

To f r o n t of page — moves the selected object in front of all other objects on the

page

To back of page — moves the selected object behind all other objects on the

page

To front of layer — moves the selected object in front of all other objects on the

active layer

To back of layer — moves the selected object behind all other objects on the

active layer

Forward one — moves the selected object forward one position. If the selected

object is in front of all other objects on the active layer, it is moved to the layer

above.

Back one — moves the selected object behind one position. If the selected object

is behind all other objects on the selected layer, it is moved to the layer below.

In front of — moves the selected object in front of the object that you click in

the drawing window

Behind — moves the selected object behind the object that you click in the

drawing window

An object cannot be moved to a locked (non-editable) layer; instead, it is

moved to the closest normal or editable layer. For example, when you apply the

To front of page command, and the topmost layer is locked, the object is

moved to the topmost editable layer. Any objects on the locked layer remain

in front of the object.

By default, all objects on the master page appear on top of the objects on other

pages. For information about reordering content on master page layers, see "To

move a layer" on page 192.

An Order command is unavailable if the selected object is already positioned

in the specified stacking order. For example, the To front of page command

is unavailable if the object is already in front of all the other objects on the page.

To reverse the order of multiple objects

1Select the objects.

2Click Arrange ` Order ` Reverse order .

CorelDRAW: Working with objects 103

Grouping objects

When you group two or more objects, they are treated as a single unit but retain their

individual attributes. Groupi ng lets you apply the same formatting, properties, and

other changes to all the objects within the group at the same time. In addition,

grouping helps prevent accidental changes to the position of an object in relation to

other objects. You can also create nested groups by grouping together existing groups.

Single objects retain their attributes when they are grouped.

You can add objects to or remove objects from a group, and you can delete objects that

are members of a group. You can also edit a single object in a group without ungrouping

the objects. If you want to edit multiple objects in a group at the same time, you must

first ungroup the objects. If a group contains nested groups, you can ungroup all objects

in the nested groups simultaneously.

To group objects

1Select the objects.

2Click Arrange ` Group.

The status bar indicates that a group of objects is selected.

You can select objects from different layers and group them; however, after

objects are grouped, they reside on the same layer and are stacked on top of one

another.

104 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

You can create a nested group by selecting two or more groups of objects and

clicking Arrange ` Group.

You can also group objects by clicking Window ` Dockers ` Object

manager and dragging the name of an object in the Object manager docker

over the name of another object.

To add an object to a group

1Click Window ` Dockers ` Object manager .

2In the Object manager docker, drag the name of the object to the name of the

group.

To ungroup objects

1Select one or more groups.

2Click Arrange, and click one of the following commands:

Ungroup — breaks a group into individual objects, or a nested group into

multiple groups

Ungroup all — breaks one or more groups into individual objects, including

objects within nested groups

Combining objects

Combining two or more objects creates a single object with common fill and outline

attributes. You can combine rectangles, ellipses, polygons, stars, spirals, graphs, or text

so that they are converted to a single curve object. If you need to modify the attributes

of an object that has been combined from separate objects, you can break apart the

combined object. You can extract a subpath from a combined object to create two

separate objects. You can also weld two or more objects to create a single object. For

information about welding objects, see "Weldi ng and intersecting objects" on page 126.

CorelDRAW: Working with objects 105

The two objects (left) are combined to create a single object (right). The new

object has the properties of the last object selected.

To combine objects

1Select the objects to be combined.

2Click Arrange ` Combine.

Combined text objects become larger blocks of text.

To break apart a combined object

1Select a combined object.

2Click Arrange ` Break curve apart.

If you break apart a combined object that contains artistic text, the text breaks

apart into lines first, and then into word s. Paragraph text breaks into separate

paragraphs.

To extract a subpath from a combined object

1Click the Shape tool , and select a segment, node, or group of nodes on a

combined object.

2Click the Extract subpath button on the property bar.

106 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

After you extract the subpath, the fill and outline properties of the path are

removed from the combined object.

Inserting bar codes

The Barcode wizard in CorelDRAW lets you add bar codes to drawings. A bar code is a

group of bars, spaces, and sometimes numbers that is designed to be scanned and read

into computer memory. Bar codes are most commonly used to identify merchandise,

inventory, and documents.

To insert a bar code

1Click Edit ` Insert Barcode.

2Follow the instructions in the Barcode wizard.

If you need help with choosing options, click the Help button in the Barcode

wizard.

A bar code is inserted into a drawing as an object.

Need more information?

For more information about working with objects, see "Working with objects" in

the "Objects, symbols, and layers" section of the Help.

CorelDRAW: Shaping objects 107

Shaping objects

CorelDRAW lets you shape objects in various ways.

In this section, you'll learn about

using curve objects

selecting and moving nodes

manipulating segments

adding and removing nodes

using node types

breaking the path of curve objects

•applying distortion effects

shaping objects by using envelopes

cropping, splitting, and erasing objects

filleting, scalloping, and chamfering corners

welding and intersecting objects

creating PowerClip™ objects

Using curve objects

A curve object has nodes and control handles, which you can use to change the object's

shape. A curve object can be any shape, including a straight or curved line. An object's

nodes are the small squares that appear along the object's outline. The line between two

nodes is called a segment. Segments can be curved or straight. Each node has a control

handle for each curved segment connected to it. Control handles help you adjust the

curve of a segment.

108 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

The components of a curve: control handles, segments, and nodes

Curve objects created in CorelDRAW follow a path that gives them their defining

shape. A path can be open (for example, a line) or closed (for example, an ellipse) and

can sometimes include subpaths. For more information about paths and subpaths, see

"Breaking the path of curve objects" on page 113.

Most objects that are added to a drawing are not curve objects, with the exception of

spirals, freehand lines, and Bézier lines. Therefore, if you want to customize the shape

of an object or text object, it is recommended that you convert it to a curve object.

To convert objects to curve objects

1 Select the object.

2Click Arrange ` Convert to curves.

You can convert artistic text to curves so that you can shape individual

characters.

Bitmaps cannot be converted to curve objects.

Selecting and moving nodes

You can select individual, multiple, or all of the object's nodes. Selecting multiple nodes

lets you shape different parts of an object simultaneously. You can marquee select nodes

by enclosing them with a rectangular marquee box, or by enclosing them with an

Control handles

Segment

Nodes

CorelDRAW: Shaping objects 109

irregularly shaped marquee box. Freehand marquee selection is useful when you want

to select specific nodes in complex curves.

When a node is selected on curved segmen ts, control handles are displayed. You can

adjust the shape of the curved segments by moving the nodes and control handles.

Usually, a control handle is displayed as a solid blue arrowhead (left). When

a control handle overlaps with a node, it is displayed as an unfilled blue

arrowhead beside the node (right).

The Shape tool is the standard tool for moving nodes. You can also set an option to use

the Pick and Bézier tools for selecting and moving nodes.

To select a node

1In the toolbox, click the Shape tool.

2Select a curve object.

3Click a node.

You can also

Marquee select multiple nodes On the property bar, choose Rectangular

from the Shape tool selection mode list

box, and drag around the nodes that you

want to select.

Freehand marquee select multiple nodes On the property bar, choose Freehand from

the Selection mode list box, and drag

around the nodes you want to select.

Select multiple nodes Hold down Shift , and click each node.

Select all nodes on a selected curved object Click Edit ` Select all ` Nodes.

110 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To move a node or control handle

1Select an object by using the Shape tool .

2Click a node.

3Drag the node or any of the control handles to shape the segments on both sides.

To shape a segment, you can change the angle of a control handle and its distance

from the node.

Manipulating segments

You can move curved segments to change an object's shape. You can also control the

smoothness of curved segments.

You can change the direction of a curve object by reversing the position of its start and

end nodes. The effect is apparent only when the ends of a curve object are different. For

example, when an arrowhead is applied to the end node of a curve object, changing the

direction results in moving the arrowhead to the start node.

To manipulate the segments of a curve object

1In the toolbox, click the Shape tool .

2Click a curve object.

3Drag a segment until it's the shape you want.

Select the first or last node of a curve object Press Home or End .

Select the node that follows or precedes a

selected node

Press Ta b or Shift + Ta b .

Deselect a node Hold down Shift , and click a selected node.

Deselect multiple nodes Hold down Shift , and click each selected

node.

Deselect all nodes Click an unused space in the drawing

window.

You can also

CorelDRAW: Shaping objects 111

Adding and removing nodes

When you add nodes, you increase the number of segments and, therefore, the amount

of control you have over the shape of the object. You can delete selected nodes to

simplify an object's shape.

When curve objects contain many nodes, it is difficult to edit and output them to

devices such as vinyl cutters, plotters, and rotary engravers. You can have the number

of nodes in a curve object reduced automatically. Reducing the number of nodes

removes overlapping nodes and can smooth a curve object. This feature is especially

useful for reducing the number of nodes in objects imported from other applications.

To add or delete a node

You can also

Straighten a curve segment Click a curve segment, and click the

Convert curve to line button on the

property bar.

Curve a straight segment Click a straight segment, and click the

Convert line to curve button on the

property bar.

Smooth a segment Click a node, and move the Curve

smoothness slider on the property bar. To

smooth all segments in a curve object, select

all of the object's nodes before moving the

Curve smoothness slider.

Change the direction of a curve object Click a segment, and click the Reverse

curve direction button on the property

bar.

To Do the following

Add a node In the toolbox, click the Shape tool ,

select a curve object, and double-click where

you want to add a node.

112 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To reduce the number of nodes in a curve object

1In the toolbox, click the Shape tool .

2Click a curve object, and do one of the following:

• To reduce the number of nodes in the entire object, click the Select all nodes

button on the property bar.

To reduce the number of nodes in a part of a curve object, marquee select the part

you want to change.

3Do one of the following:

• Click Reduce nodes on the property bar to ha ve overlapping and redundant

nodes automatically removed.

• Move the Curve smoothness slider to control the number of nodes that are

removed. Removing many nodes can reshape the curve object.

Using node types

You can change the nodes on a curve object to one of four types: cusp, smooth,

symmetrical, or line. The control handles of each node type behave differently.

Cusp nodes let you create sharp transitions, such as corners or sharp angles, in a curve

object. You can move the control handles in a cusp node independently of one another,

changing only the line on one side of the node.

With smooth nodes, the lines passing through the node take on the shape of a curve,

producing smooth transitions between line segments. The control handles of a smooth

node are always directly opposite one another, but they may be at different distances

from the node.

Symmetrical nodes are similar to smooth nodes. They create a smooth transition

between line segments, but they also let you give lines on both sides of a node the same

curve appearance. The control handles of symmetrical nodes are directly opposite each

other and at an equal distance from the node.

Line nodes let you shape curve objects by changing the shape of their segments. You can

make a curved segment straight or a straight segment curved. Making a straight

Delete a node In the toolbox, click the Shape tool, select a

curve object, and double-click a node.

To Do the following

CorelDRAW: Shaping objects 113

segment curved does not noticeably change the segment's appearance, but it displays

control handles that you can move to change the segment's shape.

Left to right: Cusp, smooth, symmetrical, and line nodes

To shape a curve object by using cusp, smooth, or symmetrical nodes

1In the toolbox, click the Shape tool .

2Click a node.

3On the property bar, click one of the following buttons:

Make node a cusp

Make node smooth

Make node symmetrical

4Drag the node's control handles.

You can also change an existing node from one type to another by using

shortcut keys. To change a smooth node to a cusp node or a cusp node to a

smooth node, click the node using the Shape tool, and press C . To change a

symmetrical node to a smooth node or a smooth node to a symmetrical node,

click the node with the Shape tool, and press S.

Breaking the path of curve objects

Paths

Paths outline an object's shape and are often visible as one or more line or curve

segments. You can disconnect line segments from one another to create subpaths. Even

though they are not connected, subpaths are still part of the defining path of the

114 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

original object; however, you can extract a subpath to create two separate objects: the

extracted subpath and the object it was extracted from.

Subpaths

Subpaths are the basic curves and shapes from which a single curve object is

constructed. For example, a single curve object with subpaths is often created when text

is converted to curves. The letter "O," for instance, is composed of two ellipses: the

outside ellipse that defines the letter's shape and the inside ellipse that defines the

"hole." The ellipses are subpat hs that compose the single curve object, "O." One of the

basic reasons for creating an object with su bpaths is that you can produce objects with

holes in them. In the following example, you can see objects underneath the center of

the letter "O."

1) The letter "O" is converted to curves. 2) The resulting subpaths are the

outside ellipse that defines the shape of the letter and the inside ellipse (tinted

gray) that defines the hole. 3) In comparison, the black ellipse consists of a

single path and cannot contain a "hole."

To break a path

To Do the following

Break a path In the toolbox, click the Shape tool .

Select a node on the path, and click the

Break curve button on the property bar.

CorelDRAW: Shaping objects 115

When you break a path in a curve object, the resulting subpaths remain part

of the same object. When you extract a path from an object, you create two

separate objects.

Applying distortion effects

You can apply three types of distortion effects to shape objects.

After you distort an object, you can change the effect by altering the center of

distortion. This point is identified by a diamond-shaped handle, around which a

distortion appears. It is similar to a mathematical compass, where the pencil moves

around a stationary point. You can place the center of distortion anywhere in the

drawing window, or choose to center it in the middle of an object so that the distortion

is distributed evenly and the shape of the object changes in relation to its center.

You can create an even more dramatic effect by applying a new distortion to an already

distorted object. You don't lose the effect of the original distortion if, for example, you

Extract a broken path from an object In the toolbox, click the Shape tool. Right-

click a path, and click Break apart . Select a

segment, node, or group of nodes that

represents the portion of the path you want

to extract, and click the Extract subpath

button on the property bar.

Distortion effect Description

Push and pull Lets you push the edges of an object in or

pull the edges of an object out

Zipper Lets you apply a saw tooth effect to the

edges of the object. You can adjust the

amplitude and frequency of the effect.

Twister Lets you rotate an object to create a swirl

effect. You can choose the direction of the

swirl, as well as the origin, degree, and

amount of rotation.

To Do the following

116 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

apply a zipper distortion on top of a twister distortion. The CorelDRAW application

also lets you remove and copy distortion effects.

To distort an object

1In the toolbox, click the Distort tool .

2On the property bar, click one of the following buttons, and specify the settings

you want:

• Push and pull distortion

• Zipper distortion

• Twister distortion

3Point to where you want to place the center of distortion, and drag until the object

is the shape you want.

You can reapply the effects to distorted objects.

You can center a distortion by clicking the Center distortion button on the

property bar.

You can use the interactive vector controls to edit a distortion effect. Upper left:

Zipper effect applied to circle. Upper right: Zipper effects with higher frequency

(more spikes) applied. Bottom: Results of applying zipper effects.

To remove a distortion

1Select a distorted object.

2Click Effects ` Clear distortion.

CorelDRAW: Shaping objects 117

Removing a distortion this way clears the most recent distortion you've

applied.

You can also remove a distortion from a selected object by clicking the Clear

distortion button on the property bar.

Shaping objects by using envelopes

CorelDRAW lets you shape objects, including lines, artistic text, and paragraph text

frames by applying envelopes to them. Envelopes are made of multiple nodes that you

can move to shape the envelope and, as a result, change the shape of the object. You can

apply a basic envelope that conforms to the shape of an object, or you can also apply a

preset envelope. After you apply an envelope, you can edit it or add a new envelope to

continue changing the object's shape. CorelDRAW also lets you remove envelopes.

You can edit an envelope by adding and positioning its nodes. Adding nodes gives you

more control over the shape of the object contained in the envelope. CorelDRAW also

lets you delete nodes, move multiple nodes simultaneously, change nodes from one type

to another, and change a segment of an envelope to a line or curve. For more

information about the different types of nodes, see "Using curve objects" on page 107.

You can also change the mapping mode of an envelope to specify how the object fits to

the envelope. For example, you can stretch an object to fit the basic dimensions of the

envelope, and then apply the horizontal mapping mode to compress it horizontally so

that it fits the shape of the envelope.

To apply an envelope

1Select an object.

2In the toolbox, click the Envelope tool .

3On the property bar, click one of the following buttons:

Envelope straight line mode — creates envelopes based on straight lines,

adding perspective to objects

Envelope single arc mode — creates envelopes with an arc shape on one

side, giving objects a concave or convex appearance

Envelope double arc mode creates envelopes with an S shape on one or

more sides

118 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Envelope unconstrained mode — creates freeform envelopes that let you

change the properties of the nodes, and add and delete the nodes

4Click the object.

5Drag the nodes to shape the envelope.

If you want to reset the envelope, press Esc before releasing the mouse.

You can prevent the object's straight lines from being converted to curves by

enabling the Keep lines button on the property bar.

To edit the nodes and segments of an envelope

1In the toolbox, click the Envelope tool .

2Select an object with an envelope.

3Double-click the envelope to add a node or double-click a node to delete it.

You can also

Apply a preset envelope Click the Add preset button on the

property bar, and click an envelope shape.

Apply an envelope to an object with an

envelope

Click the Add new envelope button on

the property bar, and drag the nodes to

change the shape of the envelope.

Remove an envelope Click Effects ` Clear envelope .

You can also

Move several envelope nodes at once Click the Envelope unconstrained mode

button on the property bar, marquee

select the nodes you want to move, and drag

any node to a new position.

Marquee select multiple nodes On the property bar, choose Rectangular

from the Selection mode list box, and drag

around the nodes that you want to select.

Freehand marquee select multiple nodes On the property bar, choose Freehand from

the Selection mode list box, and drag

around the nodes you want to select.

CorelDRAW: Shaping objects 119

Cropping, splitting, and erasing objects

You can crop, split, and erase portions of objects.

Cropping objects

Cropping lets you quickly remove unwanted areas in objects and imported graphics,

eliminating the need to ungroup objects, break linked groups apart, or convert objects

to curves. You can crop vector objects and bitmaps.

Move opposing nodes an equal distance in

the same direction

Press Ctrl, select two opposing nodes, and

drag them to a new position.

Move opposing nodes an equal distance in

the opposite direction

Click the Envelope single arc mode or

Envelope double arc mode button on

the property bar so that it appears raised,

press Shift , and drag one of the nodes to a

new position.

Change an envelope node type Click the Envelope unconstrained mode

button on the property bar so that it appears

pressed, and click either the Make node a

cusp , the Make node smooth , or the

Make node symmetrical button.

Change an envelope segment to a straight

line or curve

Click the Envelope unconstrained mode

button on the property bar so that it appears

pressed, click a line segment, and click the

Convert curve to line button or the

Convert line to curve button.

You can also

120 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Cropping objects

When cropping objects, you define a rectangular area (cropping area) that you want to

keep. Object portions outside the cropping area are removed. You can specify the exact

position and size of the cropping area, and you can rotate and resize it. You can also

remove the cropping area.

You can crop only selected objects without affecting other objects in a drawing, or you

can crop all objects on the drawing page. In either case, the affected text and shape

objects are automatically converted to curves.

Splitting objects

You can split a bitmap or vector object in two and reshape it by redrawing its path. You

can split a closed object along a straight or jagged line. CorelDRAW lets you choose

between splitting an object into two objects, or leaving it as one object composed of two

or more subpaths. You can specify whether you want to close paths automatically or

keep them open.

The Knife tool creates two separate objects by cutting the ellipse in half (left).

The two objects are separated and used to form the top of the screw (right).

CorelDRAW: Shaping objects 121

Erasing portions of objects

CorelDRAW lets you erase unwanted portions of bitmaps and vector objects. Erasing

automatically closes any affected paths and converts the object to curves. If you erase

connecting lines, CorelDRAW creates subpaths rather than individual objects.

You can also delete virtual line segments, wh ich are portions of objects that are between

intersections. For example, you can delete a loop in a line that crosses over itself, or loops

in line segments in which two or more objects overlap.

To crop objects

1Select the objects that you want to crop.

If no objects on the drawing page are selected, all objects will be cropped.

2In the toolbox, click the Crop tool .

3Drag to define a cropping area.

4Double-click inside the cropping area.

Objects on locked, hidden, Grid, or Guides layers cannot be cropped. Also, you

cannot crop OLE and Internet objects, rollovers, or the content of PowerClip

objects.

During cropping, affected linked groups, such as contours, blends, and

extrusions, are automatically broken apart.

You can move, rotate, and size the cropping area interactively as you would any

object. To move the cropping area, drag it to a new position. To size the

cropping area, drag any of its handles . To rotate the cropping area, click

inside, and drag a rotation handle .

You can also

Specify the exact position of the cropping

area

Type values in the Position boxes on the

property bar, and press Enter .

Specify the exact size of the cropping area Type values in the Size boxes on the property

bar, and press Enter .

Rotate the cropping area Type values in the Angle of rotation box.

Remove the cropping area Click the Clear crop marquee button.

122 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

You can remove the cropping area by pressing Esc .

To split an object

1In the toolbox, click the Knife tool .

2Position the Knife tool over the object's outline where you want to start cutting.

The Knife tool snaps upright when positioned properly.

3Click the outline to start cutting.

4Position the Knife tool over the object's outline where you want to stop cutting,

and click again.

By default, objects are split into two objects and paths are automatically closed.

When you use the Knife tool on a selected object, the object becomes a curve

object.

You can also

Split an object along a freehand line Point to where you want to start the cut, and

drag to where you want it to end.

Split an object along a Bézier line Hold down Shift , click where you want to

start cutting an object, drag the control

handle to where you want to position the

next node, and click. Continue clicking to

add more straight segments to the line. If

you want to add a curved segment, point to

where you want to place the node and drag

to shape the curve. If you want to constrain

the line by 15-degree increments, hold down

Shift + Ctrl.

Split an object into two subpaths Click the Leave as one object button on

the property bar.

Split an object while keeping only one of its

parts

Click the object's outline where you want to

start the cut, and point to where you want

the cut to end. Press Ta b once or twice until

only the part of the object that you want to

keep is selected, and then click.

CorelDRAW: Shaping objects 123

To erase portions of an object

1Select an object.

2In the toolbox, click the Eraser tool .

3Drag over the object.

When you erase portions of objects, any affected paths are automatically

closed.

You can erase straight lines by clicking where you want to start erasing, and

then clicking where you want to finish erasing. Press Ctrl if you want to

constrain the line's angle.

You can also erase an area of a selected object by double-clicking the area with

the Eraser tool.

To delete a virtual line segment

1In the toolbox, click the Virtual segment delete tool .

2Move the pointer to the line segment you want to delete.

The Virtual segment delete tool snaps upright when positioned properly.

3Click the line segment.

If you want to delete multiple line segments at one time, click the pointer to drag a

marquee around all line segments you want to delete.

The Virtual segment delete tool does not work on linked groups such as drop

shadows, text, or images.

You can also

Change the size of the eraser nib Type a value in the Eraser thickness box on

the property bar, and press Enter .

Change the shape of the eraser nib Click the Circle/square button on the

property bar.

Maintain all the nodes of the area being

erased

Disable the Auto-reduce on erase button

on the property bar.

124 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Deleting virtual line segments

Filleting, scalloping, and chamfering corners

You can shape an object by filleting, scalloping, or chamfering corners. Filleting

produces a rounded corner, scalloping rounds and inverts the corner to create a notch,

and chamfering bevels a corner so that it appears flat.

From left to right, you can see standard corners with no changes, filleted

corners, scalloped corners, and chamfered corners.

You can fillet, scallop, or chamfer the corners of any curve object, whether it originates

from a shape, lines, text, or a bitmap. If yo u select a shape that has not been converted

to curves, a dialog box appears and gives you the option of converting the shape

automatically. Text objects must be converted to curves manually by using the Convert

to curves command. Changes apply to all corners unless you select individual nodes.

You cannot fillet, scallop, or chamfer a smooth or symmetrical curve; the corner must

be created by two straight or curved segments that intersect at an angle of less than 180

degrees.

CorelDRAW: Shaping objects 125

To round object corners by filleting

1 Using the Pick tool , select the object.

2Click Window ` Dockers ` Fillet/Scallop/Chamfer .

3In the Fillet/Scallop/Chamfer docker, choose Fillet from the Operation list box.

4Type a value in the Radius box.

The radius is used to create a circular arc, with the center equidistant from either

side of a corner. Higher values produce more rounded corners.

5Click Apply .

The Apply button is disabled if no valid objects or nodes are selected.

To select individual nodes, use the Shape tool .

You can also round all the corners of a selected rectangle or square by clicking

the Shape tool and dragging a corner node toward the center of the object.

The shape is not converted to curves if you use this method.

To scallop object corners

1Using the Pick tool , select the object.

2Click Window ` Dockers ` Fillet/Scallop/Chamfer .

3In the Fillet/Scallop/Chamfer docker, choose Scallop from the Operation list

box.

4Type a value in the Radius box.

The radius value is measured from the original corner point to create a scalloping

arc.

5Click Apply .

126 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To bevel object corners by chamfering

1Using the Pick tool , select the object.

2Click Window ` Dockers ` Fillet/Scallop/Chamfer .

3In the Fillet/Scallop/Chamfer docker, choose Chamfer from the Operation list

box.

4Type a value in the Distance box to set where the chamfer will begin in relation to

the original corner.

5Click Apply .

Welding and intersecting objects

You can create irregular shapes by welding and intersecting objects. You can weld or

intersect almost any object, including clones, objects on different layers, and single

objects with intersecting lines. However, you cannot weld or intersect paragraph text,

dimension lines, or masters of clones.

You can weld objects to create one object with a single outline. The new object uses the

welded objects' perimeter as its outline and adopts the fill and outline properties of the

target object. All intersecting lines disappear.

You can weld objects regardless of whether they overlap each other. If you weld objects

that do not overlap, they form a weld group that acts as a single object. In both cases,

the welded object takes on the fill and outline attributes of the target object.

You can weld single objects with intersecting lines so that the object breaks into several

subpaths, but its appearance remains the same.

CorelDRAW: Shaping objects 127

Welding the leaves to the apple creates a single object outline.

Intersecting creates an object from the area where two or more objects overlap. The

shape of this new object can be simple or complex, depending on the shapes you

intersect. The new object's fill and outline attributes depend on the object you define as

the target object.

To weld objects

1Select the source object or objects.

2Hold down Shift, and click the target object.

3Click Arrange ` Shaping ` We l d .

You can also weld objects by marquee-selecting the source and target objects

and clicking the Wel d button on the property bar.

To intersect objects

1Select the source object.

2Hold down Shift, and select the target object.

3Click Arrange ` Shaping ` Intersect.

You can also intersect objects by selecting the source and target objects and

clicking the Intersect button on the property bar.

128 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To intersect multiple objects

1Marquee select the source object or objects.

2Hold down Shift, and click each target object.

3Click Arrange ` Shaping ` Intersect.

You can also intersect objects by marquee-selecting the source and target

objects and clicking the Intersect button on the property bar.

Creating PowerClip objects

CorelDRAW lets you place vector objects and bitmaps, such as photos, inside other

objects, or containers. A container can be any object, for example artistic text or a

rectangle. When you place an object into a container that is larger than the container,

the object, called the content, is cropped to fit the form of the container. This creates a

PowerClip object.

Objects before becoming a PowerClip object: artistic text and a bitmap

You can create more complex PowerClip objects by placing one PowerClip object inside

another PowerClip object to produce a nested PowerClip object.

CorelDRAW: Shaping objects 129

In the PowerClip object, the artistic text is the container, and the bitmap forms

the contents. The bitmap is shaped to the letters of the artistic text.

After you create a PowerClip object you can modify the content and the container.

CorelDRAW also lets you extract the content from a PowerClip object, so that you can

delete the content or modify it without affecting the container.

To create a PowerClip object

1Select an object.

2Click Effects ` PowerClip ` Place inside container .

3Click the object you want to use as the container.

If you want to create a nested PowerClip object, hold down the right mouse

button, drag the PowerClip object inside a container, and click PowerClip inside.

To edit the contents of a PowerClip object

1Select a PowerClip object.

2Click Effects ` PowerClip ` Edit contents.

3Edit the contents of the PowerClip object.

4Click Effects ` PowerClip ` Finish editing this level.

While you edit, the container appears in Wireframe mode and cannot be

selected.

130 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Need more information?

For more information about shaping objects, see "Shaping objects" in the "Lines,

shapes, and outlines" section of the Help.

CorelDRAW: Working with color 131

Working with color

CorelDRAW lets you choose and create colors by using a wide variety of

industry-standard color palettes, color mixers, and color models. You can create and

edit custom color palettes to store frequently used colors for future use.

You can also customize how a color palette appears on your screen by changing the size

of swatches, the number of rows, and other properties.

In this section, you'll learn about

choosing colors

creating custom color palettes

Choosing colors

You can choose fill and outline colors by using fixed or custom color palettes, color

viewers, color harmonies, or color blends. When you want to use a color that already

exists in an object or document, you can sample the color to achieve an exact match.

For information about applying the colors you choose, see "Applying uniform fills" on

page 137 and "Formatting lines and outlines" on page 71.

Default color palette

A color palette is a collection of color swatches. In some programs, color palettes are

known as "swatch palettes."

You can choose fill and outline colors by using the default color palette, which contains

99 colors from the CMYK color model.

The selected fill and outline colors appear in the color swatches on the status bar.

Fixed or custom color palettes

Fixed color palettes are provided by third-party manufacturers. Some examples of these

are PANTONE®, HKS Colors, and TRUMATCH® palettes. It may be useful to have

132 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

on hand a manufacturer's swatch book, which is a collection of color samples that shows

exactly what each color looks like when printed.

Some fixed color palettes — PANTONE, HKS Colors, TOYO, DIC®, Focoltone®,

and SpectraMaster® — are collections of spot colors. If you create color separations

when you print, each color from these color palettes requires a separate printing plate.

This can significantly affect the cost of your print job. If you want to use these colors,

but you don't want to use spot colors, convert the spot colors to process colors when

printing. For more information, see "P rinting color separations" on page 264.

Custom color palettes can include colors from any color model or fixed color palette.

You can save a custom color palette for future use.

The PANTONE solid coated palette is an example of a fixed color palette.

You can also choose colors by using color blends, color harmonies, and color viewers. For

more information, see "Choosing colors" in the Help.

Sampling colors

When you want to use a color that already exists in a drawing, you can sample the color

to achieve an exact match. By default, you sample a single pixel from the drawing

window.

CorelDRAW: Working with color 133

To choose a color by using the default color palette

You can display color names by pointing to a swatch.

A pop-up color palette

To choose a color by using a fixed or custom color palette

1Select an object.

2In the toolbox, do one of the following:

• To choose a fill color, click the Fill tool , and click Uniform fill .

• To choose an outline color, click the Outline tool , and click Outline color .

3Click the Palettes tab.

4Choose a fixed or custom palette from the Palette list box.

5Move the color slider to set the range of colors displayed in the color selection area.

6Click a color in the color selection area.

To Do the following

Choose a fill color for a selected object Click a color swatch.

Choose an outline color for a selected object Right-click a color swatch.

Choose from different shades of a color Click and hold a color swatch to display a

pop-up color picker, and then click a color.

View more colors on the default color palette Click the scroll arrows at the top and bottom

of the color palette.

134 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Each color swatch on a fixed color palette is marked with a small white square.

You should use the same color model for all colors in a drawing; the colors will

be consistent and you will be able to predict the colors of the final output more

accurately. It is preferable to use the same color model that you are using for

the final output. For more information about reproducing colors accurately, see

"Managing color for display, input, and output" on page 247.

You can display or hide the names of fixed or custom colors by clicking

Options ` Show color names.

To sample a color

1In the toolbox, click the Eyedropper tool .

2Choose Sample color from the list box on the property bar.

3Click the Sample size flyout on the property bar, and enable one of the following

options:

1×1 — lets you choose the color of the pixel you click

2×2 — lets you choose the average color in a sample area of 2 × 2 pixels. The

pixel you click is in the middle of the sample area.

5×5 — lets you choose the average color in a sample area of 5 × 5 pixels

If you want to sample a color outside the drawing window, click Select from

Desktop.

4Click the color you want to sample.

If you want to apply the sampled color to an object, click the Paintbucket tool ,

and click the object in the drawing window. The pointer changes as you hover over

an area to indicate whether an outline or fill area is chosen. For example, as you

hover over the center of a square, the pointer displays a solid color swatch; as you

hover over the outline of the square, the pointer displays an outline shape.

In some cases, the sampled color may be an RGB or CMYK color that is the

closest equivalent to the original color, instead of being a complete match.

The color you sample appears on the Fill color swatch in the lower-right corner

of the drawing window. If you want to change the fill or outline color of an

object to the sampled color, you can drag the Fill color swatch to the object.

CorelDRAW: Working with color 135

Creating custom color palettes

Custom color palettes are collections of colors that you save. A number of preset custom

color palettes are available; however, you can create color palettes from scratch. Custom

color palettes are useful when you frequently choose the same colors, or when you want

to work with a set of colors that look good together.

You can create a custom color palette by choosing each color manually or by using the

colors in an object or an entire area.

To create a custom color palette

1Click Window ` Color palettes ` Palette editor .

2Click New palette .

3Ty p e a f i l e n a m e .

4Click Save.

5In the Palette editor dialog box, click Add color .

6In the Select color dialog box, choose a color, and click Add color to palette .

To create a color palette from an object

1Select an object.

2Click Window ` Color palettes ` Create palette from selection.

3Ty p e a f i l e n a m e .

4Click Save.

To create a color palette from a document

1Click Window ` Color palettes ` Create palette from document.

2Ty p e a f i l e n a m e .

3Click Save.

Need more information?

For more information about working with color, see "Working with color" in the

"Color and fills" section of the Help.

CorelDRAW: Filling objects 137

Filling objects

You can add colored, patterned, textured, and other fills to the inside of objects or

other enclosed areas. You can customize a fill and set it as a default, so that each object

you draw has the same fill.

In this section, you'll learn about

applying uniform fills

applying fountain fills

applying pattern fills

•applying mesh fills

applying fills to areas

working with fills

Applying uniform fills

You can apply a uniform fill to objects. Uniform fills are solid colors that you can choose

or create by using color models and color palettes. For information about creating

colors, see "Working with color" on page 131.

To apply a uniform fill

1Select an object.

2In the toolbox, click the Interactive fill tool .

3Choose Uniform fill from the Fill type list box on the property bar.

4Specify the settings you want on the property bar, and press Enter .

You can also fill a selected object by clicking a color on the color palette.

You can mix colors in a uniform fill by selecting a filled object, pressing Ctrl,

and clicking another color on the color palette.

138 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

You can also apply a uniform fill by clicking the Uniform fill tool in the

toolbox.

Applying fountain fills

A fountain fill is a smooth progression of two or more colors that adds depth to an

object. Fountain fills are also known as gradient fills.

There are four types of fountain fills: linear, radial, conical, and square. A linear fountain

fill flows in a straight line across the object, a conical fountain fill creates the illusion of

light hitting a cone, a radial fountain fill radiates from the center of the object, and a

square fountain fill is dispersed in concentric squares from the center of the object.

There four types of fountain fills (left to right): linear, radial, conical, and

square.

You can apply preset fountain fills, two-color fountain fills, and custom fountain fills to

objects. Custom fountain fills can contain two or more colors, which you can position

anywhere in the fill's progression. After you create a custom fountain fill, you can save

it as a preset.

When you apply a fountain fill, you can specify attributes for the fill type you choose;

for example, the direction of a fill's color blend, the fill's angle, center point, midpoint,

and edge pad. You can also adjust the print and display quality of the fountain fill by

specifying the number of fountain steps. By default, the fountain step setting is locked

so that the print quality of the fountain fill is determined by the value specified in the

print settings and the display quality is determined by the default value you set.

However, you can unlock the fountain steps setting when you apply a fountain fill and

CorelDRAW: Filling objects 139

specify a value that applies to both the print and view quality of the fill. For information

about setting fountain fill steps for printing , see "Fine-tuning print jobs" in the Help.

To apply a preset fountain fill

1Select an object.

2In the toolbox, click the Fountain fill button .

3Choose a fill from the Presets list box.

4Specify the settings you want.

To apply a two-color fountain fill

1Select an object.

2In the toolbox, click the Interactive fill tool .

3Choose a fountain fill from the Fill type list box on the property bar.

4Open the Fill dropdown picker on the property bar, and click a color.

5Open the Last fill picker on the property bar, and click a color.

6Specify the settings you want.

You can mix colors in a two-color fountain fill by selecting one of the

interactive vector handles, pressing Ctrl , and clicking a color on the color

palette.

You can add a color to a fountain fill by dragging a color from the color palette

to an object's interactive vector handle.

To apply a custom fountain fill

1Select an object.

2In the toolbox, click the Fountain fill button .

3Choose a fountain fill from the Ty p e list box.

4Enable the Custom option.

5Click the box at one end of the area just above the color band, and click a color on

the color palette.

6Click the box at the opposite end of the area just above the color band, and click a

color.

140 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

7Specify the attributes you want.

You can also apply a custom fountain fill by clicking the Interactive fill tool

in the toolbox, and dragging colors from the color palette in the drawing

window onto the object's interactive vector handles.

Applying pattern fills

You can fill objects with two-color, full-color, or bitmap pattern fills.

A two-color pattern fill is composed of only the two colors that you choose. A full-color

pattern fill is a more complex vector graphic that can be composed of lines and fills. A

bitmap pattern fill is a bitmap image whose complexity is determined by its size, image

resolution, and bit depth.

CorelDRAW provides preset pattern fills that you can apply to objects; however, you

can also create your own pattern fills. For example, you can create pattern fills from

objects that you draw or images that you import.

You can also

Add an intermediate color Double-click between the two ends of the

area just above the color band, and click a

color on the color palette.

Adjust the midpoint between colors On the color band, double-click between

two colors to add a new marker. Drag the

marker to adjust the transition point

between the two colors.

Change a color Click the marker above the color you want

to change, and click a color on the color

palette.

Delete a color Double-click the marker above the color you

want to delete.

Change the position of a color Drag the marker just above the color to a

new location.

Save the fill as a preset Type a name in the Presets box, and click

the Add preset button .

CorelDRAW: Filling objects 141

You can change the tile size of pattern fills. You can also specify exactly where these fills

begin by setting the tile origin. CorelDRAW also lets you offset tiles in a fill. Adjusting

the horizontal or vertical posi tion of the first pattern, relative to the top of the object,

affects the rest of the fill.

You can choose how the pattern fill appears by specifying whether to mirror the fill so

that alternating tiles are the reflections of one another. If you want a pattern fill to

change according to actions you perform on the filled object, you can specify that you

want it to transform with the object. For example, if you enlarge an object filled with a

pattern that transforms, the pattern becomes larger while the number of tiles is not

increased.

To apply a two-color pattern fill

1Select an object.

2In the toolbox, click the Interactive fill tool .

3Choose Two color pattern from the Fill type list box on the property bar.

4Open the Fill dropdown picker, and click a pattern.

5Open the Front color picker, and click a color.

6Open the Back color picker, and click a color.

You can also mix colors in a two-color pattern fill by pressing Ctrl and clicking

a color on the color palette.

To apply a full-color or bitmap pattern fill

1Select an object.

2In the toolbox, click the Interactive fill tool .

3Choose one of the following from the Fill type list box on the property bar:

• Full-color pattern

• Bitmap pattern

4Open the Fill dropdown picker, and click a pattern.

142 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Applying mesh fills

When you fill an object with a mesh fill, you can create unique effects. For example, you

can create smooth color transitions in any direction without having to create blends or

contours. When you apply a mesh fill, you specify the number of columns and rows in

the grid, and you specify the grid's intersecting points. After you have created a mesh

object, you can edit the mesh fill grid by adding and removing nodes or intersections.

You can also remove the mesh.

A mesh fill can be applied only to closed objects or a single path. If you want to apply

a mesh fill to a complex object, you must first create a mesh-filled object and combine

it with the complex object to form a PowerClip object. For more information about

working with PowerClip objects, see "Creating PowerClip objects" on page 128.

You can add color to a patch of a mesh fill and to the individual intersection nodes. You

can also choose to mix colors for a more blended appearance.

Left: Adding a color to a mesh fill. Right: Moving an intersection node in a

mesh fill lets you adjust the progression of colors.

To apply a mesh fill to an object

1Select an object.

2In the toolbox, click the Mesh fill tool .

3Type the number of columns in the top portion of the Grid size box on the

property bar.

4Type the number of rows in the bottom portion of the Grid size box on the

property bar, and press Enter .

5Adjust the grid nodes on the object.

CorelDRAW: Filling objects 143

If the mesh object contains color, adjusting the intersection nodes of the mesh

affects how the colors blend together.

To add color to a patch in a mesh fill

1Select a mesh-filled object.

2In the toolbox, click the Mesh fill tool .

3Drag a color from the color palette to a patch in the object.

You can also drag a color from the co lor palette to an intersection node.

Applying fills to areas

You can apply fills to any enclosed area by using the Smart fill tool. Unlike other fill

tools, which fill only objects, the Smart fill tool detects the edges of an area and creates

a closed path so that the area can be filled. For example, if you draw a freehand line that

crosses over itself to create loops, the Smart fill tool can detect the edges of the loops

and fill them. As long as the paths of one or more objects completely enclose an area, it

can be filled.

In the example above, the original spiral object is duplicated and offset,

resulting in enclosed areas that can be filled by using the Smart fill tool.

Because the Smart fill tool creates a path around the area, it essentially creates a new

object that can be filled, moved, copied, or edited. This means the tool can be used in

one of two ways: to fill an area or to create a new object from an area.

144 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Although primarily used to fill areas, the Smart fill tool can also be used to

create new objects. In the example above, the original objects — the two spirals

(left) — are deleted (right), but the fill remains because each filled area is

actually an object.

To apply a fill to any enclosed area

1In the toolbox, click the Smart fill tool .

2On the property bar, choose one of the following options from the Fill options list

box:

Specify — lets you fill the area with a solid color by choosing a color from the

Fill Color color picker on the property bar

Use default — lets you fill the area with the Fill tool default setting

No fill — applies no fill to the area

3From the Outline options box, choose one of the following options:

Use default — lets you apply the default outline setting

Specify — lets you choose a line width from the Outline width box and a line

color from the Outline color color picker

No outline — applies no outline to the area

4Click inside the enclosed area that you want to fill.

A new object is created from the enclosed area, and the current fill and outline

styles are applied to it. The new object appears on top of the existing objects in the

layer.

If you click outside an enclosed area, a new object is created from all objects on

the page, and the fill and outline properties are applied to the new object.

The outline width is centered on an object's path. Because the Smart fill tool

detects paths, not outlines, thick outlines appear partially covered by the new

object. You can uncover the original outlines by changing the stacking order

of the objects. For information about changing the stacking order of objects,

see "To change the order of an object" on page 102.

CorelDRAW: Filling objects 145

Working with fills

There are a number of tasks that are common to all types of fills. You can choose a

default fill color so that every object you add to a drawing has the same fill. You can also

remove any fill, copy it to another object, or use it to fill an area surrounded by an open

curve.

To choose a default fill color

1Click a blank area on the drawing page to deselect all objects.

2In the toolbox, click the Uniform fill tool .

3In the Uniform fill dialog box, enable any of the following check boxes:

Graphic — applies the default fill color to shapes you draw

Artistic text — applies the default fill color to artistic text you add

Paragraph text — applies the default fill color to paragraph text you add

4Specify any fill settings.

To remove a fill

1Select an object.

2In the toolbox, click the None button .

Need more information?

For more information about filling objects, see "Filling objects" in the "Color and

fills" section of the Help.

CorelDRAW: Adding three-dimensional effects to objects 147

Adding three-dimensional

effects to objects

You can create the illusion of three-dimensional depth in objects by adding contour,

perspective, extrusion, bevel, or drop shadow effects.

In this section, you'll learn about

contouring objects

applying perspective to objects

•creating extrusions

creating bevel effects

creating drop shadows

•blending objects

Contouring objects

You can contour an object to create a series of concentric lines that progress to the inside

or outside of the object. CorelDRAW also lets you set the number and distance of the

contour lines.

In addition to creating interesting three-dimensional effects, you can use contours to

create cuttable outlines for output to devices, such as plotters, engraving machines, and

vinyl cutters.

After contouring an object, you can copy or clone its contour settings to another object.

You can also change the colors of the fill between the contour lines and the contour

outlines themselves. You can set a color progression in the contour effect, where one

color blends into another. The color progression can follow a straight, clockwise, or

counterclockwise path through the color range of your choice.

148 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

A center contour has been applied to the above object. The number of contour

lines, as well as the distance between lines, can be changed.

An outside contour has been applied to the above object. Note that an outside

contour projects from the outside edge of the object.

To contour an object

1In the toolbox, click the Contour tool .

2Click an object or a set of grouped objects, and drag the start handle toward the

center to create an inside contour or away from the center to create an outside

contour.

3Move the object slider to change the number of contour steps.

CorelDRAW: Adding three-dimensional effects to objects 149

You can create contours by clicking Effects ` Contour and specifying the

settings you want in the Contour docker.

To set the fill color for a contour object

1In the toolbox, click the Contour tool .

2Select a contour object.

3Open the Fill color picker on the property bar, and click a color.

If the original object has a fountain fill, a second color picker appears.

You can accelerate the fill color progression by clicking the Object and color

acceleration button on the property bar.

You can change the contour center's color by dragging a color from the color

palette to the end fill handle.

To specify an outline color for the contour object

1In the toolbox, click the Contour tool .

2Select a contour object.

3Open the Outline color picker on the property bar, and click a color.

You can also

Add contour lines to the center of the

selected object

Click the To c e n t e r button .

Specify the number of contour lines Click the Inside or Outside button

on the property bar, and type a value in the

Contour steps box on the property bar.

Specify the distance between contour lines Type a value in the Contour offset box on

the property bar.

Accelerate contour line progression Click the Object and color acceleration

button on the property bar, and move the

object slider.

150 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Applying perspective to objects

You can create a perspective effect by shortening one or two sides of an object. This

effect gives an object the appearance of receding in one or two directions, thereby

creating a one-point perspective or a two-point perspective.

Perspective effects can be added to objects or grouped objects. You can also add a

perspective effect to linked groups, such as contours, blends, extrusions, and objects

created with the Artistic media tool. You can't add perspective effects to paragraph

text, bitmaps, or symbols.

The original graphic (left) with one-point (middle) and two-point (right)

perspectives applied to it.

To apply a perspective

Pressing Ctrl constrains the node's movement to the horizontal or vertical axis

to create a one-point perspective effect.

To

Apply a one-point perspective Click Effects ` Add perspective. Press

Ctrl, and drag a node.

Apply a two-point perspective Click Effects ` Add perspective. Drag the

nodes on the outside of the grid to apply the

effect you want.

CorelDRAW: Adding three-dimensional effects to objects 151

You can move opposing nodes the same distance in opposite directions by

pressing Ctrl + Shift as you drag.

Creating extrusions

You can make objects appear three-dimensiona l by creating extrusions. You can create

extrusions by projecting points from an object and joining them to create an illusion of

three dimensions. CorelDRAW also lets you apply a vector extrusion to an object in a

group.

To create an extrusion

1In the toolbox, click the Extrude tool .

2Choose an extrusion type from the Extrusion type list box on the property bar.

3Select an object.

4Drag the object's selection handles to set the direction and depth of the extrusion.

If you want to reset the extrusion, press Esc before releasing the mouse button.

To change the form of a vector extrusion

To Do the following

Rotate an extrusion Select an extruded object. Click the Extrude

rotation button on the property bar.

Drag the extrusion in the direction you

want.

Change the direction of an extrusion Using the Extrude tool , click an

extrusion. Click the vanishing point, and

drag in the direction you want.

Change the depth of an extrusion Using the Extrude tool , click an

extrusion. Drag the slider between the

interactive vector handles.

Round the corners of an extruded rectangle

or square

In the toolbox, click the Shape tool .

Drag a corner node along the outline of the

rectangle or square.

152 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Creating bevel effects

A bevel effect adds three-dimensional depth to a graphic or text object by making its

edges appear sloped (cut at an angle). Bevel effects can contain both spot and process

(CMYK) colors, so they are ideal for printing.

Bevel styles

You can choose from the following bevel styles:

Soft edge — creates beveled surfaces that appear shaded in some areas

Emboss — makes an object appear as a relief

Left to right: Logo without a bevel effect, with a Soft Edge bevel effect, and with

an Emboss bevel effect

Beveled surfaces

You can control the intensity of the bevel effect by specifying the width of the beveled

surface.

Light and color

An object with a bevel effect appears lit by white ambient (surrounding) light and a

spotlight. The ambient light is of low intensity and cannot be changed. The spotlight

is also white by default, but you can change its color, intensity, and location. Changing

the spotlight color affects the color of the beveled surfaces. Changing the spotlight's

intensity lightens or darkens the beveled surfaces. Changing the location of the

spotlight determines which beveled surfaces appear lit.

You can change the location of the spotlight by specifying its direction and altitude.

Direction determines where the light source is located in the plane of the object (for

CorelDRAW: Adding three-dimensional effects to objects 153

example, to the left or right of an object). Altitude determines how high the spotlight

is located in relation to the object's plane. For example, you can place the spotlight flush

with the horizon (altitude of 0°) or directly above the object (altitude of 90 °).

In addition, you can change the color of the beveled surfaces that are in shadow by

specifying a shadow color.

To create a Soft Edge bevel effect

1Select an object that is closed and has a fill applied to it.

2Click Effects ` Bevel.

3In the Bevel docker, choose Soft edge from the Style list box.

4Enable one of the following Bevel offset options:

To c e n t e r — lets you create beveled surface s that meet in the middle of the

object

Distance — lets you specify the width of th e beveled surfaces. Type a value in

the Distance box.

The lowest altitude value (0°) places the spotlight on the plane of the object;

the highest altitude value (90°) places the spotlight directly above the object.

You can also

Change the color of beveled surfaces in

shadow

Choose a color from the Shadow color

picker.

Beveled surfaces change to a shade of the

specified shadow color.

Choose a spotlight color Choose a color from the Light color picker.

Change the intensity of the spotlight Move the Intensity slider.

Specify the position of the spotlight Move either of the following sliders:

•Direction

•Altitude

Direction values range from 0° to 360°;

altitude values range from 0° to 90°.

154 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To create an Emboss effect

1Select an object that is closed and has a fill applied to it.

2Click Effects ` Bevel.

3In the Bevel docker, choose Emboss from the Style list box.

4In the Distance box, type a low value.

5To change the intensity of the spotlight, move the Intensity slider.

6To specify the direction of the spotlight, move the Direction slider.

7Click Apply .

If you want to create a more pronounced bevel effect, type a higher value in the

Distance box, and reapply the effect.

The Emboss bevel effect is achieved by creating two duplicates of the object.

The duplicates are offset in opposite directions: one toward the light source and

the other away from the light source. The color of the duplicate placed toward

the spotlight is a blend of the spotlight and object colors and depends on the

light intensity. The color of the duplicate placed away from the spotlight is a

50 percent blend of the shadow and object colors.

Creating drop shadows

Drop shadows simulate light falling on an object from one of five particular

perspectives: flat, right, left, bottom, and top. You can add drop shadows to most

objects or groups of objects, including artistic text, paragraph text, and bitmaps.

When you add a drop shadow, you can change its perspective, and you can adjust

attributes such as color, opacity, fade level, angle, and feathering.

You can also

Choose a shadow color Choose a color from the Shadow color

picker.

Choose a spotlight color Choose a color from the Light color picker.

CorelDRAW: Adding three-dimensional effects to objects 155

A drop shadow applied to an object

By separating a drop shadow from its object, you gain more control over the drop

shadow itself. For example, you can edit the drop shadow as you would edit a

transparency. For information about editing a transparency, see "Applying

transparencies" on page 159.

As with transparencies, you can apply a merge mode to a drop shadow to control how

the color of the drop shadow blends with the color of the object underneath. For more

information about merge modes, see "A pplying merge modes" in the Help.

You can also adjust the rendering resolution of a drop shadow. For example, you can

increase the rendering resolution to improve a drop shadow's appearance. However,

increasing the resolution of a drop shadow may increase the file size of a drawing.

To add a drop shadow

1In the toolbox, click the Drop shadow tool .

2Click an object.

3Drag from the center or side of the object until the drop shadow is the size you

want.

4Specify any attributes on the property bar.

Drop shadows cannot be added to linked groups, such as blended objects,

contoured objects, beveled objects, extruded objects, objects created with the

Artistic media tool , or other drop shadows.

156 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To separate a drop shadow from an object

1Select an object's drop shadow.

2Click Arrange ` Break drop shadow group apart.

3Drag the shadow.

Blending objects

CorelDRAW lets you create blends, such as straight-line blends, blends along a path,

and compound blends. Blends are often used for creating realistic shadows and

highlights in objects.

A straight-line blend shows a progression in shape and size from one object to another.

The outline and fill colors of the intermediate objects progress along a straight-line path

across the color spectrum. The outlines of intermediate objects show a gradual

progression in thickness and shape.

After you create a blend, you can copy or clone its settings to other objects. When you

copy a blend, the object takes on all the blend-related settings, except for their outline

and fill attributes. When you clone a blend, changes you make to the original blend

(also called the master) are applied to the clone.

Straight-line blends can be used to create graphics with a glass-like

appearance. The rollover button (left) contains a blend of tightly overlapped

blended objects.

You can change the appearance of a blend by adjusting the number and spacing of its

intermediate objects, the blend's color progression, the nodes the blends map to, the

CorelDRAW: Adding three-dimensional effects to objects 157

blend's path, and the start and end objects. You can fuse the components of a split or

compound blend to create a single object.

You can also split and remove a blend.

To blend objects

To Do the following

Blend along a straight line In the toolbox, click the Blend tool .

Select the first object, and drag over the

second object. If you want to reset the blend,

press Esc as you drag.

Blend an object along a freehand path In the toolbox, click the Blend tool. Select

the first object. Hold down Alt , and drag to

draw a line to the second object.

Fit a blend to a path In the toolbox, click the Blend tool. Click

the blend. Click the Path properties button

on the property bar. Click New path .

Using the curved arrow, click the path to

which you want to fit the blend.

Stretch the blend over an entire path Select a blend that is already fitted on a path.

Click the Miscellaneous blend options

button on the property bar, and enable

the Blend along full path check box.

Create a compound blend Using the Blend tool, drag from an object to

the start or end object of another blend.

Need more information?

For more information about adding thre e-dimensional effects to objects, see

"Adding three-dimensional effects to objects" in the "Special effects" section of

the Help.

CorelDRAW: Changing the transparency of objects 159

Changing the

transparency of objects

You can apply a transparency to an object so that all objects behind it show through.

The CorelDRAW application also lets you specify how the color of the transparent

object combines with the color of the object beneath it.

In this section, you'll learn about

applying transparencies

Applying transparencies

When you apply a transparency to an object, you make the objects beneath it partially

visible. You can apply transparencies using th e same kind of fills you apply to objects;

that is, uniform, fountain, texture, and pattern. For more information about these fills,

see "Filling objects" on page 137.

By default, CorelDRAW applies all transparen cies to the object's fill and outline;

however, you can specify whether you want the transparency to apply only to the

object's outline or fill.

You can also copy a transparency from one object to another.

When you position a transparency over an object, you can freeze it, making the view of

the object move with the transparency.

To apply a uniform transparency

1Select an object.

2In the toolbox, click the Tr a n s p a r e n c y tool .

3On the property bar, choose Uniform from the Transparency type list box.

4Type a value in the Starting transparency box on the property bar, and press

Enter .

160 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

You can click a color on the color palette to apply a color to the transparency.

To apply a fountain transparency

1Select an object.

2In the toolbox, click the Tr a n s p a r e n c y tool .

3On the property bar, choose one of the following fountain transparencies from the

Transparency type list box:

• Linear

• Radial

• Conical

• Square

4Reposition the interactive vector handles that display, or point to where you want

the transparency to start on the object, and drag to where you want the

transparency to end.

If you want to reset the transparency, press Esc before releasing the mouse button.

5Type a value in the Transparency midpoint box on the property bar, and press

Enter .

You can create a custom fountain transparency by dragging colors, whose

shades convert to grayscale, from the color palette onto the object's interactive

vector handles .

Need more information?

For more information about changing the transparency of objects, see "Changing

the transparency of objects" in the "Special effects" section of the Help.

CorelDRAW: Working with pages and layout tools 161

Working with pages and

layout tools

The CorelDRAW application allows you to specify the size, orientation, unit of scale,

and background of the drawing page. You can customize and display page grids and

guidelines to help you organize objects and place them exactly where you want. For

example, if you are designing a newsletter, you can set the dimensions of the pages and

create guidelines for positioning columns and heading text. When you are laying out

an advertisement, you can align graphics and text along guidelines and arrange

graphic elements within a grid. Rulers can help you position grids, guidelines, and

objects along a scale, which uses units of your choosing. Also, you can add and delete

pages.

Page layout settings and tools are fully customizable and can be used as defaults for

other drawings.

In this section, you'll learn about

specifying the page layout

choosing a page background

adding, duplicating, renaming, and deleting pages

using the rulers

setting up the grid

setting up guidelines

Specifying the page layout

You can begin working on a drawing by specifying settings for the size, orientation, and

layout style of the page. The options you choose when specifying the page layout can

be used as a default for all new drawings you create. You can also adjust the page size

and orientation settings to match the standard paper settings for printing.

Page size

There are two options for specifying a page size: choosing a preset page size and creating

your own. You can choose from many preset page sizes, ranging from legal-size paper

162 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

and envelopes to posters and Web pages. If a preset page size does not meet your needs,

you can create a custom page size by specifying a drawing's dimensions.

You can save custom page sizes as presets for later use, and you can delete any custom

preset page sizes that you no longer need.

Page orientation

The orientation of the page can be landscape or portrait. In landscape orientation, the

drawing's width is greater than its height, and in portrait orientation, the drawing's

height is greater than its width. Any pages you add to a drawing project will have the

current orientation; however, you can give a different orientation to single pages in a

drawing project.

Layout styles

When you use the default layout style (Full Page), each page in a document is

considered a single page and prints on one sheet. You can choose layout styles for

multipage publications, such as booklets and brochures. The multipage layout styles —

Book, Booklet, Tent Card, Side-fold Card, Top-fold Card, and Tri-fold Brochure — split

the page size into two or more equal parts. Each part is considered a separate page. The

advantage of working with separate parts is that you can edit each page in upright

orientation, and in sequential order in the drawing window, regardless of the layout

required to print your document. When you are ready to print, the application

automatically arranges the pages in the order required for printing and binding.

To set the page size and orientation

1Click Layout ` Page setup .

The Options dialog box appears with the Size page displayed.

2Perform a task from the following table.

To Do the following

Choose a preset page size Choose a paper type from the Paper list box.

Match the page size and orientation to the

printer settings

Click Get page size from printer .

Specify a custom page size Type values in the Width and Height boxes.

Set the page orientation Enable the Landscape or the Portrait

option.

CorelDRAW: Working with pages and layout tools 163

To add and delete custom preset page sizes

1Click Layout ` Page setup .

2Perform a task from the following table.

Choosing a page background

You can choose the color and type of background for a drawing. For example, you can

use a solid color if you want a uniform background.

To use a solid color as the background

1Click Layout ` Page background .

2Enable the Solid option.

3Open the Color picker, and click a color.

Set the page size and orientation for an

individual page in a multipage document

Make sure the page you want to change is

displayed in the drawing window, choose a

page size and orientation, and enable the

Apply changes to current page only check

box.

To Do the following

Add a custom preset page size Specify a custom page size, and click Save

page size.

The custom preset page size appears in the

Paper list box.

Delete a preset page size Choose a paper type from the Paper list box,

and click Delete page size.

To Do the following

164 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Adding, duplicating, renaming, and deleting pages

CorelDRAW lets you add pages to a drawing or duplicate existing pages. You can also

rename pages and delete a single page or an entire range of pages. You can also move

objects from one page to another.

When you duplicate a page, you can choose to only copy the layer structure of the page

or you can copy the layers and all the objects they contain. For more information about

layers, see "Working with layers" on page 185.

You can use the Page Sorter view to manage pages while viewing the page contents. The

Page Sorter view lets you change the order of pages as well as copy, add, rename, and

delete pages.

To add a page

1Click Layout ` Insert page.

2Type the number of pages you want to add in the Insert pages box.

3Enable one of the following options:

• Before

• After

If you want to insert a page before or after a page other than the current page, type

the page number in the Page box.

If you are on the first or last page, you can add a page by clicking the Add page

button in the document window.

You can also choose where to add a page by right-clicking a page tab in the

document window and clicking Insert page after or Insert page before.

To duplicate a page

1In the Object manager docker, click the name of the page that you want to

duplicate.

If the Object manager is not open, click To o l s ` Object manager .

2Click Layout ` Duplicate page.

3In the Insert new page area of the Duplicate page dialog box, choose one of the

following options:

• Before selected page

CorelDRAW: Working with pages and layout tools 165

• After selected page

4At the bottom of the dialog box, choose one of the following options:

Copy layer(s) only — lets you duplicate the layer structure without copying the

contents of the layers

Copy layer(s) and their contents — lets you duplicate the layers and all their

contents

You can also duplicate a page by right-clicking a page name and choosing

Duplicate page.

To rename a page

1Click Layout ` Rename page.

2Type the name of the page in the Page name box.

To delete a page

1Click Layout ` Delete page.

2In the Delete page dialog box, type the number of the page you want to delete.

You can delete a range of pages by enabling the Through to page check box

and typing the number of the last page to delete in the Through to page box.

To change the order of pages

Drag the page tabs on the document navigator at the bottom of the drawing

window.

To move an object to another page

1Drag the object over the tab with the destination page number (at the bottom of

the document window).

The destination page appears in the document window.

2Without releasing the mouse button, drag the object onto the page to position the

object.

166 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Using the rulers

You can display rulers in the drawing window to help you draw, size, and align objects

precisely. You can hide the rulers or move them to another position in the drawing

window. You can also customize the ruler settings to suit your needs. For example, you

can set the ruler origin, choose a unit of measure, and specify how many marks or ticks

appear between each full unit mark.

By default, CorelDRAW applies the same units used for the rulers to the duplicate and

nudge distances. You can change the default so that you can specify different units for

these and other settings. For information about nudging, see "Positioning objects" on

page 92.

To hide or display the rulers

•Click View ` Rulers.

A check mark beside the Rulers command indicates that the rulers are displayed.

To move a ruler

Hold down Shift , and drag a ruler to a new position in the drawing window.

Setting up the grid

The grid is a series of intersecting dashed lines or dots that you can use to precisely align

and position objects in the drawing window. You can set the distance between the grid

lines or dots by specifying the frequency or spacing. Frequency refers to the number of

lines or dots that appear between each horizontal and vertical unit. Spacing refers to the

exact distance between each line or dot. High frequency values or low spacing values

can help you align and position objects more precisely.

You can have objects snap to the grid so that when you move the objects, they jump

between grid lines.

To display or hide the grid

•Click View ` Grid.

A check mark beside the Grid command indicates that the grid is displayed.

CorelDRAW: Working with pages and layout tools 167

To set the distance between the grid lines

1Click View ` Setup ` Grid and ruler setup.

2Enable one of the following options:

Frequency — specifies grid spacing as the nu mber of lines per unit of measure

Spacing — specifies grid spacing as the distance between each grid line

3Type values in the following boxes:

• Horizontal

• Vertical

The unit of measure used for grid spacing is the same as that used for rulers.

For information about ruler settings, se e "To customize ruler settings" in the

Help.

To set objects to snap to the grid

1Click View ` Snap to grid.

2Move the objects with the Pick tool .

Setting up guidelines

Guidelines are lines that can be placed anywhere in the drawing window to aid in object

placement. In some applications, guidelines are known as guides.

There are three types of guidelines: horizontal, vertical, and slanted. By default, the

application displays guidelines that you can add to the drawing window, but you can

hide them at any time. You can also use objects as guides.

You can set guidelines for individual pages or you can set guidelines for the entire

document. For more information about local and master guidelines, see "Local layers

and master layers" on page 185.

You can add a guideline wherever you need one; however, you can also choose to add

preset guidelines. There are two types of preset guidelines: Corel presets and user-

defined presets. Examples of Corel presets include guidelines that appear at 1-inch

margins and guidelines that appear at newsletter column borders. User-defined presets

are guidelines whose location you specify. For example, you can add preset guidelines

that display margins at a distance you specify or that define a column layout or grid.

168 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

After you add a guideline, you can select it, move it, rotate it, lock it in place, or

delete it.

You can have objects snap to the guidelines, so that when an object is moved near a

guideline, it can only be centered on the guideline or lined up on either side of the

guideline.

Guidelines use the unit of measure specified for rulers. For information about ruler

settings, see "To customize ruler settings" in the Help.

Guidelines can be placed in the drawing window to aid in object placement.

To display or hide the guidelines

•Click View ` Guidelines.

A check mark beside the Guidelines command indicates that the guidelines are

displayed.

To add a horizontal or vertical guideline

1Click View ` Setup ` Guidelines setup.

2In the list of categories, click one of the following:

• Horizontal

• Vertical

3Specify the guideline settings you want.

4Click Add .

CorelDRAW: Working with pages and layout tools 169

You can also add a guideline by dragging from the horizontal or vertical ruler

in the drawing window.

To use an object as a guide

1Click To o l s ` Object manager .

2In the Object Manager docker, click the Guides layer on the page you want.

3Draw and position the object you want to use as a guide.

To set guidelines for the entire document

1Click To o l s ` Object manager .

2In the Object Manager docker, click Guides on the Master page .

3In the drawing window, add the guidelines you want.

The guidelines that you set on the Guides layer of the Master page appear on

all pages of the document. These guidelines appear in addition to any

guidelines that you set for individual pages.

To modify guidelines

To Do the following

Select a single guideline Click the guideline with the Pick tool .

Select all guidelines on a page Click Edit ` Select all ` Guidelines . The

local guidelines and master guidelines are

selected.

Move a guideline Drag a guideline to a new position in the

drawing window.

Rotate a guideline Using the Pick tool , click the guideline

twice, and then rotate the guideline when

skewing handles appear.

Lock a guideline Click a guideline with the Pick tool, and

click Arrange ` Lock object .

170 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To have objects snap to the guidelines

1Click View ` Snap to guidelines.

2Drag the object to the guideline.

To snap the center of an object to a guideline, select the object, and move it over

the guideline until its center of rotation snaps to the guideline.

Unlock a guideline Click a guideline with the Pick tool, and

click Arrange ` Unlock object .

Delete a guideline Click a guideline with the Pick tool, and

press Delete .

Delete a preset guideline Click View ` Setup ` Guidelines setup ,

and click Presets in the list of categories.

Disable the check box beside the preset

guideline that you want to delete.

Need more information?

For more information about pages and layout tools, see "Working with pages and

layout tools" in the "Pages an d layout" section of the Help.

To Do the following

CorelDRAW: Working with tables 171

Working with tables

A table provides a structured layout that lets you present text or images within a

drawing. You can draw a table, or you can create a table from paragraph text. You can

easily change the look of a table by modifying the table properties and formatting. In

addition, because tables are objects, you can manipulate them in various ways. You can

also import existing tables from a text file or a spreadsheet.

In this section, you'll learn about

adding tables to drawings

selecting, moving, and navigating table components

inserting and deleting table rows and columns

resizing table cells, rows, and columns

formatting tables and cells

working with text in tables

converting tables to text

merging and splitting tables and cells

manipulating tables as objects

adding images, graphics, and backgrounds to tables

importing tables in a drawing

Adding tables to drawings

With CorelDRAW, you can add a table to a drawing to create a structured layout for

text and images. You can draw a table, or you can create a table from existing text.

172 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

A table lets you create a structured layout for text and graphic elements.

To add a table to a drawing

1Click the Ta b l e tool .

2Type values in the Number of rows and columns boxes on the property bar.

The value you type in the top portion specifies the number of rows; the value you

type in the bottom portion specifies the number of columns.

3Drag diagonally to draw the table.

You can also create a table by clicking Ta b l e ` Create new table , and then

typing values in the Rows, Columns , Height, and Width boxes in the Create

new table dialog box.

To create a table from text

1Click the Pick tool .

2Select the text that you want to convert to a table.

3Click Ta b l e ` Convert text to table.

CorelDRAW: Working with tables 173

4In the Create columns based on the following separator area, choose one of the

following options:

Commas — creates a column where a comma appears and a row where a

paragraph marker appears

Ta b s creates a column where a tab appears and a row where a paragraph

marker appears

Paragraphs creates a column where a paragraph marker appears

User defined — creates a column where a specified marker appears and a row

where a paragraph marker appears

If you enable the User defined option, you need to type a character in the User

defined box.

If you do not type a character in the User defined box, only one column is

created, and each paragraph of text creates a table row.

You can also convert a table to text. For more information, see "To convert a

table to text" on page 181.

Selecting, moving, and navigating table components

You must select a table, table rows, table columns, or table cells before you insert rows

or columns, change the table border properties, add a background fill color, or edit other

table properties. You can move selected rows and columns to a new location in a table.

You can also copy or cut a row or column from one table and paste it in another table.

In addition, you can move from one table cell to another when editing the table cell

text, and you can set the tab order for moving around a table.

To select a table, row, or column

1Click the Ta b l e tool , and then click a table.

2Perform a task from the following table.

To Do the following

Select a table Click Ta b l e ` Select ` Ta b l e .

Select a row Click in a row, and click Ta b l e ` Select `

Row .

174 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To select a table cell

1Click the Ta b l e tool , and then click a table.

2Click in a cell, and then click Ta b l e ` Select ` Cell.

You can also select a cell by using the Shape tool or by inserting the Ta b l e

tool pointer in a cell and pressing Ctrl + A .

To move a table row or column

1Select the row or column you want to move.

2Drag the row or column to another location in the table.

To move a table row to another table

1Select the table row you want to move.

2Click Edit ` Cut.

3Select a row in the other table.

Select a column Click in a column, and click Ta b l e ` Select

` Column.

Select all table contents With the Ta b l e tool pointer, hover over the

upper-left corner of the table until a diagonal

arrow appears , and click.

Use a keyboard shortcut to select a table With the Ta b l e tool pointer inserted in a

cell, press Ctrl + A + A.

Select a row by clicking within a table With the Ta b l e tool pointer, hover over the

table border to the left of the row you want

to select. When a horizontal arrow appears

, click the border to select the row.

Select a column by clicking within the table With the Ta b l e tool pointer, hover over the

top border of the column you want to select.

When a vertical arrow appears , click the

border to select the column.

To Do the following

CorelDRAW: Working with tables 175

4Click Edit ` Paste .

5Choose one of the following options:

• Replace selected row

• Insert above selected row

• Insert below selected row

To move a table column to another table

1Select the table column you want to move.

2Click Edit ` Cut.

3Select a column in the other table.

4Click Edit ` Paste .

5Choose one of the following options:

• Replace selected column

• Insert left of the selected column

• Insert right of the selected column

To move to the next table cell

•With the Ta b l e tool inserted in a cell, press Ta b .

If you are pressing Ta b in a table for the first time, you must choose a tab order

option from the Tab order list box.

You can use the tab key to move to the next cell only if the Move to the next

cell option is enabled in the Tab key options dialog box.

To modify tab order

1Click To o l s ` Options.

2In the Wo r ksp a c e , To o l b o x list of categories, click Ta b l e t o o l .

3Enable the Move to the next cell option.

4From the Tab order list box, choose one of the following options:

• Left to right, top to bottom

• Right to left, top to bottom

176 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

You can program the tab key to insert a tab character in the table text by

enabling the Insert a tab character into the text option.

Inserting and deleting table rows and columns

You can insert and delete the rows and columns in a table.

To insert a table row

1Select a row in the table.

2Perform a task from the following table.

When you use either the Row above command or the Row below command

from the Ta b l e ` Insert menu, the number of rows that are inserted depends

on how many rows you have selected. For example, if you have selected two

rows, then two rows are inserted in the table.

To insert a table column

1Select a column.

2Perform a task from the following table.

To Do the following

Insert a row above the selected row Click Ta b l e ` Insert ` Row above .

Insert a row below the selected row Click Ta b l e ` Insert ` Row below .

Insert multiple rows above the selected row Click Ta b l e ` Insert ` Insert rows, type a

value in the Number of rows box, and then

enable the Above the selection option.

Insert multiple rows below the selected row Click Ta b l e ` Insert ` Insert rows , type a

value in the Number of rows box, and then

enable the Below the selection option.

CorelDRAW: Working with tables 177

When you use the Column left command or the Column right command

from the Ta b l e ` Insert menu, the number of columns that are inserted

depends on how many columns you have selected. For example, if you have

selected two columns, then two columns are inserted in the table.

To delete a row or column from a table

1Select the row or column you want to delete.

2Perform a task from the following table.

Resizing table cells, rows, and columns

You can resize table cells, rows, and columns. Alternatively, if you changed the size of a

row or column, you can distribute them to make all the rows or columns the same size.

To Do the following

Insert a column to the left of the selected

column

Click Ta b l e ` Insert ` Column left .

Insert a column to the right of the selected

column

Click Ta b l e ` Insert ` Column right .

Insert multiple columns to the left of the

selected column

Click Ta b l e ` Insert ` Insert columns,

type a value in the Number of columns

box, and enable the Left of the selection

option.

Insert multiple columns to the right of the

selected column

Click Ta b l e ` Insert ` Insert columns,

type a value in the Number of columns

box, and enable the Right of the selection

option.

To Do the following

Delete a row Click Ta b l e ` Delete ` Row .

Delete a column Click Ta b l e ` Delete ` Column .

178 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To resize a table cell, row, or column

1Click the Ta b l e tool , and then click the table.

2Select the cell, row, or column that you want to resize.

3On the property bar, type values in the following boxes:

• Width

• Height

To distribute table rows and columns

1Select the table cells that you want to distribute.

2Perform a task from the following table.

Formatting tables and cells

You can change the look of a table by modifying both table and cell borders. For

example, you can change the table border width or color.

In addition, you can change the table cell margins and cell border spacing. The cell

margins let you increase the space between the cell borders and the text in the cell. By

default, table cell borders overlap to form a grid. You can, however, increase the cell

border spacing to move the borders away from each other. As a result, the cells do not

form a grid, but appear as individual boxes (also known as "separated borders").

To modify table borders and cell borders

1Select the table or table area that you want to modify.

A table area can include a cell, group of cells, rows, columns, or the entire table.

2Click the Border button on the property bar, and choose the borders you want

to modify.

3Perform a task from the following table.

To Do the following

Make the height of all selected rows the

same

Click Ta b l e ` Distribute ` Distribute

rows evenly .

Make the width of all selected columns the

same

Click Ta b l e ` Distribute ` Distribute

columns evenly .

CorelDRAW: Working with tables 179

To modify cell margins in tables

1Click the Ta b l e tool , and then click the table.

2Select the cells that you want to modify.

3Click Margins on the property bar.

4Type a value in the Top m a r g i n box.

By default, the value in the top margin box is applied to all margins, so that equal

margins are created.

If you want to apply different values for the margins, click the Lock button to

unlock the margin boxes, and type values in the To p m a r g i n , Bottom margin ,

Left margin, and Right margin boxes.

5Press Enter .

To modify cell border spacing in tables

1Click the Ta b l e tool , and then click the table.

2Click Options on the property bar.

3Enable the Separated cell borders check box.

4Type a value in the Horizontal cell spacing box.

By default, the vertical cell spacing is equal to the horizontal cell spacing.

If you do not want equal cell spacing, click the Lock button to unlock the Vertical

cell spacing box, and then type values in both the Horizontal cell spacing and

Vertical cell spacing boxes.

5Press Enter .

To Do the following

Modify the border thickness Choose a border width from the Width list

box on the property bar.

Modify the border color Click the color picker on the property bar,

and then click a color on the color palette.

Modify the border line style Click the Outline pen button on the

property bar, and set outline properties in

the Outline pen dialog box.

180 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Working with text in tables

You can easily add text to table cells. The text in table cells is treated as paragraph text.

Therefore, you can modify the table text as you would other paragraph text. For

example, you can change the font, add bullets, or indents. For more information about

formatting text, see "Adding and formatting text" on page 195. You can also add tab

stops in table cells to shift the text away from the cell margins.

When you type text in a new table, you can also choose to automatically adjust the size

of table cells.

To type text in a table cell

1Click the Ta b l e tool .

2Click a cell.

3Type text in the cell.

You can select text in a cell by pressing Ctrl +A .

To insert a tab stop in a table cell

•Click Te x t ` Insert formatting code ` Ta b .

You can use this method for inserting tabs when the Ta b key is programmed

for moving from one cell to another in a table. Otherwise, you can insert a tab

stop by pressing Ta b . For more information about changing the Ta b key

options, see "To modify tab order" on page 175.

To automatically resize table cells when you type

1Click the Ta b l e tool , and then click the table.

2Click Options on the property bar, and enable the Automatically resize cells

when typing check box.

This option can be applied only to new tables that do not yet have text or other

content.

CorelDRAW: Working with tables 181

Converting tables to text

If you no longer want the table text to appe ar in a table, you can convert the table text

to paragraph text. For more information about converting text to a table, see "To create

a table from text" on page 172.

To convert a table to text

1Click the Ta b l e tool , and then click the table.

2Click Ta b l e ` Convert table to text .

3In the Separate cell text with area, choose one of the following options:

Commas — replaces each column with a comma and replaces each row with a

paragraph marker

Ta b s replaces each column with a tab and replaces each row with a paragraph

marker

Paragraphs replaces each column with a paragraph marker

User defined — replaces each column with a specified character and replaces

each row with a paragraph marker

If you enable the User defined option, you need to type a character in the User

defined box.

If you do not type a a character in the User defined box, each of the table rows

is divided into paragraphs, and the table columns are ignored.

Merging and splitting tables and cells

You can change how a table is configured by merging adjacent cells, rows, and columns.

If you merge table cells, the formatting of the upper-left cell is applied to all merged

cells. Alternatively, you can unmerge cells that were previously merged.

You can also split table cells, rows, or columns. Splitting lets you create new cells, rows,

or columns without changing the size of table.

To merge table cells

1Select the cells to be merged.

The selection must be rectangular.

2Click Ta b l e ` Merge cells.

182 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To unmerge table cells

1Select the cell that you want to unmerge.

2Click Ta b l e ` Unmerge cells.

To split table cells, rows, or columns

1Click the Ta b l e tool .

2Select the cell, row, or column that you want to divide.

3Perform a task from the following table.

Manipulating tables as objects

You can manipulate tables as you would other objects.

The following table lists the various ways to manipulate a table as an object.

To Do the following

Split a selection horizontally Click Ta b l e ` Split into rows, and then

type a value in the Number of rows box.

Split a selection vertically Click Ta b l e ` Split into columns, and then

type a value in the Number of columns

box.

You can For more information see

Resize a table "Transforming objects" on page 83

Rotate a table "Transforming objects" on page 83

Mirror a table "Transforming objects" on page 83

Lock a table "Locking objects" in the Help

Convert a table to a bitmap "Converting vector graphics to bitmaps" on

page 219

Break a table apart "To convert objects to curve objects" on

page 108

CorelDRAW: Working with tables 183

Adding images, graphics, and backgrounds to tables

If you need to arrange bitmap images or vector graphics in an orderly way, you can add

them to tables. You can also change the look of a table by adding a background color.

To insert an image or a graphic in a table cell

1Copy an image or a graphic.

2Click the Ta b l e tool, and select the cell where you want to insert the image or

graphic.

3Click Edit ` Paste .

You can also insert a graphic or an image by holding down the right mouse

button over the image, dragging the imag e to a cell, releasing the right mouse

button, and then clicking Place inside cell.

To add a background color to a table

1Click the Ta b l e tool , and then click the table.

2Click the Background color picker, and then click a color on the color palette.

You can also modify the background color of specific cells, rows, or columns by

selecting the cells, clicking the Background color picker on the property bar,

and then clicking a color on the color palette.

Importing tables in a drawing

With CorelDRAW, you can create tables by importing content from Quattro Pr

(.qpw) and Microsoft® Excel® (.xls) spreadsheets. You can also import tables created

in a word-processing application, such as a WordPerfect or Microsoft Word.

To import a table from Quattro Pro or Excel

1Click File ` Import.

2Choose the drive and folder where the spreadsheet is stored.

3Click the file to select it.

4Click Import.

184 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

The Import/Paste dialog box appears.

5From the Import as list box, choose Ta b l e .

6Choose one of the following options:

Maintain fonts and formatting — imports all fonts and formatting that are

applied to the text

Maintain formatting only — imports all formatting that is applied to the text

Discards fonts and formatting — ignores all fonts and formatting that are

applied to the text

To import a table from a word-processing document

1Click File ` Import.

2Choose the drive and folder where the text file is stored.

3Click the file.

4Click Import.

5Choose Ta b l e s from the Import tables as list box.

6Choose one of the following options:

Maintain fonts and formatting — imports all fonts and formatting that are

applied to the text

Maintain formatting only — imports all formatting that is applied to the text

Discards fonts and formatting — ignores all fonts and formatting that are

applied to the text

CorelDRAW: Working with layers 185

Working with layers

You can work with layers to help you organize and arrange objects in complex

illustrations.

In this section, you'll learn about

•creating layers

changing layer properties

moving and copying objects between layers

Creating layers

All CorelDRAW drawings consist of stacked objects. The vertical order of these

objects — the stacking order — contributes to the appearance of the drawing. An

effective way to organize these objects is by using invisible planes called layers.

Layering gives you added flexibility when you organize and edit the objects in complex

drawings. You can divide a drawing into multiple layers, each containing a portion of

the drawing's contents. For example, you can use layers to organize an architectural

plan for a building. You can organize the building's various components (for example,

plumbing, electrical, structural) by placing them on separate layers.

Local layers and master layers

By default, all content is placed on a layer. Content that applies to a specific page is

placed on a local layer. Content that applies to all pages in a document can be placed on

a global layer called a master layer. Master layers are stored on a virtual page called the

Master Page.

186 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

The Object manager docker displays the default layer structure.

Each new file is created with a default page (Page 1) and a Master Page. The default

page contains a Guides layer and Layer 1. The Guides layer stores page-specific (local)

guidelines. Layer 1 is the default local layer. When you draw objects on the page, the

objects are added to this layer unless you choose a different layer.

The Master Page is a virtual page that contains the information that applies to all pages

in a document. You can add one or more layers to a master page to hold content such

as headers, footers, or a static background. By default, a master page contains the

following layers:

Guides — contains the guidelines that are used for all pages of the document.

Desktop — contains objects that are outside the borders of the drawing page. This

layer lets you store objects that you may want to include in the drawing at a later

time.

Grid — contains the grid that is used for all pages of the document. The grid is

always the bottom layer.

The default layers on the master page cannot be deleted or copied. Layers that you add

to the master page appear at the top of the stacking order unless the stacking order is

changed in the Layer manager view in the Object manager docker.

To add content to a layer, you must first sele ct the layer so that it becomes the active

layer.

Viewing layers, pages, and objects

You can choose from different views that let you display pages, layers, or all the objects

in your document. The view you choose depends on the complexity of your document

and the task you are performing. For example, in a long multipage document, you can

choose a pages-only view so that you can navigate more easily and view only one page

at a time. The Layer manager view lets you view and reorder all the layers that affect

the current page, including the master layers.

CorelDRAW: Working with layers 187

For information about how facing page views affect layers, see "To view facing pages"

in the Help.

For information about how layers are affected when you save a file to an earlier version

of CorelDRAW, see "To save a drawing" on page 48.

To create a layer

1Click To o l s ` Object manager .

2Perform a task from the following table.

To use a layer in the drawing, you must first make the layer active by clicking

the layer name in the Object manager docker. The layer name appears in a

red bold font to indicate that it is the active layer. When you start a drawing,

the default layer (Layer 1) is the active layer.

Master layers are always added to the master page. Content added to these

layers is visible on all pages of the document.

You can make any layer a master layer by right-clicking the layer name, and

clicking Master .

To make a layer active

1Click To o l s ` Object manager .

2In the Object manager docker, click the layer name.

The layer name appears in a red bold font to indicate that it is the active layer.

By default, the active layer is Layer 1.

To Do the following

Create a layer In the top right corner of the Object

manager docker, click the flyout button ,

and click New layer .

Create a master layer Click the flyout button, and click New

master layer .

188 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

The name of the active layer, as well as the currently selected object, appears

in the status bar at the bottom of the application window.

To display pages, layers, and objects in the Object Manager docker

1Click To o l s ` Object manager .

2Perform a task from the following table.

The name of the active layer, as well as the currently selected object, appears

in the status bar at the bottom of the application window.

To delete a layer

1Click To o l s ` Object manager .

2Click the name of a layer.

3Click the flyout button , and click Delete layer .

When you delete a layer, you also delete all the objects on it. To preserve an

object, move it to a different layer before you delete the current layer.

You can delete any unlocked layer except the following default layers: Grid ,

Desktop, and Guides.

To Do the following

Display pages Click the flyout button , and then click

Show pages.

Display all layers for a page Click the name of a page and click the Layer

manager view button .

To turn the Layer manager view off, click

the button again.

Display objects Click the flyout button , and then click

Expand to show selection.

CorelDRAW: Working with layers 189

Changing layer properties

For each new layer that you create, the display, editing, and printing and exporting

properties are enabled by default. You can change these properties at any time. You can

also enable or disable the master layer setti ng for a layer. For information about master

layers, see "Creating layers" on page 185.

The icons to the left of a layer's name let you change the layer's properties.

Showing and hiding layers

You can choose to show or hide layers in a drawing. Hiding a layer lets you identify and

edit the objects on other layers. It also reduces the time required for your drawing to

refresh when you edit it.

Printing and exporting layers

You can set printing and exporting properties for a layer to control whether a layer is

displayed in the printed or exported drawing. Note that hidden layers are displayed in

the final output if the printing and export ing properties are enabled. The Grid layer

cannot be printed or exported.

Setting a layer's editing properties

You can allow editing of the objects on all layers or restrict editing so that you can only

edit objects on the active layer. You can also lock a layer to prevent accidental changes

to its objects. When you lock a layer, you cannot select or edit its objects.

Renaming layers

You can rename layers to indicate their contents, their position in the stacking order, or

their relationship with other layers.

Displays or hides the

layer

Enables or disables

printing and exporting

for a layer

Makes a layer editable

or locks it to prevent

changes

190 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Using layer color to view objects

You can change the layer color so that objects on the layer are displayed with the layer

color when you use Wireframe view. For example, if you place various components of an

architectural plan (plumbing, electrical, structural) on separate layers, you can use layer

color to quickly identify to which component the objects belong. For more information

about Wireframe view, see "Choosing viewing modes" in the Help.

To show or hide a layer

1Click To o l s ` Object manager .

2Click the Show or hide icon beside the layer name.

The layer is hidden when the Show or hide icon is grayed.

Objects on a hidden layer are displayed in the printed or exported drawing

unless the layer's printing and exporting properties are disabled.

To enable or disable printing and exporting of a layer

1Click To o l s ` Object manager .

2Click the Enable or disable printing and exporting icon beside the layer

name.

Disabling the printing and exporting of a layer prevents its contents from

appearing in the printed or exported drawing, or in full-screen previews.

To set the editing properties of a layer

1Click To o l s ` Object manager .

2In the Object manager docker, click the name of the layer that you want to edit.

The layer name appears in a red bold font to indicate that it is the active layer.

3Perform a task from the following table.

To Do the following

Lock or unlock a layer Click the Lock or unlock icon beside the

layer name.

CorelDRAW: Working with layers 191

If you disable the Edit across layers button , you can work only on the

active layer and the Desktop layer. You cannot select or edit objects on inactive

layers. For example, if you use the Pick tool to marquee-select multiple objects

on the drawing page, only the objects on the active layer are selected.

You cannot lock or unlock the Grid layer.

To rename a layer

1Click To o l s ` Object manager .

2Right-click the layer name, and click Rename.

Layer names are not preserved when you save a

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 file to a previous version.

To change the layer color

•In the Object manager docker, double-click the color swatch that appears to the

left of the layer name, and choose a color.

Objects on the layer are displayed with the layer color when you use Wireframe

view (View ` Wireframe ).

You can also choose to display only the objects on a specific layer in Wireframe

view by right-clicking the layer name, choosing Properties , and enabling the

Override full color view check box in the layer properties dialog box.

Allow editing on all layers Click the flyout button , and click Edit

across layers.

Allow editing on the active layer only Click the flyout button , and disable Edit

across layers.

To Do the following

192 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Moving and copying layers and objects

You can move or copy layers on a single page or between pages. You can also move or

copy selected objects to new layers, including layers on the master page.

Moving and copying layers affects the stacking order. Moving or copying an object to a

layer below its current layer causes the object to become the top object on its new layer.

Similarly, moving or copying an object to a layer above its current layer causes the object

to become the bottom object on its new layer.

To move a layer

1Click To o l s ` Object manager .

2In the layers list, drag a la yer name to a new position.

By default, the master layers are applied above local layers. You can change the

order of the master layers relative to local layers by clicking a page name,

enabling the Layer manager view button at the top of the Object manager

docker, and dragging a layer name to a new position in the layers list.

To copy a layer

1Click To o l s ` Object manager .

2In the layers list, right-click the layer that you want to copy.

3From the context-menu, choose Copy.

4Right-click the layer above which you want to place the copied layer.

5From the context menu, choose Paste .

The layer and the objects it contains are pasted above the selected layer.

CorelDRAW: Working with layers 193

To move or copy an object to another layer

1Click an object in the Object manager docker.

2Click the flyout button , and click one of the following:

• Move to layer

• Copy to layer

3Click the destination layer.

When you move objects to or from a layer, the layer must be unlocked.

Need more information?

For more information about working with layers, see "Working with layers" in

the "Objects, symbols, and layers" section of the Help.

CorelDRAW: Adding and formatting text 195

Adding and formatting text

CorelDRAW lets you use text to create docu ments or annotate drawings. Text is also

known as "type."

In this section, you'll learn about

adding and selecting text

changing the appearance of text

finding, editing, and converting text

aligning and spacing text

shifting and rotating text

•moving text

fitting text to a path

formatting paragraph text

combining and linking paragraph text frames

wrapping paragraph text around objects and text

inserting formatting codes

Adding and selecting text

You can add two types of text to drawings — artistic text and paragraph text. You can

add short lines of artistic text and then apply a wide range of effects, such as drop

shadows or a contour to the text. Paragraph text, also known as "block text," can be

used for larger bodies of text that have greater formatting requirements. You can add

both paragraph and artistic text directly in the drawing window.

You can add artistic text along an open or closed path. You can also fit existing artistic

and paragraph text to a path. For more information, see "Fitting text to a path" on

page 208.

When adding paragraph text, you must first create a text frame. By default, paragraph

text frames remain the same size regardless of how much text they contain. Any text

196 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

that continues past the lower-right border of the text frame is hidden until you either

enlarge the text frame or link it to another text frame. You can fit text to a frame, which

automatically adjusts the point size of text so that the text fits perfectly in the frame.

For information about fitting text to a frame, see "To fit text to a paragraph text frame"

on page 212. You can also have paragraph text frames automatically expand and shrink

while you type, so that the text fits perfectly in the frame.

By inserting a paragraph text frame inside a graphic object, you can use objects as

containers for text and expand the number of different shapes that you can use as text

frames. You can also separate text from an object. When you do, the text retains its

shape, and you can move or modify the text and the object independently.

Paragraph text placed inside an object. The object is made invisible by

removing its outline.

When you import or paste text, you have the option of maintaining formatting,

maintaining fonts and formatting, or discarding fonts and formatting. Maintaining

fonts ensures that imported and pasted text retains its original font type. Maintaining

formatting ensures that formatting informatio n, such as bullets, columns, and bold or

italic formatting, is preserved. You can also preserve the text color or choose to import

black text as CMYK black. If you choose to discard fonts and formatting, the imported

or pasted text takes on the properties of the selected text object, or if none is selected,

the default font and formatting properties. For more information about importing files,

see "Importing files" on page 271.

You can also assign hyperlinks to text. For more information, see "To assign a hyperlink

to text" in the Help.

To modify text, you must first select it. You can select entire text objects or only specific

characters.

CorelDRAW: Adding and formatting text 197

To add artistic text

•Using the Te x t tool , click anywhere in the drawing window, and type.

To add paragraph text

Only new text frames are affected when you enable the Expand and shrink

paragraph text frames to fit text check box on the Paragraph page of the

Options dialog box. Existing paragraph text frames remain fixed in size.

You can use the Pick tool to adjust the size of a paragraph text frame. Click

the text frame, and drag any selection handle.

To set options when importing or pasting text

1Copy or cut text.

If you want to import text, click File ` Import , and browse to the text file you

want to import.

2Click Edit ` Paste .

To Do the following

Add paragraph text Click the Te x t tool . Drag in the drawing

window to size the paragraph text frame,

and type.

Add paragraph text inside an object Click the Te x t tool. Move the pointer over

the object's outline, and click the object

when the pointer changes to an Insert in

object pointer. Type inside the frame.

Separate a paragraph text frame from an

object

Click the Pick tool , select the object, and

click Arrange ` Break paragraph text

inside a path apart.

Have paragraph text frames automatically

adjust to fit text

Click To o l s ` Options . In the list of

categories, double-click Te x t , and click

Paragraph . Enable the Expand and shrink

paragraph text frames to fit text check

box.

198 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

3In the Importing/Pasting text dialog box, enable one of the following options:

• Maintain fonts and formatting

• Maintain formatting only

• Discard fonts and formatting

If you want to apply CMYK black to the imported black text, enable the Force

CMYK black check box. This check box is available when you choose an option

that maintains text formatting.

Clicking Cancel cancels the import or paste operation.

If you choose to maintain fonts, and a required font is not installed on your

computer, the PANOSE font matching system substitutes the font for you.

To select text

You can use the Pick tool to select multiple text objects. Hold down Shift , and

click each text object.

Changing the appearance of text

You can change the default text style, so that all new artistic or paragraph text you

create has the same properties. You can enhance artistic text and paragraph text by

modifying their character properties. For example, you can change the font type and size

or make the text bold or italic. You can also change the position of text to subscript or

superscript, which is useful if a drawing contains scientific notation. You can add

underlines, strikethrough lines, and overlines to text. You can change the thickness of

these lines, as well as the distance between the lines and the text. You can also change

the color of text. For information about previewing fonts, see "Previewing and

identifying fonts" in the Help.

You can change the case of text to lowercase or uppercase without deleting or replacing

letters. You can increase or decrease font size by a specified increment amount. By

default, the unit of measure is points. You can change this setting for the active drawing

To Do the following

Select an entire text object Using the Pick tool , click the text object.

Select specific characters Using the Te x t tool , drag across the text.

CorelDRAW: Adding and formatting text 199

and all subsequent drawings you create. When you change the unit of measure, all font

settings are displayed in the new unit of measure.

"Greeking"text lets you increase the redraw speed by representing text under a certain

size with lines. This is useful when showing prototypes of documents or drawings. You

can make text readable again by reducing the greeking value or by zooming in on the

text.

To change the default text style

1Using the Pick tool , click a blank space in the drawing window.

2In the Character formatting docker, specify the properties you want.

If the Character formatting docker isn't open, click Te x t ` Character

formatting.

Following each property change you make, by default you must specify whether

the changes are applied to artistic text, paragraph text, or both.

To have changes to the default text st yle apply to future documents, click

To o l s ` Save settings as default.

You can make the style of an existing text frame or object the default style by

clicking Tools ` Graphic and text styles, and dragging the text frame or

object over either the Default artistic text or the Default paragraph text

icon on the Graphic and text docker.

To change character properties

1Select the text.

2In the Character formatting docker, specify the character attributes you want.

If the Character formatting docker isn't open, click Te x t ` Character

formatting.

You can also make selected text bold, italic, or underlined by clicking the Bold

button , Italic button , or Underline button on the property bar.

200 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To change the text color

1Select the text by using the Te x t tool .

2Click a color on the color palette.

You can change the color of an entire text object by selecting it with the Pick

tool and dragging a color swatch from the color palette to the text object.

To resize text

Finding, editing, and converting text

You can find text in a drawing and replace it automatically. You can also find special

characters, such as an em dash or optional hyphen. You can edit text directly in the

drawing window or in a dialog box.

CorelDRAW lets you convert artistic text to paragraph text if you require more

formatting options, and paragraph text to artistic text if you'd like to apply special

effects.

You can also convert both paragraph and artistic text to curves. This transforms

characters into single line and curve objects, letting you add, delete, or move the nodes

of individual characters to alter their shape. For more in formation, see "Using curve

To Do the following

Increase the size of text Press Num lock, select the text by using the

Te x t tool , hold down Ctrl, and press 8 on

the number pad.

Decrease the size of text Press Num lock, select the text by using the

Te x t tool, hold down Ctrl, and press 2 on

the number pad.

Specify the amount by which to resize text Click To o l s ` Options . In the list of

categories, click Te x t , and type a value in the

Keyboard text increment box.

Change the default unit of measure Click To o l s ` Options. In the Wor ksp a ce

list of categories, click Te x t , and choose a

unit from the Default text units list box.

CorelDRAW: Adding and formatting text 201

objects" on page 107. When you convert text to curves, the appearance of the text is

preserved, including font, style, character position and rotation, spacing, and any other

text settings and effects. Any linked text objects are also converted to curves. If you

convert paragraph text in a fixed-sized fram e to curves, any text that overflows the

frame is deleted. For information about fitting text to a frame, see "Formatting

paragraph text" on page 211.

To find text

1Click Edit ` Find and replace ` Find text.

2Type the text you want to find in the Find box.

If you want to find the exact case of the text you specified, enable the Match case

check box.

3Click Find next.

You can also find special characters by clicking the right arrowhead next to the

Find box, choosing a special character, and clicking Find next.

To find and replace text

1Click Edit ` Find and replace ` Replace text.

2Type the text you want to find in the Find box.

If you want to find the exact case of the text you specified, enable the Match case

check box.

3Type the replacement text in the Replace with box.

4Click one of the following buttons:

Find next — finds the next occurrence of the text specified in the Find what

box

Replace — replaces the selected occurrence of the text specified in the Find

what box. If no occurrence is selected, Replace finds the next occurrence.

Replace all — replaces every occurrence of the text specified in the Find what

box

To edit text

1Select the text.

2Click Te x t ` Edit text.

202 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

3Make changes to the text in the Edit text dialog box.

You cannot edit text that has been converted to curves.

You can also edit text in the drawing window by selecting the text with the

Text tool and then editing the text.

To convert text

You cannot convert paragraph text to artistic text when the paragraph text is

linked to another frame, has special effects applied to it, or overflows its frame.

You can also use the Pick tool to convert text to curves. Right-click the text,

and click Convert to curves .

Aligning and spacing text

You can align both paragraph text and artistic text horizontally. Aligning paragraph

text positions the text in relation to the pa ragraph text frame. You can horizontally align

all paragraphs, or only selected paragraphs, in a paragraph text frame. You can vertically

align all paragraphs in a paragraph text frame. You can also align text to another object.

To Do the following

Convert paragraph text to artistic text Select the text by using the Pick tool ,

and click Te x t ` Convert to artistic text.

Convert artistic text to paragraph text Select the text by using the Pick tool, and

click Te x t ` Convert to paragraph text.

Convert artistic or paragraph text to curves Select the text by using the Pick tool, and

click Arrange ` Convert to curves .

CorelDRAW: Adding and formatting text 203

You can align a text object to other objects by using the first line baseline, the

last line baseline, or the edge of the text bounding box.

Artistic text can be aligned horizontally, but not vertically. When you align artistic text,

the entire text object is aligned in relation to the bounding box. If characters have not

been shifted horizontally, applying no alignment produces the same result as applying

left alignment.

Artistic text is aligned within the bounding box, which is indicated by eight

selection handles (black squares). The text at the top is left-aligned; the text

at the bottom is right-aligned.

204 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

You can change character spacing and word spacing in selected paragraphs, or in an

entire paragraph text frame or artistic text object. Changing the space between pairs of

characters is also known as "kerning," and changing the spacing between characters in

a group of characters or an entire block of text is also known as "tracking." You can

change the spacing between lines of text, which is also known as "leading." Changing

the leading for artistic text applies the spacing to lines of text separated by a carriage

return. For paragraph text, leading applies only to lines of text within the same

paragraph. You can also change the spacing before and after paragraphs in paragraph

text, and you can kern selected characters. Kerning balances the optical space between

letters.

To align text horizontally

1Select the text object by using the Pick tool .

2In the Alignment area of the Paragraph formatting docker, choose an alignment

option from the Horizontal list box.

If the Paragraph formatting docker isn't open, click Te x t ` Paragraph

formatting.

You can also align text horizontally by clicking the Horizontal alignment

button on the property bar and choosing an alignment style from the list

box. The property bar displays the alignment icon that corresponds to the

current alignment style.

To align selected paragraphs in a paragraph text frame, use the Te x t tool to

select the paragraphs.

To align paragraph text vertically in a text frame

1Select the paragraph text.

2In the Alignment area of the Paragraph formatting docker, choose an alignment

option from the Vertical list box.

If the Paragraph formatting docker isn't open, click Te x t ` Paragraph

formatting.

To align text with an object

1Hold down Shift, select the text, and then select the object.

2Click Arrange ` Align and distribute ` Align and distribute.

CorelDRAW: Adding and formatting text 205

3Choose one of the following from the For text source objects use list box:

First line baseline aligns the text with the baseline of the first line of text

Last line baseline aligns the text with the baseline of the last line of text

Bounding box aligns the text with its bounding box

4Enable one of the following horizontal alignment check boxes:

• Left

• Right

• Center

5Enable one of the following vertical alignment check boxes:

• Top

• Bottom

• Center

6Click Apply .

The object used to align the left, right, top, or bottom edges is determined by

the order of creation or order of selection. If you marquee select the objects

before you align them, the last object created will be used. If you select the

objects one at a time the last object selected will be the reference point for

aligning the others. If you've applied a linear transformation, such as rotation,

to the text and are aligning with a baseline, the objects align with the baseline

point of the starting edge of the text object.

You can also align objects by selecting them and clicking the Align and

distribute button on the property bar.

To change the text spacing

1Select the text.

If the Paragraph formatting docker is not open, click Te x t ` Paragraph

formatting.

2Click the Spacing roll-down arrow in the Paragraph formatting docker, type

values in any of the boxes.

Character and word spacing can be applied only to entire paragraphs, or to an

entire paragraph text frame or artistic text object.

206 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Values represent a percentage of the space character. The Character values

range from -100 to 2000 percent. All other values range from 0 to 2000

percent.

You can also use the Shape tool to change the spacing between words and

characters proportionately. Select the text object, and drag the Interactive

horizontal spacing arrow in the lower-right corner of the text object. Drag

the Interactive vertical spacing arrow in the lower-left corner of the text

object to change the line spacing proportionately.

To kern text

1Select the characters by using the Te x t tool .

If the Character formatting docker isn't open, click Te x t ` Character

formatting.

2In the Character formatting docker, type a value in the Range kerning box.

Shifting and rotating text

Shifting artistic and paragraph text vertically and horizontally can create an interesting

effect. You can also rotate characters. You can also mirror artistic and paragraph text.

Rotated characters

CorelDRAW: Adding and formatting text 207

To shift or rotate a character

1Select the character or characters by using the Te x t tool .

2Click the Character shift roll-down arrow in the Character formatting docker,

type a value in one of the following boxes:

Angle — A positive number rotates characters counterclockwise, and a negative

number rotates characters clockwise.

Horizontal shift — A positive number moves characters to the right, and a

negative number moves characters to the left.

Vertical shift — A positive number moves characters up, and a negative number

moves characters down.

If the Character formatting docker isn't open, click Te x t ` Character

formatting.

You can also use the Shape tool to shift or rota te characters. Select the

character node or nodes, and then type values in the Horizontal shift box ,

Vertical sh ift box , or Angle of rotation box on the property bar.

To mirror text

1Using the Te x t tool , select the artistic text or the paragraph text frame.

2On the property bar, click one of the following buttons:

Mirror horizontally — flips the text characters from left to right

Mirror vertically — flips the text characters from top to bottom

You can also mirror text fitted to a path. For more information, see "To mirror

text fitted to a path" on page 211.

Left to right: Original text, the text mirrored vertically, and the text mirrored

horizontally

208 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Moving text

CorelDRAW lets you move paragraph text between frames, and artistic text between

artistic text objects. You can also move paragraph text to an artistic text object, and

artistic text to a paragraph text frame.

To move text

1Select the text by using the Te x t tool .

2Drag the text to another paragraph text frame or artistic text object.

Fitting text to a path

You can add artistic text along the path of an open object (for example, a line) or a closed

object (for example, a square). You can also fit existing text to a path. Artistic text can

be fitted to an open or clos ed path. Paragraph text can be fitted to open paths only.

After you fit text to a path, you can adjust the text's position relative to that path. For

example, you can mirror the text horizontally , vertically, or both. Using tick spacing,

you can specify an exact distance between the text and the path.

CorelDRAW treats text fitted to a path as one object; however, you can separate the

text from the object if you no longer want it to be part of the path. When you separate

text from a curved or closed path, the text retains the shape of the object to which it was

fitted.

You can also

Move text within the same frame or object Select the text, and drag it to a new position.

Move or copy selected text to a new text

object

Right-click, drag the text to a new position,

and click Copy here or Move here .

CorelDRAW: Adding and formatting text 209

Text and curve as separate objects (top left); choosing a path with Fit Text to

Path tool (top middle); aligning the text while fitting it to the path (top

right); text fitted to path (bottom left); interactive feedback while setting offset

distance (bottom middle); and stretching the text and the curve by 200%

horizontally (bottom right).

To add text along a path

1Select a path by using the Pick tool .

2Click Te x t ` Fit text to path.

The text cursor is inserted on the path. If the path is open, the text cursor is

inserted at the beginning of the path. If the path is closed, the text cursor is

inserted at the center of the path.

3Type along the path.

You can't add text to the path of another text object.

You can also fit text to a path by clicking the Te x t tool and pointing to a

path. When the pointer changes to a Fit to path pointer, click where you want

the text to begin, and type.

To fit text to a path

1Select a text object by using the Pick tool .

2Click Te x t ` Fit text to path.

The pointer changes to the Fit text to path pointer . By moving the pointer over

the path, you can preview where the text will be fitted.

210 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

3Click a path.

If the text is fitted to a closed path, the text is centered along the path. If the text is

fitted to an open path, the text flows from the point of insertion.

Artistic text can be fitted to open or closed paths. Paragraph text can be fitted

to open paths only.

You can't fit text to the path of another text object.

To adjust the position of text fitted to a path

1Using the Pick tool , select the text fitted to a path.

2Choose a setting from any of the following list boxes on the property bar:

Te x t o r i e n t a t i o n — the angle at which the text sits on the path

Distance from path — the distance between the text and the path

Horizontal offset — the horizontal position of the text along the path

You can also change the horizontal position of fitted text by selecting it with

the Shape tool and dragging the character nodes you want to reposition.

Using the Pick tool, you can move text along or off the path by dragging the

red glyph that appears next to the text. When you drag the glyph along the

path, a preview of the text is displayed. If you drag the glyph off the path, the

distance between the text preview and the path is displayed.

You can also

Use tick spacing to increase the distance

between the path and the text in specified

increments

Select the text. On the property bar, click

Tick snapping, enable the Tick snapping

on option, and type a value in the Tick

spacing box.

When you move the text from the path, it

moves in the increment you specified in the

Tick spacing box. When you move the text,

the distance from the path is displayed below

the original text.

CorelDRAW: Adding and formatting text 211

To mirror text fitted to a path

1Using the Pick tool , click the text fitted to a path.

2In Mirror text area of the property bar, click one of the following buttons:

Mirror horizontally — flips the text characters from left to right

Mirror vertically — flips the text characters upside down

You can apply a 180-degree rotation to text fitted to a path by clicking both

the Mirror horizontally and the Mirror vertically buttons.

You can also mirror artistic text and paragraph text frames. For more

information, see "To mirror text" on page 207.

To separate text from a path

1Select the path and the fitted text by using the Pick tool .

2Click Arrange ` Break text apart.

Formatting paragraph text

CorelDRAW offers various formatting options for paragraph text. For example, you can

fit text to a paragraph text frame. Fitting text to a frame increases or decreases the point

size of text so that it fits the text frame exactly. You can also use columns to lay out text-

intensive projects, such as newsletters, magazines, and newspapers. You can create

columns of equal or varying widths and gutters.

Applying drop caps to paragraphs enlarges th e initial letter and insets it into the body

of text. You can customize a drop cap by ch anging its settings. For example, you can

change the distance between the drop cap and the body of text, or specify the number

of lines of text you want to appear next to the drop cap. You can remove the drop cap

at any point, without deleting the letter.

You can use bulleted lists to format information. You can have text wrap around bullets,

or you can offset a bullet from text to create a hanging indent. CorelDRAW lets you

customize bullets by changing their size, position, and distance from text. After you add

a bullet, you can remove it without deleting the text.

You can add tab stops to indent paragraph text, remove tab stops, and change the

alignment of tab stops. You can also set tab st ops with trailing leader characters, so that

dots automatically precede the tab stops.

212 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

When adding drop caps, bullets, tab stops, and columns, you can save time by

previewing all the changes you make before committing to them. When you preview

the changes, they are temporarily applied directly to the text in the drawing window.

You can see exactly how the new settings would affect your drawing if they were

applied.

Indenting changes the space between a paragraph text frame and the text that it

contains. You can indent an entire paragraph, the first line of a paragraph, all but the

first line of a paragraph (a hanging indent), or from the right side of the frame. You can

also remove an indent without deleting or retyping text.

You can change the formatting of selected paragraph text frames, or of selected frames

plus the frames with which they are currently linked. For information about setting

these options, see "To choose formatting options for paragraph text frames" in the Help.

To fit text to a paragraph text frame

1Select a paragraph text frame.

2Click Te x t ` Paragraph text frame ` Fit text to frame.

If you fit text to linked paragraph text frames, the application adjusts the size

of text in all the linked text frames.

To add columns to paragraph text frames

1Select a paragraph text frame.

2Click Te x t ` Columns.

If you want to see how the columns will appear when they are applied to the text,

enable the Preview check box.

3Type a value in the Number of columns box.

4Specify the settings and options you want.

You can change the size of columns and gutters by using the Te x t tool to

drag a side selection handle in the drawing window.

To add a drop cap

1Select the paragraph text.

CorelDRAW: Adding and formatting text 213

2Click Te x t ` Drop cap.

If you want to see how the drop cap will appear when it is applied to the text,

enable the Preview check box.

3Enable the Use drop cap check box.

You can add a drop cap (left) or a hanging indent drop cap (right).

Combining and linking paragraph text frames

You can combine paragraph text frames. You can also break paragraph text frames apart

into subcomponents — columns, paragraphs, bullets, lines, words, and characters.

Every time you break apart a text frame, the subcomponents are placed into separate

paragraph text frames.

You can also

Specify the number of lines next to a drop

cap

Type a value in the Number of lines

dropped box.

Specify the distance between the drop cap

and the body of text

Type a value in the Space after drop cap

box.

Remove drop caps Disable the Use drop cap check box.

Offset the drop cap from the body of text Enable the Use hanging indent style for

drop cap check box.

214 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Linking paragraph text frames directs the flow of text from one text frame to another if

the amount of text exceeds the size of the fi rst text frame. If you shrink or enlarge a

linked paragraph text frame, or change the size of the text, the amount of text in the

next text frame is automatically adjusted. Yo u can link paragraph text frames before or

after you type text.

You cannot link artistic text. However, you can link a paragraph text frame to an open

or closed object. When you link a paragraph te xt frame to an open object (for example,

a line), the text flows along the path of the line. Linking a text frame to a closed object

(for example, a rectangle) inserts a paragraph text frame and directs the flow of text

inside the object. If text exceeds the open or closed path, you can link the text to another

text frame or object. You can also link to paragraph text frames and objects across pages.

After linking paragraph text frames, you can redirect the flow from one object or text

frame to another. When you select the text frame or object, a blue arrow indicates the

direction of the text flow. You can hide or display these arrows.

You can make text flow between frames and objects by linking the text.

You can remove links between multiple paragraph text frames, and between paragraph

text frames and objects. When you have only two linked paragraph text frames and you

remove the link, the text flows into the re maining paragraph text frame. Removing a

link between paragraph text frames with a series of links redirects the flow of text into

the next paragraph text frame or object.

By default, CorelDRAW applies paragraph formatting, such as columns, drop caps, and

bullets, to the selected paragraph text frames only; however, you can change your

settings so that formatting is applied to all linked frames, or to all selected and

subsequently linked frames. For example, if you apply columns to the text in one text

CorelDRAW: Adding and formatting text 215

frame, you can choose whether you also want to have all the linked frames formatted in

columns. For information about paragraph formatting, see "F ormatting paragraph

text" on page 211.

To combine or break apart paragraph text frames

1Select a text frame.

If you are combining text frames, hold down Shift, and select subsequent text

frames by using the Pick tool .

2Click Arrange , and click one of the following:

• Combine

• Break apart

Text frames with envelopes, text fitted to a path, and linked frames cannot be

combined.

If you select a text frame with columns first, the combined text frame will have

columns.

To link paragraph text frames and objects

1Select the starting text frame by using the Te x t tool .

2Click the Te x t f l o w tab at the bottom of the text frame or object.

If the frame cannot hold all the text, the tab contains an arrow .

3When the pointer changes to a Link to pointer , click the frame or object into

which you want to continue the text flow.

If the frame or object is on a different page, first click the corresponding Page tab

on the Document Navigator.

If a text frame is linked, the Te x t f l o w tab changes , and a blue arrow

indicates the direction of text flow. If the linked text is on another page, the

page number and a dashed blue line are displayed.

To link paragraph text frames successfully, the text frames cannot be

automatically sized. For information, see "Adding and selecting text" on

page 195.

216 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To change text flow to a different text frame or object

1Using the Pick tool , click the Te x t f l o w tab at the bottom of the text frame

or object for which you want to change a link.

2Select the new text frame or object into which you want the text flow to continue.

Wrapping paragraph text around objects and text

You can change the shape of text by wrapping paragraph text around an object, artistic

text, or a paragraph text frame. You can wrap text by using contour or square wrapping

styles. The contour wrapping styles follow the curve of the object. The square wrapping

styles follow the bounding box of the object. You can also adjust the amount of space

between paragraph text and the object or text, as well as remove any wrapping style

you apply.

Wrapping text around an object by usin g the contour wrapping style (left) and

the square wrapping style (right)

To wrap paragraph text around an object or text

1Select the object or text around which you want to wrap text.

2Click Window ` Dockers ` Properties .

3In the Object properties docker, click the General tab.

4Choose a wrapping style from the Wrap paragraph list box.

If you want to change the amount of space between wrapped text and the object or

text, change the value in the Text wrap offset box.

5Click the Te x t tool , and drag to create a paragraph text frame over the object or

text.

6Type text in the paragraph text frame.

CorelDRAW: Adding and formatting text 217

You can wrap existing paragraph text around a selected object by applying a

wrapping style to the object and dragging the paragraph text frame over the

object.

To remove a wrapping style

1Select the wrapped text or the object it wraps.

2Click Window ` Dockers ` Properties.

3 In the Object properties docker, click the General tab.

4Choose None from the Wrap paragraph list box.

Inserting formatting codes

You can insert formatting codes, such as em dashes and nonbreaking spaces. In some

programs, formatting codes are also known as "symbols." The following formatting

characters are available:

You can find and replace formatting codes.

To insert a formatting code

1Using the Te x t tool , click to place your cursor where you want to insert a

character or space.

2Click Te x t ` Insert formatting code , and choose a formatting code from the

menu.

The Insert formatting code menu is unavailable when the Te x t tool is not

active.

•em dash •en space •optional hyphen

en dash 1/4 em space nonbreaking space

em space nonbreaking hyphen column/frame break

•Tab

218 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

All shortcut keys for formatting codes are customizable. Formatting codes can

be found in the Te x t commands category.

You can insert characters not listed in the Insert formatting code menu by

clicking Te x t ` Insert symbol character and clicking the character you want

to insert in the Insert character docker.

Need more information?

For more information about working with text, see "Adding and formatting text"

in the "Text" section of the Help.

CorelDRAW: Working with bitmaps 219

Working with bitmaps

You can convert a vector graphic to a bitmap. Also, you can import and crop bitmaps

in CorelDRAW.

You can also add color masks, watermarks, special effects, and change the color and tone

of the images.

In this section, you'll learn about

converting vector graphics to bitmaps

cropping and editing bitmaps

straightening bitmaps

applying special effects to bitmaps

using the Image Adjustment Lab

editing bitmaps with Corel PHOTO-PAINT

Converting vector gr aphics to bitmaps

Converting a vector graphic or object to a bitmap lets you apply special effects to the

object with CorelDRAW. The process of converting a vector graphic to a bitmap is also

known as "rasterizing."

When you convert the vector graphic, you can select the color mode of the bitmap. A

color mode determines the number and kind of colors that make up the bitmap, so the

file size is also affected.

You can also specify settings for such controls as dithering, anti-aliasing, overprinting

black, background transparency, and color profile.

To convert a vector graphic to a bitmap

1Select an object.

2Click Bitmaps ` Convert to bitmap.

220 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

3Choose a resolution from the Resolution list box.

4Choose a color mode from the Color mode list box.

5Enable any of the following check boxes:

Dithered — simulates a greater number of colors than those available. This

option is available for images that use 256 or fewer colors.

Always overprint black — overprints black when black is the top color.

Enabling this option when you print bitmaps prevents gaps from appearing

between black objects and underlying objects

Apply ICC profile — applies the International Color Consortium profiles to

standardize colors across devices and color spaces

Anti-aliasing — smooths the edges of the bitmap

Tr a n s p a r e n t b a c k g r o u n d — makes the background of the bitmap transparent

Making the background of a bitmap transparent lets you see images or a

background otherwise obscured by the bitmap background.

Cropping and editing bitmaps

After you add a bitmap to a drawing, you can crop, resample, and resize the bitmap.

Cropping removes unwanted areas of a bitmap. To crop a bitmap into a rectangular

shape, you can use the Crop tool. For more information, see "To crop objects" on

page 121. To crop a bitmap into an irregular shape, you can use the Shape tool and the

Crop bitmap command.

When you resample a bitmap, you can change the image or the resolution, or both, by

adding or removing pixels. If you make an image larger without changing the

resolution, the image may lose detail because the pixels are spread over a greater area.

By resampling, you can add pixels to preserve more detail from the original image.

Resizing an image maintains the same number of pixels in a smaller or larger area.

Upsampling adds pixels to maintain some details from the original image.

CorelDRAW: Working with bitmaps 221

Resizing an image

To crop a bitmap

1In the toolbox, click the Shape tool .

2Select a bitmap.

3Drag the corner nodes to reshape the bitmap.

If you want to add a node, double-click the node boundary (dotted line) by using

the Shape tool where you want the node to appear.

4Click Bitmaps ` Crop bitmap.

You cannot crop a bitmap comprised of more than one object.

You can also crop a selected bitmap after you drag the corner nodes by clicking

the Crop bitmap button on the property bar.

To resample a bitmap

1Select a bitmap.

2Click Bitmaps ` Resample.

3In the Resolution area, type values in any of the following boxes:

• Horizontal

• Vertical

222 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

If you want to maintain the prop ortions of the bitmap, enable the Maintain aspect

ratio check box.

If you want to maintain the file size, enable the Maintain original size check box.

You can also resample a selected bitmap by clicking the Resample button

on the property bar.

Enable the Anti-alias check box to minimize the jagged appearance of curves.

To resize a bitmap

1Select a bitmap.

2Click Bitmaps ` Resample.

3Choose a unit of measure from the list box next to the Width and Height boxes.

4Type values in any of the following boxes:

• Width

• Height

If you want to minimize the jagged appearance of curves, enable the Anti-alias

check box.

You can maintain the proportions of the bitmap by enabling the Maintain

aspect ratio check box and typing a value in either the Width or Height box.

You can also resample the bitmap as a percentage of its original size by typing

values in the % boxes.

Straightening bitmaps

The Straighten image dialog box lets you straighten bitmap images quickly. This

feature is useful for straightening photos that were taken or scanned at an angle.

You can access the Straighten image dialog box by clicking Bitmaps ` Straighten

image. For detailed information about the Straighten image dialog box, see

"Straightening images" on page 304.

CorelDRAW: Working with bitmaps 223

Applying special effects to bitmaps

You can apply a wide range of special effects to bitmaps, such as three-dimensional (3D)

and artistic effects.

To apply a special effect

1Select a bitmap.

2Click Bitmaps , choose a special effect type, and click an effect.

3Adjust any special effect settings.

Using the Image Adjustment Lab

The Image Adjustment Lab lets you correct the color and tone of most photos quickly

and easily. You can access the Image Adjustment Lab by clicking Bitmaps ` Image

Adjustment Lab. For detailed information about the Image Adjustment Lab, see

"Using the Image Adjustment Lab" on page 319.

Editing bitmaps with Corel PHOTO-PAINT

You can access Corel PHOTO-PAINT, a complete image-editing program, from within

CorelDRAW. When you finish editing a bitmap, you can quickly resume your work

with CorelDRAW.

To send a bitmap to Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can click the Edit bitmap button on

the property bar, or you can use the Edit bitmap command from the Bitmaps menu.

You can also enable an option that lets you access Corel PHOTO-PAINT by double-

clicking a bitmap.

You can copy selected objects from Corel PHOTO-PAINT and then paste them into

your drawing. The selected objects are pasted as a group of bitmaps.

For more information about editing images with Corel PHOTO-PAINT, click Help `

Help topics from the Corel PHOTO-PAINT menu bar.

To edit a bitmap with Corel PHOTO-PAINT

1Using the Pick tool , select the bitmap that you want to edit.

2On the property bar, click Edit bitmap to start Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

224 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

The selected bitmap is displayed in the image window of Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

3Edit the bitmap.

4On the standard toolbar, click Finish editing to quit Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

The edited bitmap appears on the drawing page of CorelDRAW.

To access Corel PHOTO-PAINT by double-clicking a bitmap

1Click To o l s ` Options.

2In the Wo r ksp a c e list of categories, click Edit.

3On the Edit page, enable the Double-click to edit bitmaps check box.

Enabling this check box lets you access Corel PHOTO-PAINT by double-clicking

the bitmap in CorelDRAW.

Need more information?

For more information about working with bitmaps, see "Working with bitmaps"

in the "Bitmaps" section of the Help.

CorelDRAW: Tracing bitmaps and editing traced results 225

Tracing bitmaps and editing traced

results

CorelDRAW lets you trace bitmaps to convert them to fully editable and scalable

vector graphics. You can trace artwork, photos, scanned sketches, or logos and then

easily integrate them into your designs.

For information about the difference between vector graphics and bitmaps, see "Vector

graphics and bitmaps" on page 39.

In this section, you'll learn about

tracing bitmaps

•PowerTRACE controls

fine-tuning traced results

adjusting colors in traced results

setting default tracing options

tips for tracing bitmaps and editing traced results

Tracing bitmaps

You can trace a bitmap in one step by using the Quick Trace command. Alternatively,

you can choose a suitable tracing method and preset style and then use the

PowerTRACE controls to preview and adjust the traced results. CorelDRAW offers two

methods for tracing bitmaps: Centerline Trace and Outline Trace.

Choosing a tracing method

The Centerline Trace method uses unfilled closed and open curves (strokes) and is

suitable for tracing technical illustrations, maps, line drawings, and signatures. This

method is also referred to as "stroke tracing."

226 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

The Centerline Trace method was used to convert the original bitmap (top) into

a vector graphic (bottom).

The Outline Trace method uses curve objects wi th no outlines and is suitable for tracing

clipart, logos, and photo images. The Outline Tr ace method is also referred to as "fill"

or "contour tracing."

Choosing a preset style

A preset style is a collection of settings that are appropriate for the specific type of

bitmap you want to trace (for example, line art or a high-quality photo image). Each

tracing method comes with specific preset styles.

The Centerline Trace method offers two preset styles: one for technical illustrations and

another for line drawings.

The Outline Trace method offers the following preset styles that are suitable for line art,

logos, clipart, and photo images.

Technical illustration Line drawing

CorelDRAW: Tracing bitmaps and editing traced results 227

Adjusting traced results

You can adjust the traced results by using the controls in the PowerTRACE dialog box.

For more information, see "Fine-tuning traced results" on page 231 and "Adjusting

colors in traced results" on page 234.

To trace a bitmap by using Quick Trace

1Select a bitmap.

2Click Bitmaps ` Quick Trace.

Line art Logo

Detailed logo Clipart

Low-quality image

High-quality image

228 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

You can also trace a bitmap in one step by clicking the Trace bitmap flyout

button on the property bar and clicking Quick Trace .

You can change the settings that are used by Quick Trace. For more

information, see "Setting default tracing options" on page 238.

To trace a bitmap by using the Centerline Trace method

1Select a bitmap.

2Click Bitmaps ` Centerline trace , and click one of the following:

Technical illustration — to trace black-and-white illustrations with thin, faint

lines

Line drawing — to trace black-and-white sketches with thick, prominent lines

If necessary, adjust the traced results by using the controls of the PowerTRACE

dialog box.

You can also access PowerTRACE from the Trace bitmap flyout button on the

property bar.

To trace a bitmap by using the Outline Trace method

1Select a bitmap.

2Click Bitmaps ` Outline trace , and click one of the following:

Line art — lets you trace black-and-white sketches and illustrations

Logo — lets you trace simple logos with little detail and few colors

Detailed logo — lets you trace logos that contain fine detail and many colors

Clipart — lets you trace ready-to-use graphics that vary according to their

amount of detail and number of colors

Low quality image — lets you trace photos that lack fine detail (or that contain

fine detail that you want to ignore)

High quality image — lets you trace high-quality, highly detailed photos

If necessary, adjust the traced results by using the controls of the PowerTRACE

dialog box.

CorelDRAW: Tracing bitmaps and editing traced results 229

PowerTRACE controls

The PowerTRACE dialog box contains controls that help you preview and edit traced

results.

Circled numbers correspond to the numbers in the following table, which

describes the main controls of PowerTRACE.

Control Description

1. Preview window Lets you preview the traced result and

compare it to the source bitmap

230 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

2. Preview list box Lets you choose one of the following

previewing options:

Before and After — lets you display both

the source bitmap and the traced result

Large preview — lets you preview a

traced result in a single-pane preview

window

Wireframe overlay — lets you display a

wireframe (outline) view of the traced

result on top of the source bitmap

3. Transparency slider Controls visibility of the source bitmap

below the wireframe when the Wireframe

overlay option is selected

4. Zooming and panning tools Let you zoom in and out of an image

displayed in the preview window, pan an

image displayed at a zoom level higher than

100%, and fit an image to the preview

window.

5. Colors page Contains controls for modifying the colors of

the traced results. For more information, see

"Adjusting colors in traced results" on

page 234.

6. Tr a c e t y p e list box Lets you change the tracing method

7. Type of image list box Lets you choose a suitable preset style for the

image to be traced. The available preset

styles change, depending on the tracing

method you choose.

8. Undo and Redo buttons Let you undo and redo the last action you

performed

9. Reset button Lets you restore the first settings used to

trace the source bitmap

Control Description

CorelDRAW: Tracing bitmaps and editing traced results 231

Fine-tuning traced results

PowerTRACE lets you perform the following adjustments to fine-tune your trace

results.

Adjusting detail and smoothing

You can adjust the amount of detail in the traced result and smooth curved lines. When

you adjust detail, you change the number of objects in the traced result. If you used the

Outline Trace method to trace the bitmap, adjusting the traced result also changes the

number of colors. Smoothing changes the number of nodes in the traced result. You can

also control the appearance of corners in the traced result by setting the threshold for

corner smoothness.

10. Options button Lets you access the PowerTRACE options

page in the Options dialog box to set

default tracing options. For more

information, see "Setting default tracing

options" on page 238.

11. Settings page Contains controls for adjusting the traced

results. The Tr a c e d r e s u l t d e t a i l s area on

the Settings page lets you view the number

of objects, nodes, and colors in the traced

result while you are making adjustments.

For more information about adjusting traced

results, see "Fine-tuning traced results" on

page 231.

Control Description

232 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Outline tracing with a low detail value (left); outline tracing with a high

detail value (right)

Completing a trace

By default, the source bitmap is preserved after being traced, and objects in the traced

result are automatically grouped. You can have the source bitmap automatically deleted

after the trace is complete.

Removing and preserving the background

You can choose to remove or preserve the background in the traced result. With the

Outline Trace method, you can also specify the background color to be removed. If the

background color around the edges is removed but some background color still shows

through some areas of the image, you can remove the background from the entire

image.

Setting other Outline Trace options

By default, object areas that are hidden from view by overlapping objects are removed

from the traced result. You can choose to keep the underlying object areas. This feature

is useful for traced results that will be output to vinyl cutters and screen printers.

To reduce the number of objects in the traced result, you can combine adjacent objects

of the same color. You can also group objects of the same color so that you can

manipulate them more easily in CorelDRAW.

CorelDRAW: Tracing bitmaps and editing traced results 233

Undoing and redoing actions

You can adjust the settings in PowerTRACE and retrace a bitmap as many times as

necessary until you are satisfied with the result. If you make a mistake, you can undo or

redo an action, or you can revert to the first traced result.

To fine-tune traced results

1Select a bitmap.

2Do one of the following:

• Click Bitmaps ` Centerline trace, and click a command.

• Click Bitmaps ` Outline trace , and click a command.

3On the Settings page, move any of the following sliders:

Detail — lets you control the amount of original detail that is preserved in the

traced result. Higher values maintain more detail and result in a greater number

of objects and colors; lower values discard some detail and result in fewer objects.

Smoothing — lets you smooth curved lines and control the number of nodes in

the traced result. Higher values result in fewer nodes and produce curves that do

not closely follow the lines in the source bitmap. Lower values result in more

nodes and produce more accurate trace results.

Corner smoothness — This slider works in conjunction with the Smoothing

slider and lets you control the appearance of corners. Lower values maintain the

appearance of corners; higher values smooth corners.

You can also

Change the tracing method Choose a method from the Tr a c e t y p e list

box.

Change the preset style Choose a preset style from the Type of

image list box.

Keep the source bitmap after a trace In the Options area, disable the Delete

original image check box.

Discard or preserve the background in the

traced result

Enable or disable the Remove background

check box.

234 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Adjusting colors in traced results

When the source bitmap is traced, the application generates a color palette for the

traced result. The color palette uses the colo r mode of the source bitmap (for example,

RGB or CMYK). The number of colors on the color palette is determined by the

number of colors in the source bitmap and the selected preset style.

You can change the color mode of the traced result, and you can reduce the number of

colors in the traced result.

Specify the background color you want to

remove (Outline Trace)

Enable the Specify color option, click the

Eyedropper tool , and click a color in the

preview window. To specify an additional

background color to remove, hold down

Shift, and click a color in the preview

window.

The last specified color is displayed next to

the Eyedropper tool.

Remove a background color from the entire

image (Outline Trace)

Enable the Remove color from entire

image check box.

Keep object areas that are hidden by

overlapping objects (Outline Trace)

Disable the Remove object overlap check

box.

Group objects by color (Outline Trace) Enable the Group objects by color check

box.

This check box is avai lable only when the

Remove object overlap check box is

disabled.

Merge adjacent objects that have the same

color (Outline Trace)

Enable the Merge adjacent objects of the

same color check box.

Undo or redo an action Click the Undo or Redo button.

Revert to the first traced result Click Reset .

You can also

CorelDRAW: Tracing bitmaps and editing traced results 235

Traced graphic that contains 152 colors (left); traced graphic that contains 5

colors (right)

Sorting colors

To edit the color palette more easily, you can sort colors by similarity or frequency.

Sorting by similarity arranges the colors based on their hue and lightness. Colors of

similar hue and lightness appear close to each other on the color palette. Sorting by

frequency arranges the colors based on how much they are used in the traced results.

The colors that are used most appear at the top of the color palette.

Selecting colors

You can select a color by clicking it on the color palette of the traced result or by clicking

the color in the preview window. You can also select multiple colors.

Editing, merging, and deleting colors

When editing a color, you can choose a color from a color model that is different from

that of other colors on the palette. For example, if you are editing a color in an RGB

traced result, you can change the color to a spot color, creating a mixed color palette.

This feature is useful when you are preparing the traced result for commercial printing.

With the Outline Trace method, you can also merge and delete colors.

By default, when two or more colors are merged, their color values are averaged to

produce a new color. The merged colors are replaced by the new color. However, you

can change the default setting to replace the colors to be merged with the first color that

you selected. For information on how to change the default setting, see "Setting default

tracing options" on page 238.

236 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

When you delete a color from the color palette, the deleted color is replaced by the next

color on the color palette.

Using and creating color palettes

If you want the traced result to contain only colors from a specific color palette, you can

open that color palette in PowerTRACE. The colors of the traced result are replaced by

their closest match on the color palette.

After you edit the color palette of the traced graphic, you can save it to create a custom

color palette for later use.

To adjust the colors of a traced result

1Select a bitmap.

2Do one of the following:

• Click Bitmaps ` Centerline trace, and click a command.

• Click Bitmaps ` Outline trace , and click a command.

3Click the Colors tab, and perform any of the following tasks.

To Do the following

Change the color mode Choose a color mode from the Color mode

list box.

Reduce the number of colors in a traced

result (Outline Trace)

Type a value in the Number of colors box,

and click outside the box.

Select a color Do one of the following:

•Click a color on the color palette. The

selected color swatch button appears

pressed.

•Click the Eyedropper tool , and click a

color in the preview window. A marquee

appears around the selected color. To select

an additional color, hold down Shift, and

click a color in the preview window. To

deselect a color, hold down Ctrl, and click

a color.

Select a range of adjacent colors Hold down Shift , and click the first and last

color swatch in the range you are selecting

on the color palette.

CorelDRAW: Tracing bitmaps and editing traced results 237

The number of colors cannot be reduced, and colors cannot be merged, when

you use the Centerline Trace method.

To increase the number of colors in a traced result, you need to change the

preset style or increase the amount of detail. For information about how to

Select multiple nonadjacent colors Hold down Ctrl, and click the nonadjacent

color swatches on the color palette.

Edit a color Select the color you want to edit, click Edit ,

and modify settings in the Select color

dialog box.

Merge colors (Outline Trace) Select the colors that you want to merge,

and click Merge .

If you want to specify how to merge the

colors, click Options to access the Options

dialog box, and enable an option in the

Merge colors area.

Delete a color from a traced result (Outline

Tr a c e )

Select a color, and click the Delete color

button .

The deleted color is replaced by the next

color on the color palette.

Use a custom color palette Click the Open color palette button ,

find the folder where the palette is stored,

and click a filename.

Color palettes have a .cpl filename

extension.

Each color of the traced graphic is mapped

to a similar color on the custom palette.

Create a custom color palette from the

edited color palette of a traced result

Click the Save color palette button . In

the Save palette as dialog box, type a name

in the File name box.

To Do the following

238 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

change the preset style and the amount of detail, see "To fine-tune traced

results" on page 233.

Setting default tracing options

You can enable any of the following tracing options.

Quick Trace method — You can change the default Quick Trace settings to any

preset style, or to the most recently used settings.

Performance — This option determines how source bitmaps between 1 and 5

megapixels in size are handled, and how the quality of the traced results is affected.

The performance of PowerTRACE depends on the size and color depth of the

source bitmaps as well as on the available system memory. High-quality traced

results require high-quality source bitmaps, which are often quite large. The larger

the source bitmap, the more resources are required. Bitmaps that are too large need

to be downsampled before tracing, which may decrease the image quality. To trace

large bitmaps without sacrificing quality, you can set PowerTRACE to trace images

as large as 5 megapixels (provided RAM is sufficient). To achieve maximum

performance, you can set PowerTRACE to prompt you to downsample bitmaps

larger that 1 megapixel.

Merge colors — You can choose whether to merge colors in a traced result by

averaging their values or by replacing the colors to be merged with the first color

you select.

To set default tracing options

1Click To o l s ` Options.

2In the Wo r ksp a c e list of categories, click PowerTRACE .

3Perform any of the following tasks.

To Do the following

Choose a Quick Trace method From the Quick Trace method list box,

choose a preset style or the most recently

used settings.

CorelDRAW: Tracing bitmaps and editing traced results 239

Tips for tracing bitmaps and editing traced results

The following tips can help you achieve high-quality trace results.

Use high-quality source bitmaps. If dithering or JPEG compression was used in the

source bitmap, the bitmap may contain additional noise. For best traced results,

remove the noise before tracing the bitmap.

Avoid applying anti-aliasing to the source bitmap.

For best results when you use the Center line Trace method, convert the bitmap to

the black-and-white color mode before tracing. Note that in this case you cannot

adjust detail.

When tracing technical illustrations and sketches with faint lines, you can improve

the results by applying the Find edges special effect to the source bitmap. To do

this, click Bitmaps ` Contour ` Find edges.

For outline tracing, reduce the color de pth of the bitmap by changing the color

mode, and then adjust the color and contrast.

You can adjust the traced results at any ti me, including during a trace, by changing

the PowerTRACE settings.

To trace a specific area in a bitmap, use the Shape tool to define the area before

clicking Bitmaps ` Tr a c e b i t m a p .

If important detail has been removed from the traced results, you can disable the

Remove background check box on the Settings page of PowerTRACE. You can

Determine performance level and quality of

a traced result

Move the Performance slider to the left to

increase performance, or to the right to

increase the quality of the traced results. The

lowest value prompts you to downsample all

bitmaps that exceed 1 megapixel. The

highest value prompts you to downsample

all bitmaps that exceed 5 megapixels.

Choose how to merge colors in a traced

result

In the Merge colors area, enable an option.

The Average merging colors option

replaces the colors to be merged with a color

of their average value. The Merge to first

color selected option replaces the colors to

be merged with the first selected color.

To Do the following

240 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

also try enabling the Specify color option on the Settings page and sampling the

color you want to specify as a background color.

If background color is removed around the edges but remains within image areas,

enable the Remove from entire image check box.

If too many colors or details are lost, move the Detail slider on the Settings page.

To preserve detail in bitmaps that have fine details, thin lines, and no anti-aliasing

applied, choose Line art from the Ty p e o f i m a g e list box on the Settings page.

CorelDRAW: Working with templates 241

Working with templates

A template is a collection of styles and page layout settings that govern the layout and

appearance of a drawing. Templates are sometimes referred to as "templets."

You can use the default template or choose one from a wide variety of preset templates

available in the application.

In this section, you'll learn about

searching for templates

creating templates

•using saved template s to create files

editing templates

Searching for templates

CorelDRAW provides an easy way of finding templates on your computer. You can

search by the name, category , or reference information associated with a template.

When you type a term in the text field and initiate a search, all matching templates are

displayed as thumbnail images in the thumbnail viewing area. For example, if you type

"contemporary" in the text field, the application automatically filters out all files that

do not match, and you see only the files that have the word "contemporary" in the

template name, category, or designer notes attached to the file.

Thumbnail zooming makes recognizing a particular template easier and faster. You can

narrow the search results by using different criteria, such as document type (for

example, brochure, flyer, newsletter, poster, or card) and industry (for example,

hospitality, retail, or services). You can choose to view only templates that you have

created or all templates (the templates included with CorelDRAW and provided by

third-party designers, as well as templates that you have created). When you select a

template in the viewing area, additional information is displayed about the template's

category, style, pagination, and fold options, as well as any designer notes related to its

intended use.

242 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

By default, the application searches all locations that Windows Desktop Search (on

Windows XP) or Instant Search (on Windows Vista) are configured to index. You can

also browse for templates in other locations, which Windows Desktop Search or Instant

Search are not configured to index. For more information about Windows Desktop

Search, visit the Microsoft Web site. For more information about co nfiguring the search

on Windows Vista, see the Windows Vista Help.

You can cancel a search at any time.

To search for templates

1Click File ` New from template.

2In the New from template dialog box, do one of the following:

• Type a word in the search text box.

• If you are using Windows XP without Windows Desktop Search, type a word in

the search text box, and press Enter .

Thumbnails that match the search term appear in the Te m p l a t e s pane.

3From the View by list box in the Filter pane, choose one of the following

categories:

Ty p e — sorts templates by document type, such as brochure, flyer, poster, or

newsletter

Industry — sorts templates by the industry that the template was designed for

(for example, hospitality, retail, or services)

4In the category list, click a category.

To view all templates (that is, templates included with CorelDRAW, created by

third-party designers, or created by you or others), click All . To view only

templates that you have created, click My templates .

You can also

View template details Click a thumbnail in the Te m p l a t e s pane.

The template details are displayed in the

Template details pane.

If the Te m p l a t e d e t a i l s pane is hidden, click

the Show/Hide template details button

to display it.

CorelDRAW: Working with templates 243

Templates that do not contain any category information are grouped in a

category called Not specified.

If the CorelDRAW shell integration components are not installed (that is, if

you have disabled the Windows Shell Extension option under Utilities in the

Setup wizard during a custom installation), you can search for templates only

by filename, not by name, keywords, or other reference information.

View designer notes Click a thumbnail in the Te m p l a t e s pane.

The designer notes are displayed in the

Designer notes pane.

Print designer notes Click the Print designer notes button in

the lower-left corner of the Designer notes

pane.

If there are no designer notes associated with

a template, the Print designer notes button

is disabled.

Search for templates in other locations on

your computer

Click Browse . Locate the folder where the

template is stored. Double-click a template

filename.

Stop a search Do one of the following:

• Click the Cancel button next to the

Search text field.

• Delete the search term from the Search

text field (and press Enter if you are using

Windows XP and have not installed

Windows Desktop Search).

You can also

244 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

If you are using Windows XP, and if Windows Desktop Search is not installed,

the application searches by filename only in the following folders and

subfolders:

X:\Program Files\Corel\CorelDRAW Graphics Suite

X4\Languages\EN\Draw\Template, where X is the drive where

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 is installed

template folders associated with CorelDRAW 12 and CorelDRAW X3

•My Documents folder

•Desktop

If you are using Windows XP and install Windows Desktop Search after

installing CorelDRAW, you must add the location of the CorelDRAW

Graphics Suite X4 installation to the indexed locations of Windows Desktop

Search. For more information about modifying search options in Windows

Desktop Search, see "Set search locations" in the Windows Desktop Search

Help.

Windows Desktop Search is available as a free download from the Microsoft

Download Center.

To zoom in or out when you view thumbnails, drag the Zoom slider to the right

or left.

If you are using Windows XP, you can also start a search by entering a search

term in the search text box and clicking the Start search button.

Creating templates

If the preset templates do not meet your requirements, you can create a template based

on styles that you create, or styles taken from other templates. For example, if you

regularly put together a newsletter, you can save the page layout settings and styles to

a template.

When you save a template, CorelDRAW allows you to add reference information, such

as pagination, folds, category, industry, and other important notes. Although adding

template information is optional, doing so makes it easier to organize and locate

templates later on. For example, adding descriptive notes to a template lets you

subsequently search for that template by entering text from the notes.

CorelDRAW: Working with templates 245

To create a template

1Click File ` Save as template.

2Ty p e a n a m e i n t h e File name list box.

3Locate the folder where you want to save the template.

4Click Save.

5In the Template properties dialog box, specify the options you want:

Name — Assign a name to your template. This name will appear with the

thumbnail in the Te m p l a t e s pane.

Sided — Choose a pagination option.

Folds — Choose a fold from the list, or choose Other and type the fold type in

the text box next to the Folds list box.

Ty p e — Choose an option from the list, or choose Other and type the template

type in the text box next to the Ty p e list box.

Industry — Choose an option from the list, or choose Other and type the

industry for which the template is designed.

Designer notes — Type important information about the intended use of the

template.

If you click Cancel , you close the Te m p l a t e p r o p e r t i e s dialog box without

saving the template.

If you save a template to a previous version of CorelDRAW Graphics Suite

(13.0 or earlier), you cannot add reference information.

If you don't want to add reference information, click OK without specifying

any of the options.

You can also enter designer notes by copying content from another document

and pasting it into the Designer notes text box.

To format text in the Designer notes text box, use the following shortcut

keys:

Ctrl + B — applies bold formatting to selected text

Ctrl + I — italicizes selected text

Ctrl + U — underlines selected text

Ctrl + K — assigns a hyperlink to selected text

246 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Using saved templates to create files

When you create a new drawing based on a template, CorelDRA W formats the page

according to the page layout settings in the template and then loads the template's

styles into the new file.

To create a new file based on a saved template

1Click File ` Open .

If you are using Windows XP, choose CDT - CorelDRAW template from the

Files of type list box.

2Locate the folder where the template is stored.

3Double-click a template filename.

4Enable the New from template check box in the Open dialog box.

If you want to load page settings and objects in addition to loading the template's

styles, enable the With contents check box.

Editing templates

You can edit a template by making changes to the styles, page layout settings, or

objects. For example, if you like a template but want to make it more versatile, you can

add styles that you've created or that you've taken from an other template. For

information about setting page layout options, see "Speci fying the page layout" on

page 161.

To edit a template

1Click File ` Open .

If you are using Windows XP, choose CDT - CorelDRAW template from the

Files of type list box.

2Locate the folder where the template is stored.

If you are using Windows XP, you can preview the contents of a template by

enabling the Preview check box.

3Double-click a template filename.

4In the Open dialog box, enable the Open for editing check box.

CorelDRAW: Managing color for display, input, and output 247

Managing color for

display, input, and output

You may find that the colors displayed on your monitor do not match the colors of a

scanned or printed image. Color management lets you reproduce colors accurately by

using color profiles and by displaying colors for various types of output.

In this section, you'll learn about

the Color Management dialog box

working with color profiles

Understanding the Color Management dialog box

Color management is the process of matching colors between devices, such as scanners,

digital cameras, printers, and monitors. You can use the color management controls in

the application to achieve the best possible color matches.

The following image shows the default appearance of the Color management dialog

box.

Color management dialog box

248 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

You can activate the following visual elements:

Scanner/digital camera icon

Separations printer icon

Monitor icon

Composite printer icon

Import/export icon

Internal RGB icon

Arrows

You can click the Monitor icon, the Import/export icon, the Internal RGB icon, and

the Arrows to choose color management options and advanced settings.

You can click the caption text under the icons to choose color profiles for each device.

You can also get other color profiles from the application CD or online. For more

information, see "Working with color profiles" on page 249. To help you choose the

appropriate profile, check the manufacturer's documentation for a device.

In addition, you can click the arrows between device icons to turn the color profiles on

or off. When an arrow is enabled, it appears orange, which indicates that the profile is

turned on. When an arrow is disabled, it appears grayed and broken, which indicates

that the profile is turned off. You can use the arrows to correct colors between devices

and to control how colors are displayed.

When a device is corrected for color, at least two profiles are used — one for each device.

For example, if the printer colors are being corrected according to the internal RGB

profile both the internal RGB and printer profiles are used. If you use your monitor to

simulate the colors in a printed image, three profiles are used: the internal RGB, printer,

and monitor profiles. You can choose whether effects, such as transparencies, are

calculated in the CMYK or RGB color mode.

The following table contains descriptions of what happens when an arrow is enabled or

disabled.

Arrow Enabled Disabled

From Scanner/digital

camera to Internal RGB

The scanner/digital camera

profile and the internal RGB

profiles are used for color

correction.

The profiles are not used.

CorelDRAW: Managing color for display, input, and output 249

Working with color profiles

A color management system helps you achieve accurate colors across a variety of devices

consistently. The first stage in setting up your color management system is to choose

color profiles for your monitor and each of the devices you use, such as scanners, digital

cameras, and printers.

From Internal RGB to

Monitor

Colors are calibrated for

display according to the

internal RGB and monitor

color profiles.

The profile is not used.

From Internal RGB to

Composite printer

The printer and internal

RGB profiles are used for

color correction.

The profile is not used.

From Composite printer to

Monitor

The monitor simulates the

output from a composite

printer.

The monitor does not

simulate the output from a

composite printer.

From Internal RGB to

Separations printer

The separations printer and

RGB profiles are used for

color correction.

The separations printer and

RGB profiles are not used.

(You can override this setting

in the Print dialog box.)

From Separations printer

to Monitor

The monitor simulates

output from color

separations printer.

The monitor does not

simulate output from color

separations printer.

From Separations printer

to Composite printer

The composite printer

displays a simulation of color

separations

The composite printer does

not display a simulation of

color separations

From Internal RGB to

Import/Export

Internal RGB profiles are

embedded.

ICC profiles are not

embedded.

From Import/Export to

Internal RGB

Embedded ICC profiles are

used.

ICC profiles are ignored.

Arrow Enabled Disabled

250 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Understanding color management

Each device uses a range of colors, called a color mode (or color space). For example, a

monitor displays a different set of colors than a printer reproduces. So, you may see some

colors on the screen that cannot be printed. You can use a color management system to

translate colors from one device to another. Color profiles define the color mode for your

monitor and for the input and output devices you use.

For more information about using color management in your application, see

"Understanding the Color Management dialog box" on page 247.

Choosing color profiles

Different brands and models of monitors, scanners, digital cameras, and printers have

different color modes and thus require different color profiles. Some widely used profiles

are installed with your application.

Standard ICC (International Color Consortium) color profiles are used in your

application. You can choose color profiles for the following:

•monitor

scanner/digital camera

composite printer

separations printer

internal RGB color mode

Obtaining additional color profiles

If you need additional profiles or updates, you can access them on the application CD,

or you can download them.

To choose a color profile

1Click To o l s ` Color management.

2Click a profile name under one of the following icons:

Scanner/digital camera

Separations printer

Monitor

Composite printer

Internal RGB

3Choose a profile from the list box.

CorelDRAW: Managing color for display, input, and output 251

By default, color profiles are stored in the Color folder of the application.

You can access other color profiles.

To copy a color profile from the disc

1Click To o l s ` Color management.

2Below a device icon, click a color profile list box, and choose Get profile from

disk.

3Insert the application disc.

4In the Browse for folder dialog box, choose the folder where the profiles are

located.

You may want to load color profiles that you have stored on a network or on your

hard disk.

5In the Install from disk dialog box, choose the color profile you want to copy.

6Click Choose.

To download a color profile

1Click To o l s ` Color management.

2Below a device icon, click a color profile list box, and choose Download profiles.

3In the dialog box, enable the check box for each profile you want to download.

4Click Download.

5In the Save as dialog box, choose a destination for the color profile.

If you want to store the new color profile with the existing profiles, download the

new profile to the Color folder within the main application folder.

You can also

Choose a different profile type Click the Profile type list box, and choose a

type.

Specify your connection speed Click the Connection speed list box, and

choose a speed. The faster your connection

speed, the shorter the download time.

Update the profiles list Click Refresh .

252 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Return to the main Color management

dialog box

Click Cancel .

Need more information?

For more information about color management, see "Managing color for display,

input, and output" in the "Color and fills" section of the Help.

You can also

CorelDRAW: Printing basics 253

Printing basics

CorelDRAW provides extensive options for printing your work.

In this section, you'll learn about

printing your work

laying out print jobs

previewing print jobs

•merging files

Printing your work

In the CorelDRAW application, you can print one or more copies of the same drawing.

You can specify what to print, as well as which parts of a drawing to print; for example,

you can print selected vector objects, bitmaps, text, or layers. For more information

about printing layers, see "To enable or disable printing and exporting of a layer" on

page 190.

Before printing a drawing, you can specify printer properties, incl uding paper size and

device options.

To set printer properties

1Click File ` Print .

2Click the General tab.

3Click Properties .

4Set any properties in the dialog box.

To print your work

1Click File ` Print .

2Click the General tab.

254 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

3Choose a printer from the Name list box.

4Type a value in the Number of copies box.

If you want the copies collated, enable the Collate check box.

5Enable one of the following options:

Current document — prints the active drawing

Current page — prints the active page

Pages — prints the pages that you specify

Documents — prints the documents that you specify

Selection — prints the objects that you have selected

Laying out print jobs

You can lay out a print job by specifying the size, position, and scale. Tiling a print job

prints portions of each page on separate sheets of paper that you can assemble into one

sheet. You would, for example, tile a print job that is larger than your printer paper.

If the orientation of a print job differs from the orientation specified in the printer

properties, a message prompts you to adjust the paper orientation of the printing

device. You can disable this prompt, so that the printer adjusts paper orientation

automatically.

To specify the size and position of a print job

1Click File ` Print .

2Click the Layout tab.

3Enable one of the following options:

As in document — maintains the image size, as it is in the document

Fit to page — sizes and positions the print job to fit to a printed page

Reposition images to — lets you reposition the print job by choosing a position

from the list box

Enabling the Reposition images to option lets you specify size, position, and

scale in the corresponding boxes.

To tile a print job

1Click File ` Print .

CorelDRAW: Printing basics 255

2Click the Layout tab.

3Enable the Print tiled pages check box.

4Type values in the following boxes:

Tile overlap — lets you specify the number of inches by which to overlap tiles

% of page width — lets you specify the percentage of the page width the tiles

will occupy

Enable the Tiling marks check box to include tiling alignment marks.

To change the page orientation prompt

1Click To o l s ` Options.

2In the list of categories, double-click Global , and click Printing .

3Choose Page orientation prompt from the Option list.

4Choose one of the following from the Setting list box:

• Off — Always match orientation

• On — Ask if orientations differ

• Off — Don't change orientation

Previewing print jobs

You can preview your work to show how the position and size of the print job will appear

on paper. For a detailed view, you can zoom in on an area. You can view how the

individual color separations will appear when printed. You can also increase the speed

of a print preview by hiding the graphics.

Before printing your work, you can view a summary of issues for a print job to find

potential printing problems. For example, you can check the current print job for print

errors, possible print problems, and suggestions for resolving issues.

To preview a print job

•Click File ` Print preview .

To magnify the preview page

1Click File ` Print preview .

256 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

2Click View ` Zoom .

3Enable the Percent option, and type a value in the box.

To preview color separations

1Click File ` Print preview .

2On the property bar, click the Enable color separations button .

You can preview the composite by clicking View ` Preview separations `

Composite.

You can view individual color separations by clicking the tabs at the bottom of

the application window.

Merging files

CorelDRAW lets you combine text from a data source with a drawing. When you

merge documents, you produce several different copies of a drawing. Each copy contains

specific information from a record in a data source, such as a text file or an ODBC data

source (a Microsoft Excel or Microsoft® Access™ file).

When you merge documents, you combine a form document and a data source. A form

document provides the pattern and layout for a merged document. A data source

supplies information for a drawing during the merge. CorelDRAW supports the

following data source files: Text (TXT) files, comma-separated values (CSV) files, Rich

Text Format (RTF) files, and files that can be opened by means of an ODBC data source.

Data source document (1), form document (2), and merged documents (3)

CorelDRAW: Printing basics 257

Creating a data source file

Information in a data source file is organized into fields and records. A field can contain

one or more characters. Fields can contain alphanumeric data or only numeric data. For

example, a record may include a first name, last name, address, and other contact

information. Each item within the record, such as first name, last name, or address, is

recognized as a field. A record can contain one or more fields.

You can create a data source file or import an existing one. You can create a data text

file by using CorelDRAW or a text editor. You can edit the data in a data source file at

any time.

Creating a form document

Creating form documents is similar to crea ting regular drawings. For form documents,

however, you insert merge fields, which are replaced by information from the data

source during the merge.

Associating a form document with a data source file

When you use CorelDRAW to create a data file, or when you import an existing data

file into CorelDRAW, the data file is associated with the form document. The association

is always stored with the document and cannot be changed.

Performing a merge

CorelDRAW provides different output options for merge documents. You can print a

merge document or save it to a new docu ment. When you print a merge document, the

form document is merged with the data source file during printing. When you save the

merged document to a new file, the application merges the form document with the

data from the data source file in a new CorelDRAW file. You can use this file to preview

your final output and make minor adjustments before printing. For major changes, such

as the addition or repositioning of merge fields or the addition of new records, you must

work in the form document.

To create a data source file by using CorelDRAW

1Click File ` Print merge ` Create/Load merge fields to launch the Print merge

wizard.

2Enable the Create new text option, and click Next.

3On the Add fields page, do one or both of the following:

258 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To create a text field, type a field name in the Te x t f i e l d box, click Add , and then

click Next .

To create a numeric field, type a field name in the Numeric field box, click Add ,

and then click Next .

4On the Add or edit records page of the Print merge wizard, do any of the

following:

• To add a record, click New , and then click Next .

• To add data in a field, click in the field, type data, and click Next.

• To modify existing data in a field, clic k in the field, modify the data, and click

Next.

5Enable the Save data settings option.

6Type a filename, choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file, and

click Finish .

You can also

Apply formatting to the data in a numeric

field

On the Add fields page of the Print merge

wizard, click a numeric field in the list, and

choose a format from the Numeric format

list box.

Different numeric formats are available in

CorelDRAW. For example, the X.0 format

represents the value 1 as 1.0 ; the 00X

format represents the value 1 as 001 .

Automatically increment the value in a

numeric field

Enable the Continually increment the

numeric field option, and specify starting

and ending values in the corresponding

boxes.

Delete a record On the Add or edit records page of the

Print merge wizard, click Delete.

View records On the Add or edit records page of the

Print merge wizard, choose one of the

following options from the Current view list

box:

All records — lets you display all records

in a source data file

Single record — lets you display one

record at a time

CorelDRAW: Printing basics 259

You can edit the fields and records in an existing data source file by clicking

File ` Print merge ` Edit merge fields and following the instructions in the

Print merge wizard.

To import a data source file

1Click File ` Print merge ` Create/Load merge fields.

2In the Print merge wizard, enable the Import text from a file or an ODBC data

source option, and click Next .

3Enable the File option, navigate to the drive and folder where the data file is

stored, choose a file, and click Next .

4Follow the instructions in the Print merge wizard.

To import an ODBC data source file

1Click File ` Print merge ` Create/Load merge fields.

2In the Print merge wizard, enable the Import text from a file or an ODBC data

source option, and click Next .

3Enable the ODBC data source option , and click Select ODBC data source.

4In the Select data source dialog box, click the Machine data source tab.

5Under Data source name , select Excel files , and click OK.

6In the Select workbook dialog box, choose the database that you want to import,

and click OK .

Browse records On the Add or edit records page of the

Print merge wizard, click any of the

following buttons:

•First record

•Next record

•Previous record

•Last record

Find text in a data file On the Add or edit records page of the

Print merge wizard, type a search term in

the box, and press Enter .

You can also

260 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To create a form document

1Open a drawing in which you want to insert merge fields.

2Click File ` Print merge ` Create/Load merge fields.

3Follow the instructions of the Print merge wizard to associate the drawing with a

data source file, and then exit the Print merge wizard.

The Print merge toolbar appears.

4On the Print merge toolbar, choose a field name from the Field list box, and click

Insert.

CorelDRAW places the merge field in the center of the current view. If you want to

reposition the merge field, drag it to a new location on the drawing page.

5Repeat step 4 to insert additional fields.

To perform a merge and print the document

1Do one of the following:

• Click File ` Print merge ` Perform merge.

• Click File ` Print . In the Perform merge dialog box, enable the Perform

merge option, and click OK.

• On the Print merge toolbar, click Merge , and click Print .

2Specify any printer settings. Click Print.

If you want to print all records and pages, enable the Current document option.

To perform a merge and save the document to a new file

•Click File ` Print ` Merge to new document.

Need more information?

For more information about printing, s ee "Printing basics" in the "Printing"

section of the Help.

CorelDRAW: Working with commercial printers 261

Working with commercial printers

With CorelDRAW, you can prepare a print job for commercial printing.

In this section, you'll learn about

printing printers' marks

printing color separations

•printing to film

Printing printers' marks

Printing printers' marks lets you display information on a page about how a work

should be printed. You can specify the position of the printers' marks on the page.

The available printers' marks are as follows:

Crop/fold marks — represent the size of the paper and print at the corners of the

page. You can print crop/fold marks to use as guides to trim the paper. If you print

multiple pages per sheet (for example, two rows by two columns), you can choose

to print the crop/fold marks on the outside edge of the page so that all crop/fold

marks are removed after the cropping process, or you can choose to add crop marks

around each row and column. Crop/fold marks ensure that marks appear on each

plate of a separated CMYK file.

Bleed limit — determines how far an image can extend beyond the crop marks.

When you use a bleed to extend the print job to the edge of the page, you must set

a bleed limit. A bleed requires that the paper you are printing on is larger than the

size of paper you ultimately want, and the print job must extend beyond the edge

of the final paper size.

Registration marks — are required to line up film for proofing or printing plates

on a color press. They print on each sheet of a color separation.

Color calibration bars — are color scales that print on each sheet of a color

separation and ensure accurate color reproduction. To see calibration bars, the page

size of the print job must be larger than the page size of the work you are printing.

262 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Densitometer scale — is a series of gray boxes ranging from light to dark. These

boxes are required to test the density of halftone images. You can position the

densitometer scale anywhere on the page. You can also customize the levels of gray

that appear in each of the seven squares on the densitometer scale.

Page numbers — helps you collate pages of an image that do not include any

page numbers or do not contain page nu mbers that correspond to the actual

number of pages

File information — prints file information, such as, the color profile; halftone

settings; name, date, and time the image was created; plate number; and job name

To print crop and fold marks

1Click File ` Print .

2Click the Prepress tab.

3Enable the Crop/fold marks check box.

If you want to print only the exte rior crop/fold marks, enable the Exterior only

check box.

To print crop and fold marks, the paper on which you print must be 0.5 inch

larger on all sides than the page size of the image that you are printing.

To set crop and fold marks, see "Printing printers' marks" on page 261.

To print composite crop and fold marks

1Click To o l s ` Options.

2In the list of categories, double-click Global , and click Printing.

3Choose Composite crop marks from the Option list.

4Choose Output on all plates from the Setting list box.

To print color calibration bars and densitometer scales

1Click File ` Print .

2Click the Prepress tab.

3In the Calibration bars area, enable one or both of the following check boxes:

• Color calibration bar

CorelDRAW: Working with commercial printers 263

• Densitometer scales

If you want to customize the levels of gray in one of the densitometer scale squares,

choose a number from the Densities list (lower values represent lighter squares),

and type a new density for that square.

To print page numbers

1Click File ` Print .

2Click the Prepress tab.

3Enable the Print page numbers check box.

If you want to position the page number inside the page, enable the Position

within page check box.

To print file information

1Click File ` Print .

2Click the Prepress tab.

3Enable the Print file information check box.

4Type a job name in the Job name/slug line box.

If you want to position the file information inside the page, enable the Position

within page check box.

To position printers' marks

1Click File ` Print preview .

2Click the Marks placement tool .

3Click the Auto-position marks rectangle button on the property bar.

4Type values in the Marks alignment rectangle boxes.

You can also change the position of printers' marks by clicking on a printers'

mark icon in the print preview window and dragging the bounding box.

If you want to affix printers' marks to the object bounding box instead of to the

page bounding box, click the Prepress tab in the Print dialog box, and enable

the Marks to objects check box.

264 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Printing color separations

When you send color work to a service bureau or printing shop, either you or the service

bureau must create color separations. Color separations are necessary because a typical

printing press applies only one color of ink at a time to a sheet of paper. You can specify

the color separations to print, including the order in which they print.

Printing presses produce color using either process color or spot color, or both. You can

convert the spot colors to process colors at printing time. For more information on spot

and process colors, see "Choosing colors" on page 131.

Corel also supports PANTONE Hexachrome®, a type of printing process that increases

the range of printable colors. Talk to your service bureau about whether you should use

PANTONE Hexachrome color.

When setting halftone screens to print color separations, it is recommended that you

use default settings; otherwise, screens can be improperly set and result in undesirable

moiré patterns and poor color reproduction. However, if you are using an imagesetter,

the screen technology should be set to match the type of imagesetter the service bureau

uses. Before customizing a halftone screen, consult the service bureau to determine the

correct setting.

If you have overprinted areas, you can choose how you want those areas to print. For

more information about overprinting, see "Working with color trapping and

overprinting" in the Help.

To print color separations

1Click File ` Print .

2Click the Separations tab.

3Enable the Print separations check box.

If you want to print specific color separations, enable the corresponding check box

in the list of color separations.

You can print separations in color by enabling the Print separations in color

check box in the Options area, although using this option is not

recommended.

You can change the order in which color separations print by enabling the Use

advanced settings check box, clicking Advanced , and choosing an order from

the Order list box.

CorelDRAW: Working with commercial printers 265

To convert spot colors to process colors

1Click File ` Print .

2Click the Separations tab.

3Enable the Convert spot colors to process check box.

Changing the spot colors to process colors does not affect the original

CorelDRAW file; it affects the way colors are sent to the printer.

To use PANTONE Hexachrome process color

1Click File ` Print .

2Click the Separations tab.

3Enable the Print separations check box.

4Enable the Hexachrome plates check box in the Options area.

To customize a halftone screen

1Click File ` Print .

2Click the Separations tab.

3Enable the Print separations check box.

4Enable the Use advanced settings check box in the Options area.

5Click Advanced .

6Change any of the following settings:

• Screening technology

• Resolution

• Basic screen

• Halftone type

You can set the screen frequency, screen angle, and overprint options for spot

colors as well as process colors. For example, if you have a fountain fill made up

of two spot colors, you can set one to print at 45 degrees and the other to print

at 90 degrees.

266 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Printing to film

You can set up a print job to produce negative images. An imagesetter produces images

on film that may need to be produced as negatives depending on which printing device

you are using. Consult your service bureau or printing shop to determine whether you

can produce images on film.

You can specify to print with the emulsion down. Printing with the emulsion down

produces a backward image on desktop printers.

To print a negative

1Click File ` Print .

2Click the Prepress tab.

3Enable the Invert check box.

Do not choose negative film if you are printing to a desktop printer.

Need more information?

For more information about preparing a print job for commercial printing, see

"Commercial printing" in the "Printing" section of the Help.

CorelDRAW: Publishing to PDF 267

Publishing to PDF

PDF is a file format designed to preserve fonts, images, graphics, and formatting of an

original application file.

In this section, you'll learn about

saving documents as PDF files

Saving documents as PDF files

You can save a document as a PDF file. A PDF file can be viewed, shared, and printed

on any platform provided that users have Adobe Acrobat, Adobe® Reader®, or a PDF-

compatible reader installed on their computer s. A PDF file can also be uploaded to an

intranet or the Web. You can also export an individual selection or an entire document

to a PDF file.

When you save a document as a PDF file, you can choose from several PDF presets,

which apply specific setting s. For example, with the Web preset, the resolution of the

images in the PDF file is optimized for the Web.

You can also create a new PDF preset or edit any existing preset. PDF file security

settings are not saved with a PDF preset.

If you have used symbols in a document, they will be supported in the PDF file. For

more information on symbols, see "Working with symbols" in the Help.

To save a document as a PDF file

1Click File ` Publish to PDF .

2From the PDF preset list box, choose one of the following:

Archiving (CMYK) — creates a PDF/A-1b file, which is suitable for archiving

purposes. In comparison to traditional PDF files, PDF/A-1b files are better suited

for long-term preservation of documents because they are more self-contained

and more device-independent. PDF/A-1b files include embedded fonts, device-

independent color, and their own description as XMP metadata. This PDF style

268 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

preserves any spot or Lab colors included in the original document, but it

converts all other colors, such as grayscale or RGB, to the CMYK color mode. In

addition, this style embeds a color profile to specify how CMYK colors should be

interpreted on the rendering device.

Archiving (RGB) —similarly to the previous style, creates a PDF/A-1b file,

preserving any spot and Lab colors. All other colors are converted to the RGB

color mode.

Document distribution — creates a PDF file that can be printed on a laser or

desktop printer and is suitable for general document delivery. This style enables

JPEG bitmap image compression and can include bookmarks and hyperlinks.

Editing — creates a high-quality PDF file inte nded to be sent to a printer or

digital copier. This style enables LZW compression, embeds fonts, and includes

hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails. It displays the PDF file with all the

fonts, with all of the images at full resolution, and with hyperlinks, so that you

can edit the file at a later date.

Prepress — enables ZIP bitmap image compression, embeds fonts, and

preserves spot color options best designed for high-end quality printing. Consult

the service bureau for their preferred settings.

Web — creates a PDF file intended for online viewing, such as a PDF file to be

distributed by e-mail or published on the Web. This style enables JPEG bitmap

image compression, compresses text, and includes hyperlinks.

PDF/X-1a — enables ZIP bitmap image compression, converts all objects to

CMYK, embeds the separations printer profile, and preserves spot color options.

This style contains the basic settings for prepress and is the standard format for

ad distribution.

PDF/X-3 — This style is a superset of PDF/X-1a. It allows both CMYK and

non-CMYK data (such as Lab or Grayscale) in the PDF file.

3Locate the folder in which you want to save the file.

4Type a filename in the File name box.

If you want to create a PDF file for archiving purposes that conforms to the

PDF/A-1b standards, embedding must be allowed for all the fonts in your

document. To check for fonts that cannot be embedded, view the preflight

summary of the PDF file. You can substitute any fonts that cannot be

embedded, or you can convert all text to curves by enabling the Export all text

as curves check box on the Objects page of the Publish to PDF settings

dialog box.

CorelDRAW: Publishing to PDF 269

To check if a font can be embedded, you can view licensing information and

embedding restrictions by using a free tool, such as the Font properties

extension tool available on the Microsoft Web site.

To save multiple documents as a single PDF file

1Click File ` Publish to PDF .

2Click Settings.

3Click the General tab.

4Enable the Documents option.

5Enable the check box for each document you want to save.

To create a PDF preset

1Click File ` Publish to PDF.

2Click Settings.

3In the Publish to PDF settings dialog box, specify any settings.

4Click the General tab.

5Click the Add PDF preset button next to the PDF preset list box.

6Type a name for the style in the Save PDF preset as list box.

To delete a PDF style, select the style and click the Delete PDF preset button

next to the PDF preset list box.

To edit a PDF preset

1Click File ` Publish to PDF.

2Click Settings.

3In the Publish to PDF settings dialog box, specify any settings.

4Click the General tab.

5Click the Add PDF preset button next to the PDF list box.

6Choose a style from the Save PDF preset as list box.

270 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

If you save changes you make to preset settings, the original settings will be

overwritten. To avoid this, save any changes to preset settings with a new

name.

Need more information?

For more information about working with PDF files, see "Publishing to PDF" in

the "File formats" section of the Help.

CorelDRAW: Importing and exporting files 271

Importing and exporting files

Your application provides filters that convert files from one format to another when

you import or export files.

In this section, you will learn about

•importing files

•exporting files

Importing files

You can import files created in other applications. For example, you can import an

Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF), JPEG, or Adobe Illustrator (AI) file. You can

import a file and place it in the active application window as an object. You can also

resize and center a file as you import it. The imported file becomes part of the active file.

While importing a bitmap, you can resample it to reduce the file size, or crop it to

eliminate unused areas of the photo. You can also crop a bitmap to select only the exact

area and size of the image you want to import.

To import a file into an active drawing

1Click File ` Import.

2Choose the folder where the file is stored.

If necessary, you can search for an image by using the search box. You can search for

such things as file name, title, subject, author, keyword, comment, bitmap names,

object names, and so on.

3Choose a file format from the list box next to the File name box (Windows Vista)

or the Files of type list box (Windows XP).

If you do know the file's format, choose All file formats .

4Click the file name.

If the file contains text in a language different from that of your operating system,

choose the corresponding option from the Select code page (Windows Vista) or

272 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Code page list box (Windows XP) to ensure that object names, keywords, and

notes are correctly displayed.

These options are not available for all file formats.

5Click Import, and do one of the following:

• Click the drawing page to maintain original file and position top-left corner

where you click.

• Click and drag on the drawing page to resize the file. The import cursor displays

the dimensions of the resized file as you drag on the drawing page.

• Press Enter to center the file on the drawing page.

Active snapping options are applied to the imported file.

You can also

Link to a bitmap externally instead of

embedding it

Click the Import button, then click Import

as externally linked image (Windows

Vista) or enable the Link bitmap externally

check box (Windows XP).

Link to a high-resolution file for Open

Prepress Interface (OPI) output

Click the Import button, then click Import

as high-resolution file for output using

OPI (Windows Vista) or enable the Link to

high-resolution file for output using OPI

check box (Windows XP).

This procedure inserts a low-resolution

version of a TIFF or Scitex® Continuous

Tone (CT) file into a document. The low-

resolution version is linked with the high-

resolution image, which resides on an Open

Prepress Interface (OPI) server.

Merge layers in an imported bitmap Enable the Combine multi-layer bitmap

check box.

Save the embedded International Color

Consortium (ICC) profile

Enable the Extract embedded ICC profile

check box to save the ICC profile to the color

folder where the application is installed.

This option is not available for all file

formats.

CorelDRAW: Importing and exporting files 273

Not all importing options are available for all file formats.

You can import multiple files. Hold down Shift , and click to select consecutive

files in a list. Hold down Ctrl , and click to select nonconsecutive files.

Exporting files

Yo u c a n u s e t h e File ` Export command to export files to a variety of bitmap and vector

file formats that can be used in other applic ations. For example, you can export a file to

the Adobe Illustrator (AI) or GIF format. You can also export a file so that it is

optimized for use with a suite of office productivity applications, such as Microsoft Word

or Corel WordPerfect Office.

When you are exporting a file, the original file is left open in the drawing window in its

existing format.

Check for watermark or copyright

information

Enable the Check for watermark check

box.

This option is not available for all file

formats.

Use the default settings for the filter instead

of opening the dialog box

Enable the Do not show filter dialog check

box.

This option is not available for all file

formats.

Preserve layers and pages in an imported file Enable the Maintain layers and pages

check box. If you disable the check box, all

layers are combined into a single layer.

This option is not available for all file

formats.

Open only part of an image (in Windows

Vista only)

In the Load partial file dialog box, type the

range of frames to open in the Load frames

box.

You can also

274 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

You can use the File ` Save as command to save files to various vector formats. After

you save a file to a different format, the saved file is displayed immediately in the

drawing window. It is recommended that you first save the file as a CorelDRAW (CDR)

file because some file formats do not support all of the features found in a CorelDRAW

file.

To export a file

1Click File ` Export.

2Choose the folder where you want to save the file.

3Choose a file format from the Save as type list box.

4Ty p e a f i l e n a m e i n t h e File name list box.

5Enable any of the following active check boxes:

Export this page only — exports only the current page in a multipage file

Selected only — saves only the objects selected in the active drawing

Do not show filter dialog — suppresses dialog boxes that offer more advanced

exporting options

These options are not available for all file formats.

6Click Export.

If a dialog box for the export format opens, specify the options you want. For

detailed information about file formats, see "Supported file formats" in the Help.

To export a file to Microsof t Office or WordPerfect Office

1Click File ` Export for Office.

2From the Export to list box, choose one of the following:

Microsoft Office — lets you set options to meet the different output

requirements of Microsoft Office applications

WordPerfect Office — optimizes the image for Corel WordPerfect Office by

converting it to a WordPerfect Graphics file (WPG)

You can also

Compress a file on export Choose a compression type from the

Compression type list box.

Specify information about a file Type any comments you want in the Notes

box.

CorelDRAW: Importing and exporting files 275

3If you chose Microsoft Office, choose one of the following options from the

Graphic should be best suited for list box:

Compatibility — lets you save the drawing as a Portable Network Graphic

(PNG) bitmap. This preserves the appearance of the drawing when you import it

into an office application.

Editing — lets you save the drawing in the Extended Metafile Format (EMF).

This retains most of the editable elements in vector drawings.

4If you chose Microsoft Office and Compatibility , choose one of the following

options from the Optimized for list box:

Presentation — lets you optimize the file for outputs such as slide shows or

online documents (96 dpi)

Desktop printing — lets you maintain good image quality for desktop printing

(150 dpi)

Commercial printing — lets you optimize the file for high-quality printing

(300 dpi)

An estimated file size appears in the lower-left corner of the dialog box.

5Click OK.

6Locate the folder in which you want to save the file.

7Ty p e a f i l e n a m e i n t h e File name list box.

8Click Save.

The Graphics should be best suited for and Optimized for options are

available only if you choose the Microsoft Office and Compatibility options.

Layers in a drawing are flattened when exported to Microsoft Office or

Corel WordPerfect Office.

You can also

Zoom in and out in the preview window Using the Zoom in or Zoom out

tool, click in the preview window.

Pan to view another area of the drawing Using the Pan tool , drag in the preview

window until the area you want to see

becomes visible.

276 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Need more information?

For more information about importing and exporting files, see "Importing and

exporting files" in the "File formats" section of the Help.

CorelDRAW: Collaborating 277

Collaborating

You can share designs and ideas with clients and co-workers in a Web-based

environment by using CorelDRAW ConceptShare. You can create multiple

workspaces, upload your designs, and invite others to post comments.

In this chapter you'll learn about

using CorelDRAW ConceptShare

Using CorelDRAW ConceptShare

You can access CorelDRAW ConceptShare from CorelDRAW by opening a

CorelDRAW ConceptShare account. Once you log into your account and create one or

more workspaces, you can upload your document to one of the workspaces you have

created. Each workspace can contain multiple documents or designs. You can then

invite others to one or more of your wo rkspaces. Each workspace has separate user

permissions, and the people who have access to a workspace have access to all

documents within that workspace.

Each person who has permission to enter your workspace can view and mark up

elements of the design you have posted. Users can also write comments, or respond to

previous comments posted by others. If multiple users are logged in at the same time,

they can interact in real time, providing instant feedback. For more information, visit

the CorelDRAW ConceptShare Web site.

To open a CorelDRAW ConceptShare account

1Click Window ` Dockers ` ConceptShare.

2Click the Sign up now button.

3Follow the instructions.

278 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

The CorelDRAW ConceptShare online content may not be available in all

languages. Some languages that are currently unavailable may become

available in the future.

To log into CorelDRAW ConceptShare

1Click Window ` Dockers ` ConceptShare.

The ConceptShare docker opens.

2Type your e-mail and password in the text boxes.

3Click the Submit button.

You can also access your CorelDRAW ConceptShare account online at the

CorelDRAW ConceptShare Web site.

To publish the current page to a CorelDRAW ConceptShare workspace

1Make sure you are logged into your CorelDRAW ConceptShare account.

If you have logged in from a browser and you want to publish a document from

CorelDRAW, you must log in again from CorelDRAW.

2Click Window ` Dockers ` ConceptShare.

The ConceptShare docker opens.

3Choose a workspace, and click the Publish page link.

In CorelDRAW, you can publish individual pages or multipage documents one

page at a time. Each page is uploaded as a separate concept within the

workspace. If you log into your CorelDRAW ConceptShare account from a

browser, you can publish a whole multipage document but not individual

pages.

You can also publish the current page to a workspace by clicking File `

Publish page to ConceptShare, right-clicking the page tab at the bottom of

the screen and choosing Publish page to ConceptShare , or right-clicking the

page in the Object manager docker and choosing Publish page to

ConceptShare.

Section III: Corel PHOTO-PAINT

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Corel PHOTO-PAINT workspace tour 281

Corel PHOTO-PAINT

workspace tour

Becoming familiar with the terminology and workspace of Corel PHOTO-PAINT

helps you follow the concepts and procedures found in the user guide and in the Help

that is available through the application window.

In this section, you'll learn about

Corel PHOTO-PAINT terms

the application window

•the toolbars

•the toolbox

the property bar

the dockers

•the color palette

•the status bar

Corel PHOTO-PAINT terms

Before you get started in Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you should be familiar with the

following terms.

Term Description

Channel An 8-bit grayscale image that stores color or mask

information for an image

Editable area An editable area of a mask allows paint and effects to

be applied to a selected area of an image

Image A file you open or create in Corel PHOTO-PAINT

Lens An object layer that protects part or all of an image

when you perform color and tonal corrections

Mask A mask can be applied to an image during image

editing to define protected areas and editable areas

282 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

For more terms and definitions, see the glossary in the Help.

Exploring the application window

The Corel PHOTO-PAINT application window contains elements that help you access

the tools and commands you need to view and edit images. Application commands are

accessible through the menu bar, toolbox, property bar, toolbars, or dockers.

The application window contains the following main components.

Object An independent bitmap that is layered above the

background image

Path A series of line and curve segments connected by

adjustable endpoints called nodes

Thumbnails A miniature, low-resolution version of an image

Component Description

1. Toolbox A bar that contains tools for editing, creating, and

viewing images. The toolbox also contains the color

control area which lets you select colors and fills.

2. Title bar The area on the image window displaying the title of

the image

3. Property bar A detachable bar containing commands that change

according to the active tool

4. Menu bar The area containing drop-down menus with

commands grouped by category

5. Toolbar (standard) A bar that contains shortcuts to some menus and

other basic commands, such as opening, saving, and

printing

6. Image window The area in which the image displays. Although more

than one image window can be open at the same time,

you can apply commands to the active image window

only.

Term Description

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Corel PHOTO-PAINT workspace tour 283

Circled numbers correspond to the numbers in the following table, which

describes the main components of the application window.

Part Description

7. Status bar An area that displays image information, system

information, and tips

8. Navigator A button that lets you view a thumbnail of the entire

image so you can focus the image window on a specific

area. The Navigator is only available if you have areas

that exceed the image window.

9. Docker A window that provides access to additional

commands and image information. Some dockers

provide a visual display area. The Hints and Objects

dockers are displayed by default.

10. Color palette A dockable bar that contains color swatches

284 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

You can customize many of the elements in the application window to suit your

workflow. For information about customizing Corel PHOTO-PAINT, see "Customizing

Corel PHOTO-PAINT" in the Help.

Toolbars

Toolbars consist of buttons that are shortcuts to menu commands. The standard toolbar

consists of commonly used commands. The table below outlines the buttons on the

standard toolbar.

Press this button To

Start a new image

Open an image

Save an image

Print an image

Cut selected objects to the Clipboard

Copy selected objects to the Clipboard

Paste the Clipboard contents into an image

Undo the last action

Redo the last action

Import an image

Export an image

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Corel PHOTO-PAINT workspace tour 285

In addition to the standard toolbar, Corel PHOTO-PAINT has toolbars for specific

kinds of tasks. For example, if you frequently work with masks, you can display the

Mask/object toolbar. Unlike the property bar, the contents of a toolbar remain the

same.

For information about moving and re-sizing toolbars, and changing which toolbars

display by default, see "To customize toolbar position and display" in the Help. You can

also create a custom toolbar to include the tools and commands you use most often. For

information about creating custom toolbars, see "Customizing toolbars" in the Help.

To hide or display a toolbar

•Click Window ` To o l b a r s , and click a toolbar.

A check mark next to a toolbar name indicates that the toolbar is displayed in the

image window.

Change the zoom level

Display a full-screen preview

Show or hide the image slicing grid

Show or hide the mask marquee

Show or hide the object marquee

Clear a mask

Invert a mask

Start Corel applications

Open the Welcome screen

Press this button To

286 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Toolbox

The toolbox contains tools for editing, creating, and viewing images. Some of the tools

are visible by default, while others are groupe d in flyouts. Flyouts open to display a set

of related tools.

A small flyout arrow in the bottom-right corner of a toolbox button indicates a flyout.

The last tool used in a flyout displays in the toolbox. You can access the tools in a flyout

by clicking the small black arrow that appears in the bottom, right corner of a toolbox

button. After you open one flyout, you can easily scan the contents of other flyouts by

hovering over any of the toolbox buttons that have flyout arrows.

Flyouts function like toolbars when you drag them away from the toolbox. This lets you

view all the related tools while you work.

In the default workspace, clicking the flyout arrow on the Red-eye Removal

tool opens the To u c h u p flyout.

In addition to the tools, the color control area displays in the toolbox. The color control

area lets you choose colors and fills.

The following tables provide descriptions of the tools and the color control area.

Tools

Pick tools

The Object pick tool lets you select an object.

The Mask transform tool lets you change the

appearance of editable areas.

Flyout arrow

Toolbox

Flyout

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Corel PHOTO-PAINT workspace tour 287

Mask tools

The Rectangle mask tool lets you define rectangular

editable areas.

The Ellipse mask tool lets you define elliptical

editable areas.

The Freehand mask tool lets you define irregularly

shaped or polygonal editable areas.

The Lasso mask tool lets you define editable areas

that are irregular in shape and surrounded by pixels of

similar colors.

The Magnetic mask tool lets you detect edges of

elements in your image, that is, the outline of areas

that are in contrasting color to their surroundings, and

place the mask marquee along that edge.

The Magic wand mask tool lets you define irregularly

shaped editable areas that include all adjacent pixels

that are similar in color to the pixel you first select.

The Brush mask tool lets you define an editable area

by brushing an area as if you were painting.

Crop tool

The Crop tool lets you remove unwanted areas and

straighten crooked images.

Zoom tools

The Zoom tool lets you change the magnification

level in the image window.

The Pan tool lets you drag areas of an image into view

when the image is larger than its window.

Eyedropper tool

The Eyedropper tool lets you choose colors from an

image.

288 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Eraser tool

The Eraser tool lets you erase image areas or object

areas to reveal the object or background underneath.

Text tool

The Te x t tool lets you add text to your image and edit

existing text.

Touch-up tools

The Red-eye removal tool lets you remove the red-

eye effect from the eyes of subjects in photos.

The Clone tool lets you duplicate part of an image

and apply it to another part of the same image or to

another image.

The Touch-up brush tool lets you remove

imperfections, such as tears, scratch marks, and

wrinkles, from an image by blending its textures and

colors.

Shape tools

The Rectangle tool lets you draw square or

rectangular shapes.

The Ellipse tool lets you draw circular or elliptical

shapes.

The Polygon tool lets you draw polygons.

The Line tool lets you draw single or joined straight

line segments using the foreground color.

The Path tool lets you create and edit paths.

Fill tools

The Fill tool lets you fill areas with one of four fill

types: uniform, fountain, bitmap, and texture.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Corel PHOTO-PAINT workspace tour 289

The Interactive fill tool lets you apply a gradient fill

to the entire image, object, or selection.

Brush tools

The Paint tool lets you paint on an image using the

foreground color.

The Effect tool lets you perform local color and tonal

corrections on the image.

The Image sprayer tool lets you load one or more

images and paint them on your image.

The Undo brush tool lets you restore image areas to

how they looked before your last brushstroke.

The Replace color brush tool lets you replace the

foreground color in your image with the background

color.

Interactive/Transparency tools

The Interactive drop shadow tool lets you add

shadows to objects.

The Interactive object transparency tool lets you

make the colors of an object fade gradually towards

the image background color.

The Color transparency tool lets you make pixels

with a specific color value in an object transparent.

The Object transparency brush tool lets you brush

areas on an object to make them more transparent.

Image slicing tool

The Image slicing tool lets you cut a large image into

smaller sections that can be modified for the Web.

290 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Property bar

The property bar displays commonly used commands that are relevant to the active

tool. Unlike toolbars, the contents of the property bar change depending on which tool

is active. For example, when you use the Te x t tool, the contents of the property bar

change to display text-related settings such as font type, font size, and alignment.

More advanced options for the active tool can be accessed on the extended property bar.

A button with a double arrow at the end of the property bar lets you open or close the

extended property bar.

To open or close the extended property bar

Dockers

Dockers display controls, such as command buttons, options, and list boxes. Some

dockers also include additional visual information about the tools or image elements.

You can keep dockers open while you work on an image.

Color control area

The Color control area lets you choose colors and fills.

It consists of three swatches: a Foreground color

swatch, a Background color swatch, and a Fill color

swatch. The arrow lets you swap the foreground color

and background color, and the Reset color icon lets

you return to the default colors.

To Do the following

Open the extended property bar Click the Open advanced options

button .

Close the extended property bar Click the Close advanced options

button .

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Corel PHOTO-PAINT workspace tour 291

You can attach, or dock, dockers to either side of the application window, or you can

float, or undock, them so you can move them as you work in the application window.

You can also minimize dockers to save valuable screen space. If you open more than one

docker at a time, the windows stack on top of each other and tabs display so you can

quickly access the docker you want.

An example of a docker is the Objects docker. The Objects docker displays thumbnails

of the image background and each object layer, as well as command buttons and options

related to objects.

To open a docker

•Click Window ` Dockers, and click a docker.

Color palette

A color palette is a collection of color swatches. You can choose fill and outline colors by

using the default color palette, which contains 99 colors from the CMYK color model.

The selected fill and outline colors appear in the color swatches on the status bar.

Status bar

The status bar displays information about the image, system memory, and the active

tool. You can change the type of information that displays to help you with your current

task. For example, if you are working with images that have different dimensions, you

can display the dimension of the current image.

You can also customize the status bar by adding command buttons. For information

about customizing the status bar, see "Customizing the status bar" in the Help.

To change the type of information displayed on the status bar

Click the arrow on the status bar, and click one of the following:

• File size

• Current tool

• Document dimension

• Color mode

• Memory

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Bringing images into Corel PHOTO-PAINT 293

Bringing images into

Corel PHOTO-PAINT

You can bring images into Corel PHOTO-PAINT in a variety of ways.

In this section, you'll learn about

opening images

•importing files

acquiring images from scanners and digital cameras

creating images

For information about bringing raw cam era files into Corel PHOTO-PAINT, see

"Bringing raw camera files into Corel PHOTO-PAINT" on page 402.

Opening images

You can open most bitmaps in Corel PHOTO-PAINT. Each image you open appears in

its own image window.

To open an image

1Click File ` Open.

2Locate the folder where the file is stored

3Click a filename.

If necessary, you can search for an image by using the search box. You can search by

filename, title, subject, author, keyword, or comment.

To search for user-identified tags with Windows XP, you must have Windows

Desktop Search installed on your computer.

4Click Open.

294 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

You can also

Detect a watermark Enable the Check for watermark check

box.

This option is not available for all file

formats.

Remove unwanted areas from an

image as you open it

(Windows Vista) In the Open list box, click

Crop and load.

(Windows XP) In the Files of type list box,

click Crop .

Decrease the dimensions of an

image as you open it

(Windows Vista) In the Open list box, click

Resample and load.

(Windows XP) In the Files of type list box,

click Resample .

Access a previous version of a file

(Windows Vista)

Do one of the following:

•Click the arrow button next to the Open

button, and click Show previous

versions.

•Right-click a file, and click Restore

previous versions.

You can access a previous version of a file

only if System Protection is turned on.

For detailed information about accessing

previous versions of files, see the Windows

Vista Help.

Display object names and notes

correctly in an image that was

created in an earlier version of

Corel PHOTO-PAINT

(Windows Vista) Choose the corresponding

option from the Select code page list box.

(Windows XP) Choose the corresponding

option from the Code page list box.

This option is not available for all file

formats.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Bringing images into Corel PHOTO-PAINT 295

Importing files

Corel PHOTO-PAINT provides filters that convert files from one format to another

when you import them. You can import a file and place it in the active application

window as an object. The imported file becomes part of the active image.

To import a file into an active image

1Click File ` Import.

2Locate the folder where the file is stored.

If necessary, you can search for an image by using the search box. You can search by

filename, title, subject, author, keyword, comment, bitmap name, or object name.

To search for user-identified tags with Windows XP, you must have Windows

Desktop Search installed on your computer.

3Choose a file format from the list box next to the File name box (Windows Vista)

or the Files of type list box (Windows XP).

If you are not sure about the format of the file you want to import, choose All file

formats.

4Click a filename.

5Click Import.

6Click the image window.

You can also

Save the embedded International Color

Consortium (ICC) profile

Enable the Extract embedded ICC profile

check box to save the ICC profile to the color

folder in which the application is installed.

Check for watermark or copyright

information

Enable the Check for watermark check

box.

Use the filter's default settings without

opening its dialog box

Enable the Do not show filter dialog check

box.

296 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Acquiring images from sca nners and digital cameras

You can scan images and load photos from digital cameras into Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT supports scanners an d digital cameras that use Microsoft®

Windows® Image Acquisition (WIA), which provides a standard interface for loading

images.

If your scanner or digital camera does not support WIA, you can use the scanner's or

digital camera's TWAIN driver for loading images. The software interfaces and options

vary. For information about using your scanner's and digital camera's software, see the

manufacturer's documentation.

For more detailed information about bringing in raw camera files, see "Bringing raw

camera files into Corel PHOTO-PAINT" on page 402.

To scan images

1Click File ` Acquire image ` Select source .

2Choose your scanner from the Sources list.

A scanner may have both a WIA and a TWAIN driver source. If you are scanning

48-bit color images, you need to select the TWAIN driver.

3Click Select.

4Click File ` Acquire image ` Acquire .

If your scanner does not support WIA, you are presented with the scanner's

TWAIN driver interface for loading images. Options vary, depending on the

scanner.

5Preview the image, and select the area that you want to scan.

6Click Scan.

On your scanner's interface, this button may have a different name, such as OK or

Send.

To load photos from a digital camera

1Connect a digital camera to your computer.

2Click File ` Acquire image ` Select source .

3Choose a digital camera from the Sources box.

A digital camera may have both a WIA or TWAIN driver source.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Bringing images into Corel PHOTO-PAINT 297

4Click File ` Acquire image ` Acquire .

5Choose the images you want to load from the dialog box that appears.

If your digital camera does not support WIA, you are presen ted with the digital

camera's TWAIN driver interface for loading images. Options vary, depending on

the digital camera.

6Click Get pictures.

On your digital camera's interface, this button may have a different name.

Creating images

You can produce original artwork by creating an image from scratch, or by duplicating

an existing image. You can also use data copied to the Clipboard from another image

window or another application.

To create an image from scratch

1Click File ` New .

2Choose a color mode from the Color mode list box.

3Open the Background color picker, and click a color for the background.

4Choose a size from the Size list box.

5Enable one of the following options:

• Portrait

• Landscape

6Choose a value from the Resolution list box.

7Click OK.

To create an image from a duplicate

1Click Image ` Duplicate.

2Type a filename in the As box.

If you want to combine the objects and background in the new image, enable the

Merge objects with background check box.

To create an image by using the Clipboard contents

•Click File ` New from Clipboard.

298 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Need more information?

For more information about bringing images into Corel PHOTO-PAINT, see

"Bringing images into Corel PHOTO-PAINT " in the "Getting started" section

of the Help.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Displaying images and image information 299

Displaying images and image

information

You can change the appearance of windows and the magnification level of an image.

Changing the magnification level allows you to view specific image areas and makes

image editing easier.

In this section, you'll learn about

viewing images

• zooming

viewing image information

Viewing images

Images can be viewed in a number of different ways. You can hide windows, the toolbox

and the toolbars, leaving only the menu bar and the image windows visible. You can

view a large representation of an image in a full-screen preview.

You can view image areas that fall outside the image window. For example, when you

are working at a high magnification level or with large images, you can pan or jump to

a different image area without having to adjust the magnification level.

You can select the image area to be displayed in the image window by using the

Navigator pop-up.

300 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To hide windows, the toolbox, and toolbars

•Click Window ` Hide windows.

If you want to return to normal view, right-click in the workspace, and click Show

windows.

To view a full-screen preview of an image

•Click View ` Full-screen preview .

If you want to return to normal view, press any key or click the screen.

To view an image area that falls outside the image window

If you have a mouse wheel or compliant device, you can scroll vertically by

pressing Alt while you move the wheel, or you can scroll horizontally by

pressing Ctrl while you move the wheel.

Image areas that fall outside the image window can be dragged into view by

using the Pan tool. This photo has been dragged from its original position (top

left) toward the right (top right). The inset below shows the entire image.

To Do the following

Pan to another area of the image In the toolbox, click the Pan tool . Drag the image

until the area you want to view appears in the image

window.

Jump to another area of the image Click the Navigator pop-up at the lower-right

corner of the image window. Drag the rectangle to the

area of the image you want to view.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Displaying images and image information 301

To establish the default setting for the mouse wheel

1Click To o l s ` Options.

2In the list of categories, click Works p a c e , and click Display .

3To specify the default action of the mouse wheel, choose Zoom or Scroll from the

Default action for mouse wheel menu.

4Click OK.

Zooming

By default, images are displayed at 100% magnification; however, you can zoom in to

get a closer look at image detail or zoom out to view a larger portion of the image. You

can also specify the magnification level at which images open.

To zoom

In the toolbox, click the Zoom tool .

You can also zoom in to or out fr om the image by using a mouse wheel.

Viewing image information

You can view image properties, such as name, file format, and file size.

You can view information about image areas, such as pointer coordinates, as you work.

You can view the changes in the x-coordinate (X) or the y-coordinate (Y) as you move

To Do the following

Zoom in Click the image where you want to magnify it.

Zoom in to a specific area Drag across the area you want to magnify.

Zoom out Right-click in the image window.

Switch between the current and

previous zoom levels

Click the Zoom to previous button on the

property bar.

Zoom in or out by a preset level Choose a magnification level from the Zoom list box

on the property bar.

302 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

the pointer in the image window. You can also make note of the angle (A) and distance

(D) that the pointer moves in the image window as you draw a shape or define an

editable area. In addition, you can obtain st atistics related to the x- and y-coordinates

of the center position (C) and the radius (R) when you create or select a circular editable

area or shape.

You can also view color information for an image area that corresponds to the pointer

position. By default, the RGB, Hex, and CMYK values are displayed. You can choose

to display color information in two color models at once. For example, you can view

both the grayscale and RGB values of a particular image area.

To view image information

•Click File ` Document properties .

To view information about image areas

•Click Window ` Dockers ` Info.

By default, the Image info palette lists the RGB, Hex, and CMYK values from

top to bottom.

You can also view color mode information by clicking the Eyedropper tool ,

and pointing to an image area.

You can also

Choose a new color model Click the top flyout arrow , choose a color level, and

click a color model.

Change the units of measurement

used to display image information

Click the bottom flyout arrow, and click a unit of

measurement.

Need more information?

For more information about viewing images and obtaining image information,

see "Displaying images and image information" in the "Getting started" section

of the Help.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Cropping and changing orientation 303

Cropping and changing orientation

You can crop an image to remove unwanted areas or combine multiple images to

create a single, large image. You can also change the orientation of an image by

flipping it or rotating it.

In this section, you'll learn about

cropping images

straightening images

rotating and flipping images

Cropping images

You can crop an image to remove unwanted areas and improve its composition.

Cropping allows you to select a rectangular area that you want to keep and discard the

rest. As a result, you reduce the file size of an image without affecting its resolution.

Cropping lets you remove unwanted image areas.

304 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Corel PHOTO-PAINT also lets you crop around the editable area of a mask; however,

the resulting image is always rectangular. For information about masks, see "Working

with masks" on page 355.

To crop an image

1Click the Crop tool .

2Drag to select an area on the image.

3Double-click inside the cropping area.

You can also crop an image area by clicking the Crop tool and typing values

in the Size and Position boxes on the property bar.

To crop to an editable area of a mask

1Define an editable area on an image.

2Click Image ` Crop ` Crop to mask.

Straightening images

The Straighten image dialog box lets you straighten bitmap images quickly. This

feature is useful for straightening photos that were taken or scanned at an angle.

You can also

Enlarge or reduce the cropping area Drag the cropping handles.

Move the cropping area Click and drag inside the cropping area to

reposition it.

Rotate the cropping area to straighten it Click inside the cropping area to display the

rotation handles . Drag the rotation

handles to align the cropping area with the

image area you want to crop.

Expand the cropping area outside the

original image

Click Image ` Crop ` Expand , and drag a

cropping handle outside the image.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Cropping and changing orientation 305

Straighten image dialog box

The Straighten image dialog box lets you rotate an image by moving a slider, typing

a rotation angle, or using the arrow keys. You can specify a custom rotation angle from

-15 to 15 degrees.

You can use the preview window to dynamically preview the adjustments that you are

making. If you want to change the orientation of the image before straightening it, you

can start by rotating the image 90 degrees clockwise and counterclockwise.

1. Preview window 6. Options for cropping and resampling

2. Rotation tools 7. Reset button

3. Pan tool 8. Grid

4. Zoom tools 9. Hint for active control

5. Rotate image controls 10. Grid control

306 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

A grid is displayed in the preview window to help you straighten the image. You can

more precise adjustments by controlling the cell size of the grid. To heighten the

contrast of the grid against the colors of the image, you can change the grid's color. You

can also hide the grid if you want to preview the final result with out the gridlines. In

addition, you can zoom in and out, and pan the image in the preview window to help

you evaluate the results.

By default, the straightened image is cropped to the cropping area that is displayed in

the preview window. The final image has the sa me aspect ratio as the original image,

but it has smaller dimensions. However, you can preserve the original width and height

of the image by cropping and resampling the image.

You can also produce an image at an angle by disabling cropping and then using the

Crop tool to crop the image in the drawing window. When cropping is disabled, the

straightened image appears against the background color.

Original image (left); straightened and cropped image (right)

To straighten an image

1Click Adjust ` Straighten image.

2Move the Rotate image slider, or type a value between 15 and -15 in the Rotate

image box.

3If necessary, move the Grid slider to adjust the size of the grid cells.

4To crop and straighten the image, enable the Crop image check box.

The image is cropped to preserve the aspect ratio of the original image, which

means that the final image is smaller than the original image.

If you want to preserve the width and height of the original image, enable the

Crop and resample to original size check box. The final image is resampled.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Cropping and changing orientation 307

Although a duotone image is displayed as a grayscale image in the preview

window of the Straighten image dialog box, the final image is duotone.

Rotating and flipping images

You can change the orientation of an image by flipping or rotating it in the image

window. You can flip an image horizontally or vertically to reposition a scanned image

or to create unique effects.

When you rotate an image, you can specify the angle and direction of rotation, as well

as the paper color that is visible after the image is rotated.

You can also

Change the grid color Choose a color from the Grid color picker.

Align an image area with a gridline Using the Pan tool , drag the image until

the area is aligned with the gridline.

You can use the Pan tool only after you

zoom in on the image.

Rotate the image 90 degrees in either

direction

Click the Rotate counterclockwise

button or the Rotate clockwise button .

Hide or display the grid Disable or enable the Grid check box.

Adjust the rotation angle by 0.1-degree

increments

Click in the Rotate image box, and press the

Up arrow or Down arrow key.

Reset the image to its original orientation Click Reset .

Zoom in or out Using the Zoom in or Zoom out

tool, click in the preview window.

Fit an image in the preview window Click the Zoom to fit button.

Display an image at its actual size Click the 100% button.

308 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

You can mirror an image by flipping it.

To flip an image

•Click Image ` Flip, and click one of the following:

• Flip horizontally

• Flip vertically

To rotate an image

1Click Image ` Rotate ` Rotate custom.

2Type a value in the Angle box.

3Enable one of the following options:

• Clockwise

• Counterclockwise

4Enable any of the following check boxes:

Maintain original image size — maintains the size of the original image

Anti-aliasing — smooths the edges in the image

5Open the Background color picker, and click a color.

You can rotate an image by clicking Image ` Rotate , and clicking 90°

Clockwise, 90° Counterclockwise, or 180° .

Need more information?

For more information about cropping, stitching, and changing orientation, see

"Cropping, stitching, and changing orientation" in the "Editing images" section

of the Help.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Working with color 309

Working with color

Corel PHOTO-PAINT lets you choose and create colors by using a wide variety of

industry-standard color palettes, color mixers, and color models. You can create and

edit custom color palettes to store frequently used colors for future use.

In this section, you'll learn about

choosing colors

using spot color channels

Choosing colors

You can choose background, foreground, and fill colors by using the color control area,

color palettes, sampling, color viewers, color harmonies, or color blends.

Color control area

In the color control area, you can view the selected foreground, background, and fill

colors, and you can choose new colors.

Default color palette

A color palette is a collection of color swatches. You can choose foreground,

background, and fill colors by using the default color palette, which contains 99 colors

from the RGB color model.

Fixed or custom color palettes

Fixed color palettes are provided by third-party manufacturers. Some examples of these

are HKS Colors, Focoltone, PANTONE, and TRUMATCH. It may be useful to have

on hand a manufacturer's swatch book, which is a collection of color samples that shows

exactly what each color looks like when printed.

Custom color palettes can include colors from any color model or fixed color palette.

You can save a custom color palette for future use. For more information about working

310 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

with custom color palettes, see "Creating custom color palettes" and "Opening and

editing custom color palettes" in the Help.

You can also choose colors by using color blends, color harmonies, and color viewers. For

more information, see "Choosing colors" in the Help.

Sampling colors

When you want to use a color that already exists in an object or image, you can sample

the color to achieve an exact match. By default, you sample a single pixel from the

image window.

When you sample a color from a photo, what looks to be a solid-colored area may

actually be subtly shaded or dithered. In this case, it is useful to average the colors of

pixels in a larger sample area. You can set the sample area to 3 × 3 pixels, or to 5 × 5

pixels for high-resolution images. You can also sample pixels in a selected area.

To choose a color by using the color control area

1In the color control area of the toolbox, double-click one of the following:

Foreground color swatch

Background color swatch

2Move the color slider to set the range of colors displayed in the color selection area.

3Click in the color selection area to choose a color.

To choose a color by using the default color palette

To choose a color by using a fixed or custom color palette

1In the color control area of the toolbox, double-click one of the following:

Foreground color swatch

Background color swatch

2Click the Palettes tab.

To Do the following

Choose a foreground color Click a color swatch.

Choose a background color Hold down Ctrl , and click a color swatch.

Choose a fill color Right-click a color swatch.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Working with color 311

3Choose a fixed or custom palette from the Palette list box.

4Move the color slider to set the range of colors displayed in the color selection area.

5Click a color in the color selection area.

You should use the same color model for all colors in an image; the colors will

be consistent, and you will be able to predict the colors of the final output more

accurately. It is preferable to use the same color model that you are using for

the final output.

To sample a color

1Click the Eyedropper tool .

2Click the image to choose a foreground color.

The default sample size is 1 pixel.

Using spot color channels

Spot color channels let you view, edit, and preserve spot color information in files.

Whether you are importing a file that uses spot colors or you add spot colors in

Corel PHOTO-PAINT, spot color channels ensure that your color information is

maintained when you output the file. The spot color is stored in an 8-bit grayscale

channel that preserves information such as wh ich spot color to use, where to apply the

ink, and at what density.

You can create a new spot color channel, assign a color and name to the channel, and

then add content. For example, you can pain t, draw shapes, apply effects, or paste

content onto the channel. When you paste an object or selection to a spot color channel,

it is added as an editable area. You can modify the editable area before you commit it to

You can also

Increase the sample size Click the Eyedropper 3 × 3 button on

the property bar.

Increase the sample size for a high-resolution

image

Click the Eyedropper 5 × 5 button on

the property bar.

Sample from a selected area Click the Eyedropper selection button

on the property bar.

312 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

the spot color channel. For more information about modifying editable areas, see

"Working with masks" on page 355.

When you preview your image, you can choose whether spot colors mix with underlying

colors (overprint) or cover underlying colors. This can be used to simulate opaque or

transparent inks.

You can also select, edit, and change the properties of existing spot color channels. For

example, if you open or import an image that contains spot color channels, you can edit

channel content, rename a channel, or change the spot color of a channel.

You can save your work to the CPT file form at if you will be doing further editing. You

can also save to the PSD file format or export to the DCS, PDF, or EPS file format if you

are ready to print.

To create a spot color channel

1In the Channels docker, click the flyout arrow and choose New spot color

channel.

If the Channels docker is not open, click Window ` Dockers ` Channels.

2In the New spot color channel dialog box, choose a color from the color picker.

3Type a name for the channel in the Name box if you do not want to use the spot

color name for the channel.

4From the Ink properties box, choose one of the following options:

Solid — Colors underneath do not affect the ink color unless the ink density is

less than 100 percent.

Tr a n s p a r e n t — Colors underneath show through. This option lets you preview

overprinting.

5Enable one of the following options:

Empty channel — creates an empty channel (no ink applied)

Fill with color — creates a channel filled with the ink color

6Click OK.

The new spot color channel appears in the Channel docker under the current

channels. The new spot color channel is displayed and other channels are hidden.

To select a spot color channel

•In the Channels docker, click a spot color channel in the Channels list.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Working with color 313

A red outline appears around the thumbnail for a channel when the channel is

selected.

To change the properties of a spot color channel

1In the Channels docker window, choose a spot color channel from the Channels

list.

2Click the flyout button in the top right corner of the docker, and click Channel

properties.

3In the Spot color channel properties dialog box, perform a task from the

following table.

To Do the following

Change the spot color Choose a color from the color picker.

Rename the channel Type a name in the Name box.

Change the ink properties From the Ink properties box, choose one of

the following options:

Solid — Colors underneath do not affect

the ink color unless the ink density is less

than 100 percent.

Tr a n s p a r e n t — Colors underneath show

through. This option lets you preview

overprinting.

Need more information?

For more information about working with color, see "Working with color" in the

"Color and fills" section of the Help.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Changing color modes 315

Changing color modes

Changing an image to another color mode, such as RGB, CMYK, or grayscale,

changes the image's color structure and size and can affect how the image displays and

prints.

In this section, you'll learn about

changing the color mode of images

converting images to the paletted color mode

Changing the color mode of images

In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, the colors of images are defined by color modes. Computer

monitors display images in the RGB color mode; images in Corel PHOTO-PAINT are

created in the RGB color mode by default.

Color modes are described by their component colors and bit depth. For example, the

RGB (24-bit) color mode is composed of red, green, and blue channels and has a bit

depth of 24 bits. Similarly, the CMYK (32-bit) color mode is composed of cyan,

magenta, yellow, and black channels and has a bit depth of 32 bits. Each channel has a

bit depth of 8 bits.

Although on the screen you may not be able to see the difference between an image in

the CMYK color mode and an image in the RGB color mode, the images are quite

different. Colors from the RGB color space can cover a greater range of the visual

spectrum (they have a larger gamut) than those from the CMYK color space. For the

same image dimensions, a CMYK image has a larger file size than an RGB image, but

it contains the channels necessary to print standard inks.

Each time you convert an image, you may lose color information. For this reason, you

should finish editing and then save an imag e before you convert it to a new color mode.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT supports the following color modes:

316 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To change the color mode of an image

•Click Image, and click one of the following:

• Convert to grayscale (8-bit)

• Convert to RGB color (24-bit)

• Convert to CMYK color (32-bit)

• Convert to ` Lab color (24-bit)

• Convert to ` Multichannel

• Convert to ` Grayscale (16-bit)

• Convert to ` RGB color (48-bit)

• Convert to ` NTSC RGB

• Convert to ` PAL RGB

Converting images to the paletted color mode

The paletted color mode, also called indexed color mode, is frequently used for GIF

images on the Web. When you convert a complex image to the paletted color mode, a

fixed color value is assigned to each pixel. These values are stored in a compact color

table, or palette. As a result, the paletted image contains less data than the original, and

it has a smaller file size. Paletted color mode is an 8-bit mode that stores and displays

images using up to 256 colors.

Choosing, editing, and saving a color palette

When you change an image to the paletted color mode, you use a predefined or a

custom color palette and then edit the palette by replacing individual colors. If you

choose the Optimized color palette, you can also edit the palette by specifying a range

sensitivity color. The color palette you use to convert the image is called the processed

color palette, and it can be saved for use with other images.

Black-and-white (1-bit) Grayscale (8-bit)

Duotone (8-bit) Paletted (8-bit)

RGB color (24-bit) Lab color (24-bit)

CMYK color (32-bit) Multichannel

Grayscale (16-bit) RGB color (48-bit)

NTSC RGB (video) PAL RGB (video)

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Changing color modes 317

Dithering

Paletted images can only contain up to 256 different colors. If the original image

contains many colors, you can use dithering to create the illusion of seeing more than

256 colors. Dithering creates additional colors and shades from an existing palette by

interspersing pixels of different colors. The relationship of one colored pixel to another

creates an optical mix, so you perceive additional colors.

Dithering can be done by distributing colors either regularly or randomly. Ordered

dithering approximates color blends using regular dot patterns; as a result, solid colors

are emphasized and edges appear harder. Error diffusion scatters pixels randomly,

making edges and colors softer. Jarvis, Stucki and Floyd-Steinberg are methods of error

diffusion.

If your image contains only a few colors and simple shapes, you do not need to use

dithering.

To convert an image to the paletted color mode

1Click Image ` Convert to paletted (8-bit).

2Click the Options tab.

3Choose one of the following color palette types from the Palette list box:

Uniform — provides a range of 256 colors wi th equal parts of red, green, and

blue

Standard VGA — provides the Standard VGA 16-color palette

Adaptive — provides colors original to the image, and preserves the individual

colors (the entire color spectrum) in the image

Optimized — creates a color palette based on the highest percentage of colors in

the image. You can also select a range sensitivity color for the color palette.

Black Body — contains colors that are based on temperature. For example,

black may represent cold temperatures, while red, orange, yellow, and white may

represent hot temperatures.

Grayscale — provides 256 shades of gray, ranging from black (0) to white (255)

System — provides a palette of Websafe and grayscale colors

Web sa fe — provides a palette of 216 colors that are common to Web browsers

4Choose a dithering option from the Dithering list box.

5Move the Dither intensity slider to adjust the amount of dithering.

318 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

The Ordered dithering option applies more quickly than do the error

diffusion options Jarvis, Stucki, and Floyd-Steinberg; however, it is less

accurate.

You can choose a custom color palette by clicking the Options tab, clicking

Open, locating the color palette file you want, and double-clicking the

filename.

You can also

Save the conversion options as a preset Click Add preset , and type a name in

the Save preset box.

Edit the processed color palette Click the Processed palette tab, and click

Edit. In the Color table dialog box, edit the

color palette.

Save the processed color palette Click the Processed palette tab, and click

Save. Choose the folder where you want to

save the processed color palette, and type a

filename.

Need more information?

For more information about changing color modes, see "Changing color modes"

in the "Color and fills" section of the Help.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Adjusting color and tone 319

Adjusting color and tone

To improve the quality of an image, you can improve the image's color and tone. You

can correct color casts, balance excessive darkness or lightness, or alter specific colors.

In this section, you'll learn about

using the Image Adjustment Lab

using individual color-adjustment effects and tools

using the Tone Curve filter

working with color channels

Using the Image Adjustment Lab

The Image Adjustment Lab lets you correct the color and tone of most photos quickly

and easily.

The Image Adjustment Lab consists of automatic and manual controls, which are

organized in a logical order for image correction. By starting in the upper-right corner

and working your way down, you can select only the controls you need to correct the

problems specific to your imag e. It is best to crop or retouch any areas of the image

before beginning the color and tone corrections. For information about cropping and

retouching images, see "Cropping images" on page 303 and "Retouching" on page 337.

While you work in the Image Adjustment Lab, you can take advantage of the following

features:

Create snapshot — You can capture the corrected version of an image in a

"snapshot" at any time. Thumbnails of the snapshots appear in a window below the

image. Snapshots make it easy to compare different corrected versions of the image

so you can choose the best one.

Undo , Redo , and Reset to original — Image correction can be a trial and error

process, so the ability to undo and redo corrections is important. The Reset to

original command lets you clear all corrections so that you can start again.

320 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Using automatic controls

You can begin by using the automatic correction controls:

Auto adjust — automatically corrects the contrast and color in an image by

detecting the lightest and darkest areas and adjusting the tonal range for each color

channel. In some cases, this control may be all you need to improve an image. In

other cases, you can undo the changes and proceed with more precise controls.

Select white point tool — automatically adjusts the contrast in an image

according to the white point that you set. For example, you can brighten an image

that is too dark by using the Select white point tool.

1. Rotation tools 5. Select white point 9. Sliders

2. Pan tool 6. Select black point 10. Hint for current tool

3. Zoom tools 7. Undo, Redo, and Reset 11. Histogram

4. Preview Modes 8. Snapshots

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Adjusting color and tone 321

Select black point tool — automatically adjusts the contrast in an image

according to the black point that you set. For example, you can darken an image

that is too light by using the Select black point tool.

Using color correction controls

After using the automatic controls, you can correct color casts in your image. Color casts

are typically caused by the lighting conditions when a photo is taken, and they can be

influenced by the processor in your digital camera or scanner.

Te m p e r a t u r e slider — lets you correct color ca sts by "warming" or "cooling" the

color in an image to compensate for the li ghting conditions at the time the photo

was taken. For example, to correct a yellow color cast caused by taking a photo

indoors in dim incandescent lighting, you can move the slider toward the blue end

to increase the temperature values (based on degrees Kelvin). Lower values

correspond to low lighting conditions, such as candlelight or light from an

incandescent light bulb; these conditions cause an orange cast. Higher values

correspond to intense lighting conditions, such as sunlight; these conditions cause a

blue cast.

Tint slider — lets you correct color casts by adjusting the green or magenta in an

image. You can add green by moving the slider to the right; you can add magenta

by moving the slider to the left. Moving the Tint slider after using the

Te m p e r a t u r e slider lets you fine-tune an image.

Saturation slider — lets you adjust the vividness of colors. For example, by moving

the slider to the right, you can increase the vividness of a blue sky in an image. By

moving the slider to the left, you can reduce the vividness of colors. You can create

a black-and-white photo effect by moving the slider all the way to the left, so that

all color in the image is removed.

Adjusting brightness and contrast across the entire image

You can brighten, darken, or improve the contrast in an image by using the following

controls:

Brightness slider — lets you brighten or darken an entire image. This control can

correct exposure problems caused by too much light (overexposure) or too little

light (underexposure) at the time the photo was taken. If you want to lighten or

darken specific areas of an image, you can use the Highlights , Shadows , and

Midtones sliders. Adjustment made by the Brightness slider is nonlinear, so the

current white point and black point values are not affected.

Contrast slider — increases or decreases the difference in tone between the dark

and light areas of an image. Moving the slider to the right makes the light areas

322 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

lighter and the dark areas darker. For example, if the image has a dull, gray tone,

you can sharpen the detail by increasing the contrast.

Adjusting the brightness and contrast of an image can reveal more image

detail.

Adjusting highlights, shadows, and midtones

You can brighten or darken specific areas of an image. In many cases, the position or

strength of the lighting at the time a phot o is taken causes some areas to appear too

dark and other areas to appear too light.

Highlights slider — lets you adjust brightness in the lightest areas of an image.

For example, if you take a photo with a flash, and the flash washes out the

foreground subjects, you can move the Highlights slider to the left to darken the

washed-out areas of the image. You can use the Highlights slider in conjunction

with the Shadows and Midtones sliders to balance the lighting.

Shadows slider — lets you adjust the brightne ss in the darkest areas of an image.

For example, a bright light behind a photo subject (backlighting) at the time a

photo is taken can cause the subject to appear in shadow. You can correct the photo

by moving the Shadow slider to the right to lighten the dark areas and reveal more

detail. You can use the Shadows slider in conjunction with the Highlights and

Midtones sliders to balance the lighting.

Midtones slider — lets you adjust the brig htness of the midrange tones in an

image. After adjusting the highlights and shadows, you can use the Midtones

slider to fine-tune the image.

The Highlights and Shadows sliders can lighten or darken specific areas of

an image.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Adjusting color and tone 323

Using the histogram

The histogram lets you view the tonal range of an image to help you evaluate and adjust

the color and tone. For more information about the histogram, see "Using histograms"

on page 326.

Viewing images in the Image Adjustment Lab

The tools in the Image Adjustment Lab let you view images in various ways, so that you

can evaluate the color and tone adjustments you make. For example, you can rotate

images, pan to a new area, zoom in or out, and choose how to display the corrected

image in the preview window.

Using other adjustment filters

Although the Image Adjustment Lab lets you correct the color and tone of most images,

a specialized adjustment filter is sometimes required. Using the powerful adjustment

filters in Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can make precise adjustments to images. For

example, you can adjust images by using a histogram or a tone curve. For more

information about adjustment filters, see "Using individual color-adjustment effects

and tools" on page 325.

To use the Image Adjustment Lab

1Click Adjust ` Image Adjustment Lab.

2Click Auto adjust.

Auto adjust automatically adjusts color and contrast by setting the white point

and black point for an image.

If you want to control the white point and black point setting more precisely, click

the Select white point tool , and click the lightest area of your image. Then

click the Select black point tool , and click the darkest area of your image.

3Perform one or more tasks from the following table.

To Do the following

Correct color in the image Adjust the Te m p e r a t u r e slider to warm or

cool the colors, and then fine-tune the color

correction by adjusting the Tint slider.

324 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

You can capture the current version of your image by clicking the Create

snapshot button. Thumbnails of the snapshots appear in a window below your

image. Each snapshot is numbered sequentially and can be deleted by clicking

the close button in the upper right corner of the snapshot title bar.

You can undo or redo the last correction you made by clicking the Undo

button or Redo button . To undo all corrections, click the Reset to

original button.

To view images in the Image Adjustment Lab

1Click Adjust ` Image Adjustment Lab.

2Perform a task from the following table.

Make colors more vivid or less vivid Move the Saturation slider to the right to

increase the amount of color in the image;

move the slider to the left to decrease the

amount of color in the image.

Brighten or darken an image Move the Brightness slider to the right to

lighten the image; move the slider to the left

to darken the image.

Improve image sharpness by adjusting tone Move the Contrast slider to the right to

make the light areas lighter and the dark

areas darker.

Brighten or darken specific areas Adjust the Highlights slider to brighten or

darken the lightest areas of the image. Then,

adjust the Shadows slider to lighten or

darken the darkest areas of the image.

Finally, adjust the Midtones slider to fine-

tune the midrange tones in the image.

To Do the following

Rotate the image Click the Rotate left button or Rotate

right button .

To Do the following

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Adjusting color and tone 325

Using individual color-adjustment effects and tools

Corel PHOTO-PAINT provides you with filters (adjustment effects) and tools to make

adjustments to the color and tone of images. When you adjust the color and tone, you

adjust elements such as hue, saturation, brightness, contrast, or intensity. If you want

to adjust the color and tone of the entire image, you can apply an adjustment filter

directly to the image or apply a lens which exists on a separate object layer and can be

edited without changing the original image. For information about lenses, see

"Working with lenses" on page 347.

You can adjust part of an image by editing the size and shape of a lens or by creating an

editable area before applying an adjustment filter. For information about editable areas,

see "Working with masks" on page 355.

Before you start working with individual filters, try using the Image Adjustment Lab.

For information about the Image Adjustment Lab, see "Using the Image Adjustment

Lab" on page 319.

Pan to another area of an image Using the Pan tool , drag the image until

the area you want to see is visible.

Zoom in and out Using the Zoom in tool or Zoom out

tool , click in the preview window.

Fit an image in the preview window Click the Zoom to fit button.

Display an image at its actual size Click the 100% button.

View the corrected image in a single preview

window

Click the Full preview button .

View the corrected image in one window and

the original image in another window

Click the Before and after full preview

button .

View the image in one window with a

divider between the original and corrected

versions

Click the Before and after split preview

button . Move your pointer over the

dashed divider line, and drag to move the

divider to another area of the image.

To Do the following

326 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Choosing color and tone filters

Some filters adjust an image automatically, while others give you various degrees of

control. For example, the Auto adjust filter adjusts the tonal range across all color

channels automatically, while the To n e c u r v e filter lets you use separate color channels

to pinpoint and adjust tone or color. More advanced filters, such as the To n e c u r v e filter

and the Contrast enhancement filter, are precise and can correct many different

problems, but using them requires practice.

Using histograms

You can view the tonal range of an image by using a histogram to evaluate and adjust

the color and tone. For example, a histogram can help you detect hidden detail in a

photo that is too dark because of underexposure (a photo taken with insufficient light).

A histogram has a horizontal bar chart that plots the brightness values of the pixels in

your image on a scale of 0 (dark) to 255 (light). The left part of the histogram represents

the shadows of an image, the middle part represents the midtones, and the right part

represents the highlights. The height of the spikes indicates how many pixels are at each

brightness level. For example, a large number of pixels in the shadows (the left side of

the histogram) indicates the presence of image detail in the dark areas of the image.

A histogram is available with the following filters:

Contrast enhancement

Histogram equalization

Sample/Target balance

•Tone Curve

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Adjusting color and tone 327

Each photo above has a different exposure: average (top), overexposed (middle),

underexposed (bottom). The histograms for each photo (on the right) show how

the pixels are distributed, from dark to light. In an average photo, pixels are

more evenly distributed across the tonal range.

Adjusting color and tone by using brush effects

You can adjust the brightness, contrast, hue or saturation in part of an image by

applying brush effects. For example, if you want to lighten one object in a photo, you

can use the Brightness tool to lighten the area you want without affecting the

surrounding area.

You can use preset brushes or create a custom brush. For more information, see

"Creating custom brushes" in the Help.

To adjust image color and tone

1Click Adjust , and click an adjustment filter.

2Specify the settings you want in the dialog box.

328 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To adjust image color and tone by using brush effects

1Select an object or the background image.

2In the toolbox, click the Effect tool .

3On the property bar, open the Effect tool picker, and click one of the following:

Brightness tool — brightens or darkens the image

Contrast tool — increases or decreases the contrast

Hue tool — shifts all hues along the color wheel by the number of degrees

that you specify in the Amount box

Hue replacer tool — retains the brightness and saturation of the original

colors, but replaces all hues with the current paint color

Sponge tool — saturates or desaturates the colors

Dodge/Burn tool — brightens (overexposes) or darkens (underexposes) the

image

Tint tool uses the current paint color to tint the image

4Choose a preset brush from the Brush type list box on the property bar.

If you want to customize the brush, spec ify the settings you want on the property

bar.

5Drag in the image window.

Using the Tone Curve filter

The To n e c u r v e filter lets you perform color and tonal corrections by adjusting either

individual color channels or the composite channel (all channels combined). Individual

You can also

Increase the effect of a brush tool without

clicking multiple times

In the Brush settings docker, click the

Toggle cumulative button on the

Stroke attributes bar. This option is

available for only some of the Effect tools. If

the Brush settings docker is not open, click

Window ` Dockers ` Brush settings .

Apply the effect to both an object and the

background simultaneously

In the Brush settings docker, click the

Toggle merge source button on the

Dab attributes bar. This option is available

only when the Cumulative button is

disabled.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Adjusting color and tone 329

pixel values are plotted along a tone curve that appears in a graph and represents the

balance between shadows (bottom of graph), midtones (middle of graph), and

highlights (top of graph). The x-axis of the graph represents the tonal values of the

original image; the y-axis of the graph represents the adjusted tonal values.

The tone curve shows the balance between the shadows, midtones, and

highlights of an image. The original (x) and adjusted (y) pixel values are

displayed side by side when you drag the tone curve. This example shows a

small adjustment to the tonal range, in which pixel values of 152 are replaced

with pixel values of 141.

You can fix problem areas by adding nodes to the tone curve and dragging the curve. If

you want to adjust specific areas in an image, you can use the Eyedropper tool and

select the areas in the image window. You can then drag the nodes that appear on the

tone curve to achieve the effect you want.

Original image (left); the image with adjusted tonal range (right)

Highlights

Shadows

Midtones

Dynamic preview of

original and adjusted

values

330 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

The histogram lets you view the adjusted tonal range and evaluate the results. For more

information about histograms, see "U sing the histogram" on page 323.

To fine-tune your adjustments, you can choose a curve style from the Style list box. For

example, you can redraw the curve by using freehand lines or straight line segments.

You can adjust the color and tone of an image by applying a preset. To access a preset,

click the Open button to the right of the Presets box. You can also save tone settings

as presets to use with other images.

In addition, you can equalize the tonal range of an image by clicking Auto balance

tone. To specify the outlying pixels (clipped pixels) at each end of the tonal range, you

can click Settings and type values in the Auto-adjust range dialog box.

Working with color channels

You can adjust color and tone by making changes directly to the color channels of an

image. The number of color channels in an image depends on the number of

components in the color mode associated with the image. For example, black-and-

white, grayscale, duotone, and paletted images have only one color channel; RGB and

Lab images have three channels; and CMYK images have four color channels. For more

information about these color models, see "Understanding color models" in the Help.

Additional channels can be used to preserve any spot colors in an image. For information

about spot color channels, see "Using spot color channels" on page 311.

Displaying, mixing, and editing color channels

Although color channels represent the colored components of an image, they are

displayed by default as grayscale images in the image window. However, you can display

these channels in their respective colors so that the red channel is tinted red, the blue

channel is tinted blue, and so on.

You can mix color channels to balance the colors of an image. For example, if an image

has too much red, you can adjust the red channel in an RGB image to improve image

quality.

You can edit color channels the same way that you edit other grayscale images. For

example, you can select areas, apply paints and fills, add special effects or filters, and cut

and paste objects in the image channel.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Adjusting color and tone 331

Splitting and combining images by using color channels

You can split an image into a series of 8-bit grayscale image files — one for each color

channel of the color mode. Splitting an image into separate channel files lets you edit

one channel without affecting the others, save channel information before you convert

the image to another mode, or associate channels from one mode with another mode for

editing purposes. For example, if you have an oversaturated RGB image, you can reduce

the saturation by splitting the image into the HSB mode and reducing the saturation

of the (S) channel. When you finish editing the images, you can combine them into one

image. The images are combined automatically, with equal color values applied.

You can split an image into the following color channels.

To display color channels

•Click Window ` Dockers ` Channels.

You can display color channels by using their respective colors. Click To o l s `

Customization. In the Wor ksp a c e list of categories, click Display, and enable

the Tint screen color channels check box.

To mix color channels

1Click Adjust ` Channel mixer .

2Choose a color mode from the Color model list box.

3Choose an output channel from the Output channel list box.

Splitting mode Color channels created

RGB Red (R), green (G), blue (B)

CMYK Cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y),

black (K)

HSB Hue (H), saturation (S), brightness (B)

HLS Hue (H), lightness (L), saturation (S)

YIQ Luminance (Y), two chromaticity values (

I, Q)

Lab Luminosity (L), green/magenta (a),

blue/yellow (b)

332 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

4Move the sliders in the Input channels area.

To edit a color channel

1In the Channels docker, click the channel that you want to edit.

If the Channels docker is not open, click Window ` Dockers ` Channels.

2Edit the image.

To split an image by using color channels

•Click Image ` Split channels to, and click a color mode.

Images in the CMYK and Lab color modes must be split into their original

component channels.

To combine images by using color channels

1Click Image ` Combine channels.

2In the Mode area, choose a color mode option.

3In the Channel area, choose a channel option and click a filename from the Images

list to associate the channel with a file.

4Repeat step 3 until all the channels in the Channel area have been associated with

an image from the Images list.

Need more information?

For more information about adjusting the color and tone of images, see

"Adjusting color and tone" in the "Editing images" section of the Help.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Changing image dimensions, resolution, and paper size 333

Changing image dimensions,

resolution, and paper size

You can change the dimensions and resolution of an image. You can also change the

size of the paper border that surrounds an image.

In this section, you'll learn about

changing image dimensions

changing image resolution

changing paper size

Changing image dimensions

You can change the physical dimensions of images by increasing or decreasing their

height and width. When you increase image dimensions, the application inserts new

pixels between existing pixels, and their colors are based on the colors of adjacent pixels.

If you increase image dimensions significantly, images may appear stretched and

pixelated.

You can change the height and width of an image without changing the

resolution. Left to right: image with smaller dimensions, original image, image

with larger dimensions. Notice the pixelation of the enlarged image.

334 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To change the dimensions of an image

1Click Image ` Resample.

2Enable any of the following check boxes:

Anti-alias — smooths the edges in the image

Maintain aspect ratio — avoids distortion by maintaining the width-to-height

ratio of the image

3In the Image size area, type values in one of the following pairs of boxes:

Width and Height — let you specify the image dimensions

Width % and Height % — let you resize the image to a percentage of its

original size

When you change the dimensions of an image, you produce better results using

width and height values that are factors of the original values. For example,

reducing an image by 50 percent produces a better- looking image than does

reducing the size by 77 percent. When reducing an image by 50 percent, the

application removes every other pixel; to reduce an image by 77 percent, the

application must remove pixels irregularly.

Changing image resolution

You can change the resolution of an image to increase or decrease its file size. Resolution

is measured by the number of dots per in ch (dpi) when the image is printed. The

resolution you choose depends on how the image is output. Typically, images created

only for display on computer monitors are 96 or 72 dpi and images created for the Web

are 72 dpi. Images created for printing on desktop printers are generally 150 dpi, while

professionally printed images ar e usually 300 dpi, or higher.

Increasing resolution

Higher resolution images contain smaller and more densely packed pixels than lower-

resolution images. Upsampling increases the resolution of an image by adding more

pixels per unit of measure. Image quality may be reduced because the new pixels are

interpolated based on the colors of neighboring pixels; the original pixel information is

simply spread out. You cannot use upsampling to create detail and subtle color

gradations where none existed in the original image. When you increase image

resolution, the image size increases on your screen; by default the image maintains its

original size when printed.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Changing image dimensions, resolution, and paper size 335

Decreasing resolution

Downsampling decreases the resolution of an image by removing a specific number of

pixels per unit of measure. This produces better results than upsampling. Best results

are usually achieved when downsampling is done after correcting an image's color and

tone but before sharpening. For more information about correcting and sharpening

images, see "Adjusting color and tone" on page 319 and "Retouching" on page 337.

You can change the resolution and size of an image at the same time. Left to

right: downsampled image, original image, upsampled image.

To change the resolution of an image

1Click Image ` Resample.

2Enable any of the following check boxes:

Identical values — sets the same value in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes

Anti-alias — smooths the edges in the image

Maintain original size — maintains the size of the file on your hard disk when

you change the resolution of the image

3In the Resolution area, type values in the following boxes:

• Horizontal

• Vertical

Changing paper size

Changing the paper size lets you modify the dimensions of the printable area, which

contains both the image and the paper. When you resize the paper, you increase or

decrease the paper-colored border, but not the dimensions of the original image.

336 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

However, if you reduce the paper size so th at its height and width are smaller than the

dimensions of the original image, the original image will be cropped.

You can change the size of the paper surrounding the original image.

To change the paper size

1Click Image ` Paper size .

2Choose a unit of measure from the list box beside the Width box.

3Type values in the following boxes:

• Width

• Height

If you want to lock the paper size ratio, click Lock .

Need more information?

For more information about changing image dimensions, resolution, and paper

size, see "Changing image dimensions, resolution, and paper size" in the "Editing

images" section of the Help.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Retouching 337

Retouching

Corel PHOTO-PAINT lets you retouch images to improve their quality or modify

their contents.

In this section, you'll learn about

•removing red-eye

removing dust and scratch marks

cloning image areas

•sharpening images

erasing image areas

Removing red-eye

You can remove the red-eye effect from the eyes of subjects in photos. Red-eye occurs

when light from a flash reflects off the back of a person's eye.

To remove red-eye

1In the toolbox, click the Red-eye removal tool .

2Type a value in the Size box to match the brush size to the eye.

3Click the eye to remove the red pixels.

Removing dust and scratch marks

Corel PHOTO-PAINT provides several different ways to improve the appearance of an

image that has small dust and scratch marks. You can apply a filter to the entire image,

or if an image has one or more scratches in a specific area, you can create a mask around

the scratches and apply the filter to the editable areas.

The filter works by eliminating the contrast between pixels that exceed the contrast

threshold you set. You can set a radius to determine how many pixels are affected by the

338 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

changes. The settings you choose depend on the size of the blemish and the area

surrounding it. For example, if you have a white scratch that is 1 or 2 pixels wide on a

dark background, you can set a radius of 2 or 3 pixels and set the contrast threshold

higher than if the same scratch was on a light background.

You can also remove imperfections, such as tears, scratch marks, and wrinkles, from an

image by blending its textures and colors. Similar to using a filter, you choose the range

of pixels necessary to retouch the image, depending on the size of the correction and the

area surrounding it.

If the scratch or blemish is fairly large or in an area of the image that has a varied color

and texture, such as leaves on a tree, you can achieve better results by cloning image

areas. For information about cloning, see "Cloning image areas" on page 340.

To remove small dust and scratch marks throughout an image

1Click Image ` Correction ` Dust and scratch.

2Move the following sliders:

Radius — lets you set the range of pixels used to produce the effect. Set the

radius as low as possible to retain image detail.

Threshold — lets you set the amount of noise reduction. Set the threshold as

high as possible to retain image detail.

You can remove small dust and scratch marks from an image by applying the

Dust and scratch filter.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Retouching 339

To remove scratch marks from part of an image

1Define an editable area that includes the scratch marks.

2Click Image ` Correction ` Dust and scratch.

3Move the following sliders:

Radius — lets you set the range of pixels used to produce the effect. Set the

radius as low as possible to retain image detail.

Threshold — lets you set the amount of noise reduction. Set the threshold as

high as possible to retain image detail.

You can remove a scratch from a specific area by surrounding the scratch with

a mask before applying the Dust and scratch filter. A dashed line or red-

tinted overlay indicates the presence of a mask.

You can use the Brush mask tool to define an editable area that includes

the scratch mark. Choose a nib size that is wider than the scratch mark so you

can brush over the scratch easily. For information about the Brush mask tool,

see "To define an editable area by using the Freehand mask tool" on page 357.

To remove imperfections from an image by blending textures and colors

1In the toolbox, click the Touch-up brush tool .

2Choose a nib from the Nib shape picker.

3Type a value in the Size box to specify the nib size.

4Choose a value from the Strength box to set the intensity of the effect.

5Dab the brush in the image window to apply the effect.

340 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

You can remove imperfections from an image by blending textures and colors

with the Touch-up brush tool.

You can use the Touch-up brush tool on images in the grayscale, duotone,

Lab, RGB, and CMYK color modes.

Cloning image areas

You can copy pixels from one image area to another in order to cover damaged or

unwanted elements in an image. For example, you can fix a tear or remove a person from

an image by applying cloned pixels over the area you want to remove. You can also clone

image elements you like and apply them to another image area or a second image. If

you clone an object, the newly cloned areas are added to the active object. You can also

create abstract images, based on pixels sampled from the original image.

You can also

Apply the effect to the object and the

background simultaneously

Click the Enable or disable merged source

button.

Change the brush size Hold down Shift while dragging in the

image window. Release the key when the nib

is the size you want.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Retouching 341

When you clone, two brushes display in the image window: a source point brush and a

clone brush that applies the copied pixels fr om the source point. A cross-hair appears in

the source point brush to distinguish it from the clone brush. The source point brush

moves relative to the clone brush as you drag across the image.

The Clone tool was used to remove the woman's necklace.

To clone an image area or object

1In the toolbox, click the Clone tool .

2On the property bar, open the Clone picker, and click Clone .

3Choose a brush from the Brush type list box.

4Click the image to set a source point for the clone.

If you want to reset the source point, right-click the area you want to clone.

5Drag the clone brush in the image window to apply the pixels from the source

point.

You can also

Create abstract image areas based on pixels

sampled from the source point

Click Impressionism clone or

Pointillism clone on the Clone picker

before dragging in the image window.

342 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Sharpening images

You can sharpen images to increase contrast, enhance image edges, or reduce shading.

To sharpen an image, or an editable area of an image, you can use filters or brushstrokes.

Filters can also be applied using a lens. For more information about lenses, see "Working

with lenses" on page 347. Sharpening is usually done after adjusting the color and tone

of an image and after resampling or resizing.

You can reveal more image detail by sharpening an image.

Create multiple clones of an object Click the To g g l e cumulative button on

the Stroke attributes bar that appears in

the Brush settings docker. This option is

available only for some of the Effect tools

and the Clone tool. If the Brush settings

docker is not open, click Window `

Dockers ` Brush settings .

Clone an object and the background

simultaneously

Click the Toggle merge source button

on the Dab attributes bar that appears in

the Brush settings docker. This option is

only available when the Toggle cumulative

button is disabled.

You can also

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Retouching 343

To sharpen an image by applying a filter

1Click Image ` Correction ` Tu n e s h a r p e n .

2Move the Percentage slider to set the amount of sharpening that is applied each

time you click a thumbnail button.

3Click any of the following thumbnail buttons:

Unsharp mask — lets you accentuate edge detail and focus blurred areas in the

image without removing low-frequency areas.

Adaptive unsharp — lets you accentuate edge detail by analyzing the values of

neighboring pixels. This filter preserves most image detail, but its effect is most

apparent in high-resolution images.

Sharpen — lets you accentuate the edges of the image by focusing blurred areas

and increasing the contrast betw een neighboring pixels. Move the Background

slider to set the threshold for the effect. Lower values increase the number of

pixels changed by the sharpening effect.

Directional sharpen — lets you enhance the edges of an image without

creating a grainy effect.

The Unsharp mask filter provides best results for most photographs.

Most sharpen filters support all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit

grayscale, paletted, and black-and-white. The Sharpen filter supports all color

modes except paletted and black-and-white.

You can access each of the sharpen filters individually by clicking Effects `

Sharpen, and clicking a filter.

You can use this procedure to sharpen an editable area of an image.

You can also

Remove shading Click Effects ` Sharpen ` High pass. The

High pass filter removes image detail and

shading to give an image a glowing quality

by emphasizing its highlights and luminous

areas. However, it can also affect the color

and tone of the image.

344 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To sharpen selected areas by applying brushstrokes

1In the toolbox, click the Effect tool .

2On the property bar, open the Effect tool picker, and click the Sharpen tool .

3Choose a brush from the Brush type list box.

4Choose a nib from the Nib shape picker.

5Type a value in the Size box to specify the nib size.

6Drag across an image area.

Erasing image areas

You can edit images and objects by erasing areas. For example, you can erase part of an

object to change its shape or reveal more of the layer below. You can also erase areas of

the image to reveal the background color, or erase part of the last action applied to the

image.

The tools used to erase have many of the same settings as brushes, which means you can

control the size, shape and transparency to create unique effects. For example, you can

apply a bitmap fill to the entire image, increase the transparency value of the eraser tool,

and create a superimposed effect by partially erasing the fill (the last action performed).

You can also erase image areas based on color. The background color replaces the

foreground color you erase.

The Eraser tool was used to erase the background.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Retouching 345

To erase part of an object

1 Select an object.

2Click the Eraser tool .

3Specify the settings you want on the property bar.

4Drag across the area you want to erase.

To erase image areas and reveal the background color

1Click the Eraser tool .

2Specify the settings you want on the property bar.

3Drag across the image area you want to erase.

To erase the last action applied to an image

1In the toolbox, click the Undo brush tool .

2Specify the settings you want on the property bar.

3Drag across the area you want to erase.

If you want to erase the last action completely, click the Undo button on

the standard toolbar. For more information about undoing, see "Undoing,

redoing, repeating, and fading actions" in the Help.

To replace a foreground color with the background color

1In the toolbox, click the Replace color brush tool .

2On the property bar, choose a nib shape from the Nib shape picker.

3Type a value in the To l e r a n c e box to specify the color tolerance based on color

similarity.

4In the color control area of the toolbox, double-click the Foreground color swatch,

and choose a color.

5Drag in the image window.

346 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Need more information?

For more information about retouching images, see "Retouching" in the "Editing

images" section of the Help.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Working with lenses 347

Working with lenses

Lenses let you view special effects, corrections, or adjustments, on a separate object

layer before you apply the changes to the image. In some programs, lenses are also

known as adjustment layers.

In this section, you'll learn about

•creating lenses

editing lenses

combining lenses with the image background

Creating lenses

Lenses let you view adjustments and special effects that you want to apply to an image.

When you create a lens, the changes you make are not applied to the image pixels;

instead, they are displayed on the screen through the lens. The lens is created as a

separate object on a layer above the image background so you can edit the lens and the

background image separately.

You can create a lens to cover the entire image, or you can create a lens from the editable

area of a mask.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT lets you create the following lenses:

Lens type Description

Add Noise Lets you create a granular effect that adds texture to a

flat or overly blended image. You can specify the type

and amount of noise that is added to the image.

Black-and-white Lets you create a black-and-white image from a color

photo by adjusting the tonal range of the color

channels

348 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Brightness-Contrast-Intensity Lets you change the brightness, contrast, and intensity

of an image by shifting pixel values up or down the

tonal range

Channel mixer Lets you adjust specific color channels in an image to

create unique photographic effects

Color Balance Lets you adjust the color balance of an image by

shifting the colors between complementary pairs of

the primary RGB color values and secondary CMY

color values

Contrast Enhancement Lets you adjust the tone, color, and contrast of an

image while preserving shadow and highlight detail

Desaturate Lets you create a grayscale image without changing

the color mode. It automatically reduces the

saturation of each color to zero, removes the hue

component, and converts each color to its grayscale

equivalent.

Gamma Lets you reveal detail in a low-contrast image without

significantly affecting the shadows or highlights. The

tonal correction of the image is based on the

perception of tones relative to the surrounding area.

Gradient map Lets you apply color to a black-and-white image or

change the colors in a color image

Hue/Saturation/Lightness Lets you change the hue, saturation, and lightness

values of an image or channel. Hue represents color;

saturation represents color depth or richness; and

lightness represents the overall percentage of white in

an image.

Invert Lets you reverse the colors of an image to create the

appearance of a photographic negative

Jaggy Despeckle Lets you scatter colors in an image to create a soft,

blurred effect with minimal distortion. This lens is

most effective for removing the jagged edges that can

appear in line art or high-contrast images.

Lens type Description

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Working with lenses 349

Photo filter Lets you apply a color tint to an image. You can adjust

the intensity of the tint, and choose to either preserve

or remove the luminosity setting in the image.

Pixelate Lets you break an image into square, rectangular, or

circular cells

Posterize Lets you reduce the number of tonal values in an

image to remove gradations and create larger areas of

flat color

Psychedelic Lets you change the colors in an image to bright,

electric colors, such as orange, hot pink, cyan, and

lime green

Remove Noise Lets you remove random pixels on the surface of an

image, resembling static on a television screen, by

adjusting the color value of pixels based on the

minimum color values of neighboring pixels

Replace Colors Lets you replace one image color with another color. A

color mask is created to define the color to be

replaced. Depending on the range you set, you can

replace one color or shift an entire image from one

color range to another. You can set the hue, saturation,

and lightness for the new color.

Sample/Target Balance Lets you shift the tonal range of an image by sampling

specific image areas. You can take samples from

shadow, midtone, and highlight areas, and set target

tonal values by choosing colors from a color model.

You can also shift the tonal range for a specific color

channel. The tonal range is displayed as a histogram.

Scatter Lets you distort an image by scattering pixels. You can

specify the direction of the scattering.

Lens type Description

350 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

When you create a lens, you must choose a lens type based on the change that you want

to apply. However, the types of lenses are determined by the image's color mode. For

example, you cannot use a color lens on a grayscale image because there are no colors

to modify. If you want to correct or adjust image color and tone, choose a lens type that

Selective Color Lets you change a color by changing the percentage of

the component process colors (CMYK values) in a

color spectrum (reds, yellows, greens, cyans, blues,

and magentas). You can also add process color to the

grayscale tonal component of an image. Selective color

modifications increase and decrease the percentage of

cyan, magenta, yellow, and bl ack pixels that make up

each primary color in the color spectrum.

Sharpen Lets you accentuate the edges of the image by

focusing blurred areas and increasing the contrast

between neighboring pixels

Smooth Lets you mute the differences between adjacent pixels

to smooth an image without losing detail. It is

especially useful for removing the dithering that is

created when you convert an image from the paletted

mode to the RGB mode. The Smooth lens produces a

more pronounced effect than the Soften lens.

Soften Lets you smooth and tone down the harsh edges in an

image without losing important image detail. The

difference between the Smooth and Soften lenses is

subtle but is often apparent when images are viewed

at high resolution.

Solarize Lets you transform colors in an image by reversing

image tones

Threshold Lets you specify a brightness value as a threshold.

Pixels with a brightness value higher or lower than the

threshold will display in white or black, depending on

the threshold option you specify.

Tone Curve Lets you perform color and tonal corrections by

adjusting individual color channels or the composite

channel (all channels combined).

Lens type Description

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Working with lenses 351

corresponds to the adjustment and transform filters. If you want to apply a special effect

to improve image quality or dramatically transform an image, choose a special effects

filter. For more information about special effects, see "Applying special effects" on

page 365.

Left: This picture of a man is an image object cut out from a darker image.

Right: A lens was applied to brighten the image object without permanently

changing the image object or background.

To create a lens

1Click Object ` Create ` New lens .

2Choose a lens from the Lens type list.

3Ty p e a n a m e i n t h e Lens name box.

4Click OK.

If a dialog box displays, specify the lens properties.

To create a lens from an editable area

1Define an editable area.

2Click Object ` Create ` New lens.

3Enable the Create lens from mask check box.

4Choose a lens from the Lens type list.

5Ty p e a n a m e i n t h e Lens name box.

6Click OK.

7In the dialog box, specify the lens properties.

352 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Editing lenses

After you create a lens, you can edit it. For example, you can add areas to it and remove

areas from it.

Lenses can be selected and transformed in the same way that you select and transform

objects. For information about selecting and transforming objects, see "Working with

objects" on page 385 and "Modifying objects" on page 391. You can also change the

shape of a lens using a special effects filter . For more information about special effects,

see "Applying special effects" on page 365.

To add an area to a lens

1Click the Object pick tool .

2Select a lens.

3Click one of the following:

Paint tool

Rectangle tool

Ellipse tool

Polygon tool

Line tool

4On the property bar, specify the tool's attributes.

Ensure the New object button on the property bar is disabled.

5Drag across the areas that you want to add to the lens.

When adding areas to a lens, the grayscale value of the foreground color or fill

color affects the lens opacity. White adds areas to the lens, while black makes

lens areas transparent. For more information, see "Working with object

transparency" in the Help.

To remove an area from a lens

1Click the Object pick tool .

2Select a lens.

3Click the Eraser tool .

4On the property bar, specify the Eraser tool's attributes.

5Drag across the areas that you want to remove from the lens.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Working with lenses 353

To change the shape of a lens by using a special effects filter

1Click the Object pick tool .

2Select a lens.

3Click Effects , and click a special effect.

4Specify the settings of the special effects filter.

Combining lenses with the image background

To apply a lens adjustment and special effects to the pixels of an image, you combine

the lens with the image background. Combining a lens with the image background

reduces the file size of the image and lets you save the image to a non-native file format.

Once a lens is combined with the image background, the lens cannot be selected or

modified.

To combine a lens with the image background

1Click the Object pick tool .

2Select a lens.

3In the Objects docker, choose a merge mode from the Merge mode list box.

If the Objects docker is not open, click Window ` Dockers ` Objects.

4Click Object ` Combine , and click one of the following:

Combine objects with background — combines the selected lens with the

image background

Combine all objects with background — combines the selected lens and all

other objects with the image background

Need more information?

For more information about working with lenses, see "Working with lenses" in

the "Editing images" section of the Help.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Working with masks 355

Working with masks

In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can use masks to isolate areas in an image for editing

while protecting the remaining areas from change. With their combination of editable

and protected areas, masks let you modify images with precision. In some programs,

editable areas are also known as selections.

In this section you'll learn about

distinguishing protected and editable areas

defining editable areas

defining editable areas by using color information

inverting and removing masks

cutting out images

For information about clip masks, see "Using clip masks to change object transparency"

in the Help.

Distinguishing protected and editable areas

You can use masks for advanced image editing. Masks function like a stencil placed over

an image: protected areas, paint and effects are not applied to the underlying image,

whereas in editable areas, paint and effects are applied to the image. When you define

an editable area for an image, you also define a corresponding mask, or protected area,

for the same image.

Mask overlay

You can display a mask overlay that appears only over protected areas to make it easy

to differentiate between protected and editable areas. The mask overlay is a red-tinted,

transparent sheet. If you adjust the transparency of a mask in certain areas, the degree

of red displayed by the mask overlay in those areas varies accordingly.

You can hide the mask overlay.

356 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Mask marquee

The border separating an editable area and its corresponding protected area is indicated

by a dashed outline, called the mask marquee. You can display the mask marquee only

when the mask overlay is hidden. You can change the color of the mask marquee so that

it can be seen clearly against an image's colors.

To display or hide the mask overlay

•Click Mask ` Mask overlay .

A check mark beside the menu command indicates that the mask overlay is visible.

To display or hide the mask marquee

•Click Mask ` Marquee visible.

A check mark beside the menu command indicates that the mask marquee is

visible.

The mask marquee does not appear when you use a mask overlay or when you

are adjusting the transparency of a mask.

Defining editable areas

There are a number of ways to define an editable area in an image without using color

information from the image.

Editable areas defined by using text, objects, or the Clipboard contents

You can define an editable area by using objects. When you create an editable area that

has the shape of one or more objects, you have to move the objects away from the

editable area before editing it.

You can define an editable area by using text. The editable area created when you type

has the font and style characteristics you specify. You can also create an editable area

from existing text.

You can define an editable area by pasting information from the Clipboard into the

image window as an editable area. The area you create is a floating editable area, which

you can edit and move without changing the underlying image pixels.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Working with masks 357

Editable areas defined by using the Freehand mask tool

You can define an editable area by outlining the image area as you would with a pencil

and paper, or by clicking at different points on the image to anchor straight line

segments.

Border-shaped editable areas

You can define a border-shaped editable area from the edges of an existing editable area

to frame parts of an image with a color, texture, or special effect. A new mask marquee

is placed on either side of an existing mask marquee to define a border-shaped editable

area.

Editable areas consisting of the entire image

You can also define the entire image as an editable area. This feature is very useful when

you want to apply a special effect requiring a mask to the entire image. For information

about special effects, see "Applying special effects" on page 365.

To define an editable area by using text, objects, or the Clipboard contents

To define an editable area by using the Freehand mask tool

1In the toolbox, click the Freehand mask tool .

2Click the Normal button on the property bar.

3Click where you want to start and end each line segment in the image window.

To Do the following

Define an area by using text Click the Te x t tool , and specify the text

attributes on the property bar. Click the

Create text mask button on the

property bar, type the text, and click

anywhere in the toolbox to apply the

changes.

Define an area by using objects Select one or more objects, and click Mask `

Create ` Mask from object(s).

Define an area by using the Clipboard

contents

Click Edit ` Paste ` Paste as new

selection.

358 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

4Double-click to complete the outline.

You can also define an editable area by dragging the Freehand mask tool in

the image window and double-clicking to complete the outline.

An editable area created with the Freehand mask tool

To define a border-shaped editable area

1In the toolbox, click a mask tool.

2Define an editable area.

3Click Mask ` Mask outline ` Border .

4Type a value in the Width box.

5Choose an edge type from the Edges list box.

To define the entire image as an editable area

•Click Mask ` Select all .

If the mask overlay is enabled, the mask marquee does not appear.

Defining editable areas by using color information

You can define the editable and protected areas of a mask by using the color information

in an image. When you use color information, you must specify seed colors and a color

tolerance value. A seed color is the base color that you use to define either protected or

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Working with masks 359

editable areas. The color tolerance value defines the percentage of color variation from

the seed color that is allowed in the mask; a greater tolerance value adds more colors to

the protected or editable areas. Color tolerance is based on color similarity.

Editable areas with uniform colors

You can define an editable area of uniform color or an editable area surrounded by

uniform colors. If the area is surrounded by uniform colors, you can make a rough

outline that contracts to fit the area you want to edit, or you can base an editable area

on the boundary between uniform colors.

Editable areas throughout an image

You can define editable areas throughout an image by using a color mask. A color mask

lets you select seed colors throughout the image instead of within a specific area.

The color threshold lets you further refine the range of colors that are included in the

editable area. The threshold value evaluates the brightness of each seed color and

determines which pixels are included in the editable area. Adjusting the color threshold

lets you soften or sharpen the pixels at the edge of the editable area. To adjust the

threshold levels of a color mask, you can use a grayscale preview of your image to display

masked areas in black and editable areas in white.

To define an editable area of uniform color

1In the toolbox, click the Magic wand mask tool .

2Click the Normal button on the property bar.

3Type a tolerance value in the Tolerance box.

4Click a color in the image.

To edit an intricate image shape set against a plain background, you can define

the background as an editable area of uniform color and then invert the mask

to make the shape editable. For more information about inverting masks, see

"Inverting and removing masks" on page 361.

The color of the first pixel that you click establishes the seed color; all adjacent

pixels with colors within the specified color tolerance range are included in the

editable area. The editable area expands until it reaches pixels with colors that

exceed the specified color tolerance.

360 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To define an editable area surrounded by uniform color

1In the toolbox, choose one of the following:

Lasso mask tool — lets you roughly outline an image area and then contract

the mask marquee around a specified range of colors within that area; uses an

initial seed color

Magnetic mask tool — lets you establish a mask marquee along a boundary

between colors in an image; uses multiple seed colors

2Click the Normal button on the property bar.

3Type a tolerance value in the Tolerance box.

4In the image window, click a color that you want to protect from changes, and click

at different points to outline the editable area.

5Double-click to complete the outline.

You can choose whether only the color of the first pixel or the color of every

pixel you click establishes a seed color. The color tolerance range indicates the

range of colors protected from changes. When the first pixel that you click

establishes the seed color, the protecte d area expands until the specified color

tolerance is reached. When you use the Lasso mask tool, the completed

outline of the editable area contracts from your original outline to fit the

irregular shape produced by excluding all the pixels from the original outline

that fall within the specified color tolerance range. When you use the

Magnetic mask tool, every pixel that you click establishes a seed color, so that

each time you click, the protected area expands until the specified color

tolerance is reached. The color tolerance is measured in relation to the current

seed color and within a specific area around the pointer.

To define editable areas throughout an image

1Click Mask ` Color mask.

2Click the Normal mode button .

3Choose Sampled colors from the top pop-up menu.

4Click the Eyedropper tool , and click each seed color in the image window.

5Click the Preview button .

6From the list box beside the Preview button, choose one of the following options:

Overlay — Protected areas are covered by a red-tinted transparent sheet.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Working with masks 361

Grayscale — Protected areas appear in black, and editable areas appear in white.

Black matte — Protected areas are covered by a black-tinted transparent sheet.

White matte — Protected areas are covered by a white-tinted transparent sheet.

Marquee — A dotted line appears around the editable area.

7Click More , and enable one of the following options:

Normal — determines the color tolerance based on color similarity between

pixels

HSB mode — determines the color tolerance based on similarity between hue,

saturation, and brightness levels of pixels

8In the box beside each seed color, specify the percentage of color variation

permitted between pixels of that color and the remaining pixels.

9In the Threshold area, move the Threshold slider and enable one of the following

options:

To b l a c k All pixels with a brightness value above the threshold value are

added to the protected area.

To w h i t e — All pixels with a brightness value above the threshold value are

added to the editable area.

If colors from a previous session appear in the Color mask dialog box, click

Reset before you create a new color mask.

The Marquee display style is unavailable when the Marquee visible

command on the Mask menu is disabled.

Inverting and removing masks

You can invert a mask so that the protected area becomes editable and the editable area

becomes protected. Inverting a mask when defining the image area that you want to

protect is easier than defining the area that you want to edit. For example, if you want

to edit an intricate shape in an image that is set against a plain background, it is easier

to select the background and then invert the mask.

You can remove a mask from an image when you no longer need it.

To invert a mask

•Click Mask ` Invert.

362 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To remove a mask

•Click Mask ` Remove.

When you remove a mask, editable areas that were previously floating on your

image are automatically merged with the background.

Cutting out images

The Cutout Lab lets you cut out image areas from the surrounding background. This

feature allows you to isolate image areas and preserve edge detail, such as hair or blurred

edges.

To cut out an image area, you draw a highlight over its edges and then apply a fill to

define the inside of the area. To evaluate the results, you can preview the cutout with

the background removed or against a background of gray, white, or black. You can also

preview the cutout with the original image showing underneath and with the highlight

and fill displayed. If necessary, you can touch up the cutout by adding or removing

detail along its edges.

Cutout Lab workflow: (1) Highlight the edges of the image area; (2) add a

fill to the inside;(3) preview the cutout and touch it up if needed; (4) bring the

cutout into the image window; (5 — optional) place the cutout against a

background image.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Working with masks 363

If you make a mistake, you can erase and redo sections of the highlighted and filled area,

undo or redo an action, or revert to the original image.

By default, the cutout is placed as an object in the image window and the original image

is removed. You can also choose to keep both the cutout and the original image, or

create a clip mask from the cutout.

You can also zoom in to get a closer look at image detail or zoom out to view a larger

area of the image. You can pan to view image areas that fall outside the preview window.

To cut out an image area

1Click Image ` Cutout Lab.

2Click the Highlighter tool .

3In the preview window, draw a line along the edges of the image area that you want

to cut out.

The line should slightly overlap the surrounding background.

4Click the Inside fill tool , and click inside the area you want to cut out.

5Click Preview .

If you want to touch up the cutout, click the Add detail or Remove detail

tool, and drag over an edge.

6From the Cutout results area, choose any of the following options:

Cutout — creates an object from the cutout and discards the original image

Cutout and original image — creates an object from the cutout and preserves

the original image

Cutout as clip mask — creates a clip mask from the cutout and attaches the

clip mask to the original image. A clip mask is a mask that is attached to an

object and lets you change the transparency of an object without permanently

affecting it. If you created a cutout from a background image, the background is

converted to an object.

You can also

Erase the highlight and fill Click the Eraser tool , and drag over the highlight

and fill that you want to delete. The Eraser tool is

available before you click Preview .

Undo or redo an action Click the Undo or Redo button.

364 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

The Cutout Lab supports RGB, CMYK, grayscale, paletted, and Lab images.

When brought into the Cutout Lab, gr ayscale, paletted, and Lab images are

automatically converted to RGB or CMYK images, which may result in a

slight color shift. The original image colors are restored after you apply or

cancel the Cutout Lab command.

Revert to the original image Click Reset .

Set preview options In the Preview settings area, enable any of the

following check boxes:

Show highlight — displays the highlight around

the cutout

Show fill — displays the fill inside the cutout

Show original image — displays the original

image underneath the cutout

From the Background list box, choose any of the

following options:

None — displays the cutout against a black-and-

white checkered pattern. If the Show original

image check box is enabled, the removed areas are

displayed covered by a semitransparent black-and-

white checkered pattern.

Grayscale — displays the cutout against a gray

background. If the Show original image check box

is enabled, the removed areas appear tinted gray.

Black matte — displays the cutout against black

background. If the Show original image check box

is enabled, the removed areas appear tinted black.

White matte — displays the cutout against white

background. If the Show original image check box

is enabled, the removed areas appear tinted white.

Need more information?

For more information about masking, see "Working with masks" in the "Masks

and paths" section of the Help.

You can also

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Applying special effects 365

Applying special effects

Corel PHOTO-PAINT provides special effects filters that let you apply a wide range of

transformations to images. For example, you can transform images to simulate

drawings, paintings, etchings, or abstract art.

In this section, you'll learn about

working with special effects

applying color and tone effects

managing plug-ins

Working with special effects

Corel PHOTO-PAINT special effects let you change the appearance of an image. You

can apply a special effect to the entire image, or you can use a mask or a lens to

transform only part of an image.

Applying special effects

The following are all the categories of special effects available, each of which includes

several different effects:

When you apply a special effect, you can adjust its settings to control how the effect

transforms an image. For example, when you use a vignette effect to frame an image,

you can increase the offset value and decrease the fade value to decrease the size and

opacity of the frame. With a watercolor effect, you can decrease the size of the brush to

show more image detail or increase the size of the brush for an abstract effect.

3-D effects Color transform Distort

Art strokes Contour Noise

•Blur •Creative •Texture

•Camera •Custom

366 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Applying special effects to part of an image

You can apply special effects to part of an image by defining an editable area. For

information about editable areas, see "Working with masks" on page 355.

You can also use a lens to apply a special effect to part of an image. The following special

effects are also preset lens types:

When you use a lens, changes are not applied to the image; instead, they are seen on

the screen through the lens. For information about lenses, see "Working with lenses" on

page 347.

Repeating and fading special effects

You can repeat a special effect to intensify its result. You can also fade an effect to

diminish its intensity, and you can define how the effect is merged with the image. For

information about repeating and fading a sp ecial effect that you've applied, see

"Undoing, redoing, repeating, and fading" in the Help. For information about merge

modes, see "Understanding merge modes" in the Help.

To apply a special effect

1Click Effects , choose a special effect category, and click an effect.

2Adjust the settings of the special effect filter.

If the image contains one or more objects, the special effect is applied only to

the background or the selected object.

When you preview the special effect in the image window, you can press and

hold F2 to hide the special effect dialog box.

Some special effects can affect the shape of an object. To retain an outline of

the object's original shape, enable the Lock object transparency button in

Jaggy despeckle Scatter Invert

• Smooth Pixelate • Posterize

Soften Add noise Threshold

Psychedelic Remove noise Solarize

•Sharpen

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Applying special effects 367

the Objects docker. The areas which remain between the outline of the original

shape and the new shape of the object are filled with black.

To apply a special effect to an editable area

1Define an editable area.

2Click Effects, choose a special effect category, and click an effect.

3Adjust the settings in the dialog box.

To repeat a special effect

•Click Effects ` Repeat, and click one of the following:

Repeat [last effect] — repeats the last applied effect

[Last effect] to all visible — repeats the last applied effect to all visible

elements in an image

[Last effect] to all selected — repeats the last applied effect to all selected

objects in an image

Applying color and tone effects

You can transform the color and tone of an image to produce a special effect. For

example, you can create an im age that looks like a photographic negative or flatten the

appearance of an image.

To apply color and tone effects

•Click Image ` Tr a n s f o r m , and click one of the following effects:

Invert — lets you reverse the colors of an image. Inverting an image creates the

appearance of a photographic negative.

Posterize — lets you reduce the number of tonal values in an image to remove

gradations and create larger areas of flat color

Threshold — lets you specify a brightness va lue as a threshold. Pixels with a

brightness value higher or lower than the threshold appear in white or black,

depending on the threshold option you specify.

If a dialog box appears, adjust the effect settings.

368 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Managing plug-ins

Plug-ins provide additional features and effects for image editing in

Corel PHOTO-PAINT. Special effect plug-in filters process image information and

alter an image according to preset specifications.

At start-up, Corel PHOTO-PAINT automatically detects and loads plug-ins placed in

the plug-ins folder. You can add more plug-ins to the plug-ins folder or you can add

plug-ins installed in other locations. Note that third-party plug-ins must be installed in

a folder for which you have read and write access. You can disable plug-ins you are not

using.

To install a plug-in from another location

1Click To o l s ` Options.

2In the Wo r ksp a c e list of categories, click Plug-ins.

3Click Add .

4Choose the folder where the plug-in is stored.

To disable a plug-in

1Click To o l s ` Options.

2In the Wo r ksp a c e list of categories, click Plug-ins.

3Disable the check box next to the plug-in you want to disable.

You can also disable a plug-in and remove it from the plug-in list by clicking

a plug-in to highlight it and clicking the Remove button.

Need more information?

For more information about applying special effects, see "Applying special

effects" in the "Painting and special effects" section of the Help.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Drawing and painting 369

Drawing and painting

Corel PHOTO-PAINT lets you create images or modify existing ones by using a

variety of shape and paint tools.

In this section, you'll learn about

drawing shapes and lines

applying brushstrokes

spraying images

using a pressure-sensitive pen

Drawing shapes and lines

You can add shapes, such as squares, rectangles, circles, ellipses, and polygons, to

images. By default, shapes are added to an image as new objects. Shapes can be

outlined, filled, or rendered as separate, editable objects. For more information about

objects, see "Creating objects" on page 385.

You can also add lines to images. When you add lines, you can specify the width and

transparency, as well as the way line segments join together. The current foreground

color determines the color of a line.

To draw a rectangle or an ellipse

1In the toolbox, click one of the following tools:

Rectangle tool

Ellipse tool

2On the property bar, choose one of the following options in the Fill list box:

Uniform fill

Fountain fill

Bitmap fill

Texture fill

If you want to edit the fill, click the Edit button on the property bar.

370 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

3Drag in the image window until the rectangle or ellipse is the size you want.

To draw a polygon

1In the toolbox, click the Polygon tool .

2On the property bar, choose one of the following options in the Fill list box:

Uniform fill

Fountain fill

Bitmap fill

Texture fill

If you want to edit the fill, click the Edit button on the property bar.

3Click where you want to set the anchor points of the polygon, and double-click to

set the last anchor point.

You can also

Disable the fill Click the Disable button on the property

bar.

Apply an outline Type a value in the Border box on the

property bar to specify the border width in

pixels.

Round the corners of a rectangle Type a value in the Radius box on the

property bar.

Change the transparency Type a value in the Tr a n s p a r e n c y box in the

property bar.

You can also

Disable the fill Click the Disable button on the property

bar.

Apply an outline to the polygon Type a value in the Border box on the

property bar to specify the border width in

pixels.

Change the way outline segments join Choose a join type from the Shape joints list

box on the property bar.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Drawing and painting 371

To draw a line

1In the toolbox, click the Line tool .

2Type a value in the Width box on the property bar.

3Click the Color button on the property bar, and choose a color.

4On the property bar, open the Line joint list box, and click one of the following:

Butt — joins the segments. If you specify a higher width value, a gap appears

between the joined segments.

Filled — fills the gaps between joined segments

Round — rounds the corners between joined segments

Point — makes points on the corners of joined segments

5Drag in the image window to draw a single line segment.

You can specify how lines join: Butt , Fitted , Round , or Point .

Applying brushstrokes

Paint tools let you imitate a variety of painting and drawing media. For example, you

can apply brushstrokes that imitate watercol ors, pastels, felt markers, and pens. By

You can also

Draw a line with multiple segments In the image window, click where you want

to start and end each segment, and double-

click to end the line.

Change the transparency Type a value in the Transparency box on the

property bar.

372 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

default, brushstrokes are added to the active object or background. Brushstrokes can

also be rendered as separate objects. For information about objects, see "Creating

objects" on page 385.

The paint tool and brush type you choose determines the appearance of the brushstroke

on the image. When you paint with a preset brush, the brush attributes of the paint tool

are predetermined.

The color of the brushstroke is determined by the current foreground color, which is

displayed in the color control area. You can also choose a foreground color by taking a

Preset brush type Painting an image

Airbrush The Airbrush is used for shading.

Spray can Colors are splattered to add texture.

Brush A decorative effect is added by using a

Camel hair brush.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Drawing and painting 373

color sample from an image. For more information about choosing colors, see "Working

with color" on page 309.

In addition to painting with color, you can apply images and textures by painting with

a fill. You can also apply a brush stoke to a path. For more information, see "Applying

brush strokes to paths" in the Help.

To paint with a preset brush

1In the toolbox, click the Paint tool .

2Open the Paint tool picker on the property bar, and click a paint tool.

3Choose a preset brush type from the Brush type list box on the property bar.

4In the color control area of the toolbox, double-click the Foreground color swatch,

and choose a color.

5Drag in the image window.

If you want to constrain the brush to a straight horizontal or vertical line, hold

down Ctrl while you drag, and press Shift to change direction.

To paint with a color sample from an image

1Click the Eyedropper tool .

2Click a color in the image window.

3In the toolbox, click the Paint tool .

4Open the Paint tool picker on the property bar, and click a paint tool.

5Choose a preset brush type from the Ty p e list box on the property bar.

6Drag in the image window.

You can also

Change the brush shape Choose a brush shape from the Nib shape

picker on the property bar.

Change the brush size Type a value in the Size box on the property

bar.

Change the transparency Type a value in the Transparency box on the

property bar.

374 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To paint with a fill

1In the toolbox, click the Fill tool .

2On the property bar, choose a fill type.

3In the toolbox, click the Clone tool .

4On the property bar, open the Clone tool picker, and click the Clone from fill

tool .

5Drag in the image window.

Spraying images

You can paint with small-scale, full-color bitmaps, instead of a brush. For example, you

can enhance landscapes by spraying clouds across the sky or foliage across the ground.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT includes a variety of images, which are used to create spraylists.

You can load a preset spraylist, edit a preset, or create a spraylist by saving images in an

image list. You can edit the source images at any time.

In this example, butterflies have been sprayed around the rose.

To spray images

1In the toolbox, click the Image sprayer tool .

2Choose a preset image list from the Ty p e list box on the property bar.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Drawing and painting 375

3Type a value in the Size box on the property bar.

4Drag in the image window.

To load an image list

1In the toolbox, click the Image sprayer tool .

2Click the Load image sprayer list button on the property bar.

3Choose the folder where the image list is stored.

4Click a filename.

5Click Open.

To create a spraylist

1In the toolbox, click the Image sprayer tool .

2Choose a preset image list from the Ty p e list box on the property bar.

3Click the Create spraylist button on the property bar.

4In the Create spraylist dialog box, specify the contents of the spraylist.

Using a pressure-sensitive pen

Corel PHOTO-PAINT provides settings to control brushstrokes applied using a

pressure-sensitive pen, or stylus. The pressure applied with the pen on a pen tablet

determines the size, opacity, and ot her attributes of the brushstroke.

To configure a pen tablet

1Click To o l s ` Options.

2In the Wo r ksp a c e list of categories, click General.

3In the Pen tablet area, click the Configuration button.

4Apply five strokes using a full range of pressure.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT automatically configures many pressure-sensitive

pens. If your pressure-sensitive pen has been configured automatically, the Pen

tablet configuration button appears grayed.

376 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To set the attributes of a pressure-sensitive pen

1In the toolbox, click the Paint tool .

2On the property bar, open the Paint tool picker, and click a paint tool.

3In the Brush settings docker, click the flyout arrow on the Pen settings bar.

If the Brush settings docker is not open, click Window ` Dockers ` Brush

settings.

4Type values in any of the following boxes:

Size — lets you specify the size of the brush tool. Use a value from -999 to 999.

Opacity — lets you adjust the transparency of the brushstroke. Positive or

negative values have no impact if the transparency of the tool is set to 0 or is

already set to the maximum. Use a value from -99 to 100.

Soft edge — lets you specify the width of the transparent edge along a

brushstroke. Use a value from -99 to 100.

Hue — lets you shift the hue of the paint color around the Color Wheel up to

the specified degree

Saturation represents the maximum variation in the saturation of the paint

color. Use a value from -100 to 100.

Lightness — represents the maximum variation of lightness of the paint color.

Use a value from -100 to 100.

Texture — lets you specify the amount of texture visible for the current paint

tool. Use a value from -100 to 100.

Bleed — lets you specify how quickly a brushstroke runs out of paint. Use a

value from -100 to 100.

Sustain color — works in conjunction with the bleed value to adjust the traces

of paint that remain throughout the brushstroke. Use a value from -100 to 100.

Elongation — represents the amount of tilt and rotation of the pen. Use a value

from 0 to 999.

5Drag the pen, varying the amount of pressure you apply to the tablet, to test the

attributes.

Need more information?

For more information about the shape and paint tools in Corel PHOTO-PAINT,

see "Drawing and painting" in the "Painting and special effects" section of the

Help.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Filling images 377

Filling images

In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can fill objects, editable areas, and images with colors,

patterns, and textures. You can choose from a wide variety of fills and create your own

fills.

In this section, you'll learn about

applying uniform fills

applying fountain fills

•applying bitmap fills

applying texture fills

applying gradient fills

Applying uniform fills

Uniform fills are the simplest fill type. They are solid colors that you can apply to

images.

To apply a uniform fill

1In the toolbox, click the Fill tool .

If you want to fill an object, you must select it using the Object pick tool before

applying the fill.

2Click the Uniform fill button on the property bar.

3Click the Edit fill button on the property bar.

4In the Uniform fill dialog box, choose a color model from the Model list box.

5Click a color in the visual selection area.

6Click OK.

7Click where you want to apply the fill in the image.

378 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To apply a fill to a text object, you can first render the text as an editable area

by selecting the text object with the Te x t tool and clicking the Create text

mask button on the property bar. This produces a text-shaped editable area

to which you can apply fills.

Applying fountain fills

Fountain fills gradually change from one color to the next, along a linear, radial, conical,

square, or rectangular path. You can use fountain fills to create the illusion of depth. You

can choose a preset fill, or you can create a custom fountain fill.

Left to right: Linear, radial, conical, and rectangular fountain fills

To apply a preset fountain fill

1In the toolbox, click the Fill tool .

If you want to fill an object, you must select it using the Object pick tool before

applying the fill.

2Click the Fountain fill button on the property bar.

3Click the Edit fill button on the property bar.

4In the Fountain fill dialog box, choose a preset fountain fill from the Presets list

box.

5Click OK.

6Click where you want to apply the fill in the image.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Filling images 379

To create a custom fountain fill

1In the toolbox, click the Fill tool .

2Click the Fountain fill button on the property bar.

3Click the Edit fill button on the property bar.

4In the Fountain fill dialog box, choose a fountain fill from the Presets list box.

5Choose a fountain fill type from the Ty p e list box.

6Enable the Custom option in the Color blend area.

7Double-click the area above the Color band to add a color marker, and click a

color on the color palette.

If you want to change the location of a color marker, drag it to a new position.

Applying bitmap fills

Bitmap fills are bitmaps that you can use to fi ll an object or image. You can fill an area

with a single bitmap. You can also tile, or repeat, a smaller bitmap across an area to

create a seamless pattern.

You can fill images with preset bitmap fills, or you can create custom bitmap fills from

saved images or editable areas. For more information about defining editable areas, see

"Defining editable areas" on page 356.

It is best to use less complex bitmaps for fills, because complex bitmaps are memory-

intensive and slow to display. The complexity of a bitmap is determined by its size,

resolution, and bit depth.

Bitmap fills can be used to create interesting backgrounds and textures.

380 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To apply a bitmap fill

1In the toolbox, click the Fill tool .

If you want to fill an object, you must select it by using the Object pick tool

before applying the fill.

2Click the Bitmap fill button on the property bar.

3Click the Edit fill button on the property bar.

4In the Bitmap fill dialog box, open the Bitmap fill picker, and click a fill.

5Specify the attributes you want.

6Click OK.

7Click where you want to apply the fill in the image.

Merge modes control the way the foreground or fill color blends with the base

color of the image. You can change the merge mode setting from the default

(Normal) for specific blending purposes. For more information about merge

modes, see "Understanding merge modes" in the Help.

To tile a bitmap fill

1In the toolbox, click the Fill tool .

2Click the Bitmap fill button on the property bar.

3Click the Edit fill button on the property bar.

4In the Bitmap fill dialog box, open the Bitmap fill picker, and click a fill.

5In the Size area, disable the Use original size and Scale bitmap to fit check

boxes.

6Type values in the Width and Height boxes to specify the size of bitmap tiles.

To fill an image with a single, large bitmap, enable the Scale bitmap to fit

check box in the Size area.

To create a bitmap fill from an editable area

1Define an editable area.

2Click Edit ` Create fill from selection.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Filling images 381

3Choose the folder where you want to save the file.

4Type a filename in the File name box.

The bitmap fill you create is added to the Bitmap fill picker.

Applying texture fills

Texture fills are three-dimensional patterns. You can use preset texture fills, such as

water, minerals, and clouds, or you can edit a preset to create a custom texture fill. You

cannot import files to use as texture fills.

When you edit a texture fill, you can modify parameters, such as the softness, density,

brightness, and colors. Parameters vary for each texture.

You can modify the attributes of a texture fill to change its appearance.

To apply a texture fill

1In the toolbox, click the Fill tool .

If you want to fill an object, you must select it by using the Object pick tool

before applying the fill.

2Click the Texture fill button on the property bar.

3Click the Edit fill button on the property bar.

4In the Texture fill dialog box, choose a texture library from the Texture library

list box.

5Choose a texture from the Texture list.

6Click OK.

382 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

7Click where you want to apply the fill in the image.

Texture fills are scaled to the image or image area to which you apply them.

You cannot tile texture fills.

To apply a fill to a text object, you can first render the text as an editable area

by selecting the text object with the Te x t tool and clicking the Create text

mask button on the property bar. This produces a text-shaped editable area

to which you can apply fills.

Applying gradient fills

Gradient fills let you create a gradual blend between colors in an area. They are similar

to fountain fills, but they can be adjusted directly in the image window. Gradient fills

can be flat, linear, elliptical, radial, rectangular, square, or conical. They can also be

made up of bitmaps or texture patterns.

When you apply a gradient fill to an image, a gradient arrow, which marks the

transition from one color to another, displays in the image window. Each color in the

gradient fill is represented by a square node on the gradient arrow. You can change and

add colors or adjust the transparency of indivi dual colors. You can also adjust the size of

the gradient fill.

Gradient fills can be used to enhance an image. You can adjust gradient fills

in the image window.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Filling images 383

To apply a gradient fill

1In the toolbox, click the Interactive fill tool .

If you want to fill an object, you must select it by using the Object pick tool

before applying the fill.

2Choose a gradient type from the Fill type list box on the property bar.

3Choose Custom from the Interactive fill style list box on the property bar.

4Drag in the image window to set the gradient arrow.

5Drag a color swatch from the color palette to a color node on the gradient arrow. A

black arrow displays to indicate that the color swatch is in position.

If a color palette is not displayed, click Window ` Color palettes , and choose a

color palette.

Need more information?

For more information about applying fills to images, see "Filling images" in the

"Color and fills" section of the Help.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Working with objects 385

Working with objects

You can increase your image-editing capabilities by using objects, which are

independent image elements that float above the background. Objects are transparent

layers that stack on top of one another. The background forms the bottom layer, and

when you create new objects, they are added to the top of the stack. For example,

when you open a photo, it becomes the background. You can then add shapes,

brushstrokes, sprayed images, and other objects on top of the photo.

Left: Objects are like layers that you can stack on top of one another. Right:

This image consists of the background and two photo objects.

In this section you'll learn about

creating objects

grouping and combining objects

Creating objects

In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can create objects from

• brushstrokes

•shapes

386 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

the background

editable areas

You can create objects from scratch by applying brushstrokes or creating shapes, or you

can add brushstrokes and shapes to an existing object. For more information about

applying brushstrokes and creating shapes, see "Drawing and painting" on page 369.

You can also create an object by using an entire image background. The background

cannot be edited or moved in the stacking order unless it is converted to an object.

Another way you can create an object is to define an editable area on an image

background or another object. When you create an object from an editable area, you

can include only the visible elements in that area. If an object is obscured by other

objects, and you cannot see it, it will not be included in the editable area. For

information about defining editable areas, see "Working with masks" on page 355.

You can create an object by using part of an image background. Here, an

editable area is defined and then the selection is copied and moved.

All objects in an image have the same resolution and color mode. As you add objects to

a file, the file size and memory requirements increase. To decrease file size, you can

flatten an image by combining objects. For more information on combining objects, see

"Grouping and combining objects" on page 388.

To retain objects when you save an image, you must save the image in the native

Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) file format. For more information on saving images, see

"Saving and closing" on page 417.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Working with objects 387

To create an object by using a brush tool

1Click Object ` Create ` New object.

2In the toolbox, click the Paint tool .

3Set the attributes on the property bar.

4Drag in the image window to create a brushstroke.

When the Marquee visible command in the Object menu is enabled, a dashed

outline, called a marquee, surrounds the new object.

All brushstrokes and sprayed images are added to the active object by default.

To create an object by using a shape tool

1In the toolbox, click a shape tool.

2Set the attributes on the property bar.

3Drag in the image window to create a shape.

To add a shape to the active object without creating a new object, disable the

New object button on the property bar.

To create an object by using the entire image background

•Click Object ` Create ` From background.

To create an object by using an editable area

1In the Objects docker, click the thumbnail of the background, or of an object.

If the Objects docker is not open, click Window ` Dockers ` Objects.

2Define an editable area.

3Click Object ` Create ` Object: copy selection.

If you want to remove the editable area of an image as you create an object,

click Object ` Create ` Object: cut selection.

388 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To create an object by using all visible elements in an editable area

1Define an editable area.

2Click Edit ` Copy visible.

3Click Edit ` Paste ` Paste as new object.

Grouping and combining objects

You can group objects so they behave as one unit. Grouped objects can be moved,

deleted, or transformed as a single entity. You can add objects to an existing group, and

ungroup the objects when you want to edit them individually.

Grouped objects can be moved or transformed together. In this example, the ball

and the boxes are grouped and resized as a group.

Another way to group objects is to create a clipping group. Clipping groups let you

combine the characteristics of objects by placing the image elements from one or more

objects into the shape of another; the characteristics of child objects are inserted into the

shape of the parent object. For example, if the parent object is a picture of a flower, and

the child object is a picture of the sky, the result will be a flower shape with the color

and texture of the sky. An object is the parent to objects above it in the stacking order;

a child object cannot be below the parent object. If you want to create a clipping group

using the background image, you must first turn the background into an object. You

can undo a clipping group at any time.

Combining objects lets you group them permanently. You can combine multiple objects

into one object, or combine objects with the background. When you combine objects,

you lose the ability to edit the objects independently. You can also decrease the file size

of an image by combining objects.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Working with objects 389

To group objects

1In the image window, select the objects.

2Click Object ` Arrange ` Group.

To add an object to a group of objects

1In the image window, select an object in a group.

2Hold down Shift, and click the object you want to add.

3Click Object ` Arrange ` Group.

To ungroup objects

1In the image window, click an object in a group.

2Click Object ` Arrange ` Ungroup.

To create a clipping group

1In the Objects docker, click the column to the left of the object thumbnail to make

it a child object. A Paper clip icon appears.

If the Objects docker is not open, click Window ` Dockers ` Objects.

2In the image window, select the child object and drag it over the parent object.

Only areas of the child object that fall within the boundaries of the parent

object are visible. Otherwise, only the object marquee of the child object is

visible.

A child object must be above a parent object in the Objects docker stacking

order.

To undo a clipping group

•In the Objects docker, click the Paper clip icon next to each child object.

If the Objects docker is not open, click Window ` Dockers ` Objects.

390 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To combine objects

When objects are combined with the background, they become part of the

background layer and can no longer be edited as individual objects.

You can specify a merge mode and transparency level before you combine

objects by modifying the settings in the Merge mode list box and Opacity box

in the Objects docker. If the Objects docker is not open, click Window `

Dockers ` Objects.

To c o m b i n e

Multiple objects into one object Select the objects, and click Object `

Combine ` Combine objects together .

One or more objects with the background Select an object or objects, and click Object

` Combine ` Combine objects with

background.

All objects with the background Click Object ` Combine ` Combine all

objects with background.

Need more information?

For more information about working with objects, see "Working with objects" in

the "Objects" section of the Help.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Modifying objects 391

Modifying objects

Objects are independent image elements that can be layered on top of one another.

You can transform objects, change their edges, add drop shadows, and adjust their

transparency. Objects can be changed without affecting the other objects, or the

background, in an image.

In this section you'll learn about

transforming objects

changing the edges of objects

adding drop shadows to objects

Transforming objects

You can change the appearance of objects using the following transformations.

Transformation Description

Sizing Lets you change the width and height of an

object

Scaling Lets you size an object to a percentage of its

original size

Rotating Lets you turn an object around its center of

rotation

Flipping Lets you create a horizontal or vertical mirror

image of an object

Skewing Lets you slant an object to one side

Distorting Lets you stretch an object disproportionately

Applying perspective Lets you give an object the appearance of

depth

392 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

You can apply freeform transformations in the image window or manually adjust

settings for more precise results.

You can apply transformations to a single object or multiple objects simultaneously.

Transformation Applied to objects in an image

Sizing and scaling The photo object is scaled down to fit

onto the background image.

Flipping The object is flipped to create a

reflection.

Rotating The reflection is rotated.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Modifying objects 393

To size an object

1Select an object.

2Click the Position and size mode button on the property bar.

3Drag any of the handles on the highlighting box.

4Click the Apply button on the property bar.

If you want to cancel the transformation, double-click outside the object.

Skewing The reflection is skewed to create a

realistic angle.

Distorting The shadow is distorted to indicate the

direction of a light source.

Perspective A second shadow is added and

modified.

394 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To scale an object

1Select an object.

2Click the Scale mode button on the property bar.

3Drag a corner handle on the highlighting box.

4Click the Apply button on the property bar.

If you want to cancel the transformation, double-click outside the object.

To rotate an object

1Select an object.

2Click the Rotate mode button on the property bar.

3Drag a rotation handle on the highlighting box.

4Click the Apply button on the property bar.

If you want to cancel the transformation, double-click outside the object.

To flip an object

1Select an object.

2Hold down Ctrl , and drag a middle handle on the highlighting box across the

object, past the middle handle on the opposite side.

3Click the Apply button on the property bar.

If you want to cancel the transformation, double-click outside the object.

To skew an object

1Select an object.

2Click the Skew mode button on the property bar.

3Drag a skewing handle on the highlighting box.

4Click the Apply button on the property bar.

If you want to cancel the transformation, double-click outside the object.

To distort an object

1Select an object.

2Click the Distort mode button on the property bar.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Modifying objects 395

3Drag a distortion handle on the highlighting box.

4Click the Apply button on the property bar.

If you want to cancel the transformation, double-click outside the object.

To apply perspective to an object

1Select an object.

2Click the Perspective mode button on the property bar.

3Drag a perspective handle on the highlighting box.

4Click the Apply button on the property bar.

If you want to cancel the transformation, double-click outside the object.

Changing the edges of objects

You can adjust the appearance of an object by changing the characteristics of its edges.

You can blend the edges of an object with the background by feathering, defringing,

and removing black and white edges. To emphasize a certain object in an image, you

can define its edges by sharpening them.

Feathering

Feathering softens the edges of an object by gradually increasing the transparency of the

edge pixels. You can specify the width of the feathered section of the object and the

transparency gradient you want to use.

The object on the right has been feathered to soften its edges.

396 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Defringing

An object created from an editable area sometimes includes stray pixels along its edges.

This is apparent when the editable area is surrounded by pixels of a different brightness

or color. Defringing replaces the color of the stray pixels with a color from the object so

that the object blends with the background.

Removing black or white object edges

You can remove black or white edges from a feathered object by making pixels along

the edges more transparent or more opaque.

Sharpening

Sharpening defines the edges of an object by making the edges crisp. The edges become

sharper as the pixels below the threshold become transparent and the pixels within the

threshold become opaque.

The object on the right has been sharpened to define its edges and make them

more crisp.

Changing the appearance of the object marquee

You can customize the appearance of the object marquee by changing its color and

threshold value. Changing the marquee threshold value modi fies the location of the

visual boundary of the active object. You can also change the color of the object marquee

to make it more visible against the image background.

To feather the edges of an object

1Select an object.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Modifying objects 397

2Click Object ` Feather.

3Type a value in the Width box.

4From the Edges list box, choose one of the following:

Linear — changes the edge transparency in even increments from the beginning

to the end of the feathered section

Curved — results in small transparency increments at the beginning of the

feathered edge, larger transparency increments in the middle, and small

transparency increments at the end

If you want to view the effect in the image window, click Preview .

To defringe an object

1Select an object.

2Click Object ` Matting ` Defringe.

3Type a value in the Width box.

Higher values create a more gradual transition between the edges of the object and

the background.

To remove black or whit e edges from an object

1Select an object.

2Click Object ` Matting , and click one of the following:

Remove black matte makes edge pixels more transparent

Remove white matte — makes edge pixels more opaque

To sharpen the edges of an object

1Select an object.

2Click Object ` Matting ` Threshold.

3Ty p e a v a l u e f r o m 1 to 255 in the Level box.

Higher values include fewer semitransparent pixels.

To change the object marquee

1Click To o l s ` Options.

2In the Wo r ksp a c e list of categories, click Display .

3Type a value from 1 to 255 in the Object threshold box.

398 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Lower values enclose more of the object's pixels.

4Open the Object marquee color picker, and click a color.

When you change the threshold value of the object marquee, the area enclosed

by the marquee changes, but the object itself does not change. Pixels that are

not completely opaque can lie outside the marquee even though they are still

part of the object.

Adding drop shadows to objects

There are three types of drop shadows: glow, flat, and perspective. Glow drop shadows

silhouette objects and are centered horizontally and vertically; they simulate a light

source shining straight onto an object. Flat drop shadows simulate the effect of

directional light, so shadows are offset. Perspective drop shadows create three-

dimensional depth. You can add a drop shadow to any object, including text.

The object on the left has a flat drop shadow, while the object on the right has

a perspective drop shadow.

You can create and adjust drop shadows interactively in the image window. You can also

change the color, position, direction, and transparency of a drop shadow directly in the

image window.

You can also apply preset drop shadows. When you apply a preset, you can modify it to

create a custom drop shadow. For example, you can change its direction and distance

from an object, its color, and its opacity. By default, the edges of drop shadows feature

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Modifying objects 399

squared feathering. You can choose another feathering type, such as a Gaussian blur

which creates a realistic-looking drop shadow.

When you change the shape or transparency of an object that has a drop shadow, the

drop shadow automatically also changes.

To add an interactive drop shadow

1In the toolbox, click the Interactive drop shadow tool .

2Select an object.

If you want to create a flat drop shadow, drag from the center of the object.

If you want to create a perspective drop shadow, drag from the edge of an object.

To add a preset or custom drop shadow

1In the toolbox, click the Interactive drop shadow tool .

2Select an object.

3Choose a preset from the Preset list box on the property bar.

4Open the Shadow color picker on the property bar, and click a color.

5On the property bar, type values in any of the following boxes:

You can also

Change the color of the drop shadow Drag a color swatch from the color palette to

the end node on the drop shadow arrow.

Move the drop shadow Drag the start node on the drop shadow

arrow.

Change the direction of the drop shadow Drag the drop shadow arrow head.

Adjust the drop shadow's opacity Drag the triangular Tr a n s p a r e n c y handle

on the drop shadow arrow.

Adjust the edge feathering Drag the triangular Feather handle on the

drop shadow arrow. By default, squared

feathering is used, but you can choose

another type from the Shadow feather

edge picker on the property bar. For

example, the Gaussian blur creates a realistic

drop shadow.

400 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Shadow direction — lets you specify the angle of the shadow in relation to the

object

Shadow offset — lets you specify the distance of the shadow from the object's

point of origin

Shadow fade — lets you specify the percenta ge by which a perspective drop

shadow fades as it moves away from the object

Shadow stretch — lets you specify the length of a perspective shadow

Shadow transparency — lets you specify the transparency of the shadow

Shadow feather — lets you specify the number of pixels on the edge of the

shadow that are feathered to create a soft edge. By default, squared feathering is

used, but you can choose another type from the Shadow feather edge picker

on the property bar. For example, if you want to create a realistic drop shadow,

choose the Gaussian blur. You can also specify a direction for the feathered pixels

from the Shadow feather direction picker .

Need more information?

For more information about modifying objects, see "Modifying objects" in the

"Objects" section of the Help.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Working with raw camera files 401

Working with raw camera files

You can open, import, and process raw camera files in Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

In this section, you'll learn about

using raw camera files

bringing raw camera files into Corel PHOTO-PAINT

adjusting the color and tone of raw camera files

sharpening and reducing noise in raw camera files

previewing raw camera files and obtaining image information

Using raw camera files

Raw camera files contain picture data that is captured by the image censor of a digital

camera. These files are called raw because, unlike JPEG and TIFF files, they contain

minimal in-camera processing and need to be edited and prepared for printing in an

image-editing application.

With raw camera files, you can control the processing of image data, rather than having

the camera make automatic color adjustments and conversions. You can adjust the

white balance, tonal range, contrast, color saturation, and sharpness of a raw image

without any loss of image quality. In addition, you can reprocess raw images at any time

to achieve the results you want. In this sense, raw camera files can be compared to an

exposed but undeveloped film.

To take advantage of raw camera files, you need to set your camera to save files to its

own raw file format. Corel PHOTO-PAINT lets you open and import raw camera files

from supported camera models. To view a list of supported cameras, visit the Corel

Knowledge Base.

402 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Bringing raw camera files into Corel PHOTO-PAINT

When you open single or multiple raw camera files in Corel PHOTO-PAINT, they are

first displayed in the Camera Raw Lab. You can use the controls in the Camera Raw Lab

to adjust the color and tone of the raw camera images. If you are satisfied with the

adjustments of a file, you can apply the same adjustments to the remaining files.

Camera Raw Lab: circled numbers correspond to the numbers in the following

table, which describes the main components of the lab.

Component Description

1. Rotation tools Let you rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise and

counterclockwise

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Working with raw camera files 403

After processing raw camera files, you can edit them further by using the tools and

effects available in Corel PHOTO-PAINT. Then, you can save the raw camera files as

TIFF or JPEG files, or you can save them to any other file format supported by

Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

Note that raw camera files cannot be saved to a raw camera file format in

Corel PHOTO-PAINT. Any changes made to the raw camera files in the Camera Raw

Lab are lost unless you save the files to a supported file format.

2. Zooming and panning tools Let you zoom in and out of an image displayed in the

preview window, pan an image displayed at a zoom

level higher than 100%, and fit an image to the

preview window

3. Preview modes and Preview

window

Let you preview the adjustments made to a raw

camera image in a single or split window. To compare

the original and the adjusted image, you can display

them side by side.

4. Color page Contains controls that let you adjust the color and

tone of raw camera images to remove color casts and

reveal hidden detail

5. Detail page Contains controls that let you remove noise from raw

camera images

6. Properties page Contains controls that let you view information about

a raw camera image, such as size, color mode, and

camera settings

7. Undo and Redo buttons Let you undo and redo the last action you performed

8. Reset to original button Lets you clear all corrections so that you can start with

the original raw camera image

9. Create snapshot Lets you capture the corrected version of an image in a

"snapshot" at any time. Thumbnails of the snapshots

appear in a window below the image.

10. Hints area Displays information about the active control

11. Histogram Lets you preview the tonal range of the image.

Component Description

404 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Processing raw camera files

The Camera Raw Lab includes controls that are organized in a logical order for color

correction and other adjustments of raw camera images. It is recommended that you

start from the top of the Color page and work your way down. Once you finish

correcting the color and tone of your image, you can sharpen it and remove noise by

using the controls on the Detail page. For information about the settings on the Color

page, see "Adjusting the color and tone of raw camera files" on page 404. For

information about the settings on the Detail page, see "Sharpening and reducing noise

in raw camera files" on page 408.

To bring a raw camera file into Corel PHOTO-PAINT

1Do one of the following:

• Click File ` Open .

• Click File ` Import .

2Select a raw camera file or multiple raw camera files, and click Open or Import.

3In the Camera Raw Lab, adjust the color and tone of the raw camera image. If

necessary, you can also sharpen the image and reduce the amount of noise.

If you selected multiple raw camera files and want to apply the same adjustments

to all of them, enable the Apply to all remaining files check box.

You can choose to crop or resample a raw camera image before processing it in

the Camera Raw Lab.

You can rotate the image by clicking the Rotate left button or Rotate

right button .

Adjusting the color and tone of raw camera files

You can adjust the color and tone of an image by using the following settings.

Color depth

Color depth refers to the number of colors an image can contain. One of the advantages

of using raw camera files is that they can contain more colors than photos saved as JPEG

or TIFF files. This greater number of colors makes it easier to reproduce colors

accurately, reveal detail in shadows, and adjust brightness levels.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Working with raw camera files 405

The Camera Raw Lab lets you process the raw camera files as 48-bit or 24-bit images.

48-bit images offer more accurate color representation and prevent loss of image quality

during retouching. Note that some of the special effects available in

Corel PHOTO-PAINT cannot be applied to 48-bit images.

White balance

White balance is the process of removing unnatural color casts from images so that

image colors appear as they do in real life. White balance takes into consideration the

lighting conditions in which a photo was taken and sets the color balance to produce

realistic image colors.

By default, when a raw camera file is brought in to CorelDRAW, it reflects the camera

setting for white balance. This setting appears as the preset As shot in the White

balance list box. If you are not satisfied with this setting, you can have the white

balance adjusted automatically by choosing the preset Auto . You can also apply any of

the following presets: Daylight , Cloudy , Shade, Tu n g s t e n , Fluorescent, or Flash.

These presets let you simulate different lighting conditions.

Raw camera image with incorrect white balance (left); the same image with

adjusted white balance (right)

In addition, you can use the Eyedropper tool to automatically adjust the contrast in an

image according to the white or gray point that you sample in the preview window.

If the White balance options do not produce the re sults you want, you can use the

following controls to remove color casts:

Te m p e r a t u r e slider — lets you correct color casts by adjusting the color

temperature of an image to compensate for the lighting conditions at the time the

photo was taken. For example, to correct a yellow color cast caused by taking a

photo indoors in dim incandescent lighting, you can move the slider to the left.

406 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Conversely, to correct a blue color cast caused by intense lighting conditions, you

can move the slider to the right.

Tint slider — lets you correct color casts by adjusting the green or magenta in an

image. You can add green by moving the slider to the right; you can add magenta

by moving the slider to the left. Moving the Tint slider after using the

Te m p e r a t u r e slider lets you fine-tune an image.

Tonal adjustments

You can use the following controls to adjust the tone of raw camera files.

Saturation slider — lets you adjust the vividness of colors. For example, by moving

the slider to the right, you can increase the vividness of a blue sky in an image. By

moving the slider to the left, you can reduce the vividness of colors.

Exposure slider — lets you compensate for the lighting conditions at the time the

photo was taken. Exposure is the amount of light allowed to fall on the image

sensor of a digital camera. High exposure va lues result in areas that are completely

white (no detail); low values result in increased shadows. Exposure values (EV)

range from -3.0 to + 3.0.

Brightness slider — lets you brighten or darken an entire image. If you want to

darken only the darkest areas of an image, you must use the Shadow slider.

Shadow slider — lets you adjust the bright ness in the darkest areas of an image

without affecting the lighter areas. For example, a bright light behind a photo

subject (backlighting) at the time a photo is taken can cause the subject to appear

in shadow. You can correct the photo by moving the Shadow slider to the right to

lighten dark areas and reveal more detail.

Using the histogram

While you are making adjustments, you can view the tonal range of the image on the

histogram to check for any clipping of shadow or highlight areas. Clipping is the

shifting of image pixels to white (highlig ht clipping) or black (shadow clipping).

Clipped highlight areas appear completely wh ite and contain no detail; clipped shadow

areas appear completely black and contain no detail.

The button on the left side of the histogram displays a warning if the image contains

shadow clipping. The button on the right side of the histogram displays a warning if

the image contains highlight clipping. You can also choose to apply shading to the

clipped areas in the preview window.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Working with raw camera files 407

To adjust the color and tone of a raw camera file

1Do one of the following:

• Click File ` Open .

• Click File ` Import .

2Select a raw camera file or multiple raw camera files, and click Open or Import.

3From the Color depth list box, choose one of the following options:

• 48-bit (16 bits/channel)

24-bit (8 bits/channel)

4To remove a color cast, select the Auto option from the White balance list box.

If you are not satisfied with the results, you can set the white point more precisely

by using the Eyedropper tool to sample a white or gray color in your image.

5Perform one or more tasks from the following table.

To Do the following

Simulate different lighting conditions Select an option from the White balance list

box.

Correct color in the image Adjust the Te m p e r a t u r e slider, and then

fine-tune the color correction by adjusting

the Tint slider.

Make colors more vivid or less vivid Move the Saturation slider to the right to

increase the amount of color in the image or

to the left to decrease the amount of color in

the image.

Adjust exposure Move the Exposure slider to the left to

compensate for high-exposure camera

settings or to the right to compensate for

low-exposure camera settings.

Brighten or darken an image Move the Brightness slider to the right to

lighten the image or to the left to darken the

image.

Adjust the brightness in the darker areas of

an image without changing the lighter areas

Move the Shadow slider.

Show clipped shadow areas Click the button to the left of the histogram.

408 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

You can capture the current version of your image by clicking Create

snapshot. Thumbnails of the snapshots appear in a window below your image.

Each snapshot is numbered sequentially and can be deleted by clicking the

close button in the upper right corner of the snapshot title bar.

To change a color or tone setting one increment at a time, you can click in the

box to the right of a slider, and press the Up or Down arrow keys.

You can undo or redo the last correction you made by clicking Undo or Redo .

To undo all corrections, click Reset to original.

Sharpening and reducing noise in raw camera files

You can sharpen raw camera files to enhance image edges.

Raw camera files may contain luminous (grayscale) and color (chroma) noise that is

especially obvious in the darker areas of an image. Luminous noise appears as a "white

snow" effect; color noise appears as random pixels of different colors scattered against

image areas. You can reduce noise in raw camera files to improve image quality.

To sharpen a raw camera file

1Do one of the following:

• Click File ` Open .

• Click File ` Import .

2Select a raw camera file or multiple raw camera files, and click Open or Import.

3In the Camera Raw Lab, click the Detail tab.

4Move the Sharpness slider to enhance the edges in an image.

To reduce noise in a raw camera file

1Do one of the following:

• Click File ` Open .

• Click File ` Import .

Show clipped highlight areas Click the button to the right of the

histogram.

To Do the following

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Working with raw camera files 409

2Select a raw camera file or multiple raw camera files, and click Open or Import.

3Click the Detail tab.

4Move any of the following sliders to the right:

Luminance noise — to reduce the amount of luminance noise

Color noise — to reduce the amount of color noise. Note that higher settings

may decrease the color accuracy of an image.

Adjusting both the Luminance noise and Color noise settings produces

better results.

Previewing raw camera files and obtaining image information

By previewing raw camera files in various ways, you can evaluate the color and tone

adjustments you make. For example, you can rotate images, pan to a new area, zoom in

or out, and choose how to display the processed image in the preview window.

You can obtain information about the color mode, size, and resolution of a raw camera

file. In addition, you can obtain information about the camera and camera settings used

when the photo was taken.

To preview a raw camera file

1Do one of the following:

• Click File ` Open .

• Click File ` Import .

2Select a raw camera file or multiple raw camera files, and click Open or Import.

3In the Camera Raw Lab, perform a task from the following table.

To Do the following

Pan to another area of an image Using the Pan tool , drag the image until

the area that you want to see is visible.

Zoom in and out Using the Zoom in tool or Zoom out

tool , click in the preview window.

You can also zoom in and out by dragging

the Zoom slider.

410 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To obtain information about a raw camera file

1Do one of the following:

• Click File ` Open .

• Click File ` Import .

2Select a raw camera file, and click Open or Import.

3In the Camera Raw Lab, click the Properties tab, and view any of the properties

that are available for the selected raw camera file, such as color space, camera

manufacturer and model, focal length, exposure time, and ISO speed ratings.

Fit an image in the preview window Click the Zoom to fit button.

Display an image at its actual size Click the 100% button.

View the corrected image in a single preview

window

Click the Full preview button .

View the corrected image in one window and

the original image in another window

Click the Before and after full preview

button .

View the image in one window with a

divider between the original and corrected

versions

Click the Before and after split preview

button . Move your pointer over the

dashed divider line, and drag to move the

divider to another area of the image.

To Do the following

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Creating images for the Web 411

Creating images for the Web

Corel PHOTO-PAINT gives you the tools you need to create images for the Web.

In this section, you'll learn about

exporting and optimizing images for the Web

creating and editing rollovers

Exporting and optimizing images for the Web

In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can export and optimize images for the Web.

Exporting images

Before you use an image on the Web, you must export it to a Web-compatible file

format, such as the GIF or JPEG format. The GIF file format is best for line drawings,

text, and images with sharp edges or few colors, while the JPEG file format is suitable

for photos. For information about these file formats and alternatives, see "Choosing a

Web-compatible file format" in the Help.

Optimizing images

You can also optimize an image for the Web before you export it to adjust its display

quality and file size. In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can preview an image with up to

four different configurations of settings. You can compare file formats, preset settings,

download speeds, compression, file size, image quality, and color range. You can also

examine previews by zooming and panning within the preview windows.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT provides preset settings, but you can edit these presets, and add

and delete custom presets. Once you specify the settings you want for all of the preview

areas, you can save the settings for the entire optimization dialog box.

To export an image for the Web

1Click File ` Export for Web.

412 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

2Choose the folder where you want to save the file.

3Type a filename in the Filename box.

If applicable, disable the Slices check box.

4Choose a file format from the Save as type list box.

5Enable the Images only option.

6Click Save.

7In the export dialog box for the chosen file format, specify the settings you want.

To optimize and export an image for the Web

1Click File ` Web image optimizer .

2Below the image preview windows, choose from the following list boxes:

• File type

• Web preset

If you want the image previews, download speeds, compression percentages, file

sizes, and color palettes to update automatically, ensure that Preview is enabled.

3Choose an option from each of the list boxes below an image preview window to

select the file format to which you want to save.

A red border indicates the selected format.

4Click OK.

5In the Save Web image to disk dialog box, type a filename in the Filename box.

6Choose the folder where you want to save the image.

7Click Save.

You can also

Increase the number of preview areas In the top right corner, click one of the

preview area display buttons.

Pan to another section of the image Drag in the first preview window.

Zoom in Choose a magnification level from the Zoom

level list box.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Creating images for the Web 413

You can compare file types with the original image by selecting Original file

type in one of the preview panes.

Creating and editing rollovers

A rollover is an interactive image that changes in appearance when you click or point

to it. For example, you can make a button change color when it is clicked, or display

text when you point to it. Rollovers are frequently used on Web pages as navigation

buttons.

Creating rollovers

Rollovers are made using objects, such as shapes, brushstrokes and text. You can use a

single object or a group of objects, such as an ellipse with text on it. Rollovers consist of

the following states:

Normal — displays the default state

Over — is triggered when you point to it

Down — is triggered when you click it

Each state consists of an object or multiple objects.

Edit preset settings for a single preview area Click Advanced in one of the preview areas.

In the Export dialog box, customize the

preset options. If you select GIF or PNG8

file formats, you can modify the color palette

and settings in the Convert to paletted

dialog box.

Save the current configuration of settings for

a preview area

Click the Save settings button for each

area where you want to save the settings.

Save a custom preset Click Add .

Delete a custom preset Click Delete .

Preview the file download time for a

particular connection speed

Choose a speed from the Connection speed

list box.

You can also

414 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

The three states of a rollover: normal, over, and down

You can assign properties to a rollover, such as a Web address that opens when you click

a rollover, and alternate text that displays when you point to it. You can specify a target

for the down state which determines how a Web page opens in a browser window. You

can also add sound to the over and down rollover states, which will play when these

rollover states are activated.

Editing rollover objects

You can edit rollover states by adding, modifying and removing objects in each state.

When you create a rollover, the original objects are copied to the normal, over, and

down states. Adding an object to a rollover state adds the object to all states. However,

any changes you make to an object are applied only to the current state. For example,

you can use different text for the over state by replacing the original text in that state.

If you want to create a rollover using an editable area or the background, they must first

be converted to objects. For more information about defining editable areas, see

"Working with masks" on page 355.

When you create a rollover, the image is sliced, and the rollover becomes a slice. For

more information on working with image slices, and exporting and optimizing sliced

images, see "Slicing images" in the Help.

To create a rollover

1Select one or more objects.

When you create a rollover, the original objects are destroyed. If you want to retain

the original objects, save them before you create a rollover.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Creating images for the Web 415

2Click We b ` Create rollove r from object.

3In the Rollover docker, set any of the following properties for the rollover:

URL — specifies an address, or URL, for a Web page.

ALT — specifies the alternate text that displays when you point to a rollover.

4Choose one of the following rollover states from the States list box:

• Normal

• Over

• Down

5Edit the selected rollover state by adding, removing, and modifying objects.

6Click the Finish editing button .

Each state retains its component objects, so you can continue to edit the rollover.

To edit a rollover

1In the Objects docker, select a rollover.

Rollovers have Rollover object icons to the right of their object names.

If the Objects docker is not open, click Window ` Dockers ` Objects.

2Click We b ` Edit rollover .

You can also

Add sound to a rollover state In the Sound box, type a filename of the

sound you want to play when the selected

state is triggered. You can also click the

Browse button to locate and choose the

sound file.

Specify the target frame or browser window

for the URL

Click a target type in the Ta r g e t list box:

_self opens the URL in the current frame,

_blank opens the URL in a new browser

window, _top opens the URL in the root

frame of the browser, _parent opens the

URL in the highest level frame.

Preview a rollover in a browser In the Rollover docker, click the Preview in

browser button .

Create a new rollover Click the Create rollover from object

button .

416 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

3In the Rollover docker, choose one of the following rollover states from the States

list box:

• Normal

• Over

• Down

4Edit the rollover state by adding, removing, and modifying objects.

5Click the Finish editing button .

When you extract a rollover to simple objects, the component objects are

named automatically.

It is not possible to edit two rollovers at the same time.

You can also

Return a state to the current Normal state,

so you can start over again

Click Reset .

Return all states in a rollover to simple

objects

Click Web ` Extract rollover .

Need more information?

For more information about creating images for the Web, see "Creating images

for the Web" in the "Web images and movies" section of the Help.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Saving and closing 417

Saving and closing

In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can save your work as you create an image and before

you close it. You can also save images to many different file formats.

In this section, you'll learn about

•saving images

exporting images to other file formats

•closing images

Saving images

You can save an image to preserve it. You can also save images automatically at regular

intervals and save backup copies of the file.

When you save an image, you can specify a file format, a file name, and a folder where

you want to save the file. Images are automatically saved using the currently selected

file format, name, and location. The default format is the native Corel PHOTO-PAINT

(CPT) file format. Saving to the Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) file format retains all

image properties — objects, the most recently created mask, alpha channels, grids,

guidelines, and color information — so you can edit them later.

You can attach information (metadata) such as comments, notes, and tags (Windows

Vista) to images so that you can find them and organize them more easily.

To save an image

1Click File ` Save as.

2Choose the folder where you want to save the file.

3Choose a file format from the Save as type list box.

4Ty p e a f i l e n a m e i n t h e File name list box.

The file extension for the file format you choose is appended to the file name

automatically, but can be removed.

418 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

5Enable any of the following active check boxes:

Selected only — saves only the editable areas defined in your image, when there

are no active and selected objects. If there are no editable areas, this option saves

only the active and selected objects.

Do not show filter dialog — suppresses dialog boxes that provide advanced

exporting options

6Click Save.

When you save an image containing objects to a file format that does not

support objects, you can continue working on the original file (which still

contains the objects) in the image window. The image and its objects can still

be saved to the Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) format.

You can view notes in the Notes box in the Open dialog box when you open

an image, or in the Import dialog box when you import an image. Some file

formats do not let you save annotations with an image.

To edit document properties

1Click File ` Document properties.

2In the Document properties dialog box, enter words or phrases for any of the

following: Title, Subject, Keywords, Notes, or Author.

To specify a rating, choose a rating from the Rating list box.

3Click OK.

You can also

Compress a file Choose a compression type from the

Compression type list box.

The Compression type list box is available

only when you are saving an image to a file

format that can be compressed.

Specify information about a file Type any comments you want in the

Comments (Windows Vista) and Notes

(Windows XP) box.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Saving and closing 419

Exporting images to other file formats

You can export Corel PHOTO-PAINT images to a variety of file formats. When you

export an image, the original image is left open in the image window in the existing file

format.

The file format you choose depends on how you want to use the image in the future. If

you export an image to a file format other than Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT), you may

lose some image properties; each file format has its own idiosyncrasies and appropriate

use. For example, if you want to work on an image in another image-editing

application, you can export it to the Adobe Photoshop (PSD) file format. You retain

many image properties, such as objects and masks, so you can continue to edit the

image. If you want to share an image, the Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) or the

Windows bitmap (BMP) file format are suit able because they are standard formats;

images in these formats can be opened in most image viewers and most image-editing

and desktop-publishing applications.

You can also export a file so that it is optimized for office productivity applications, such

as Microsoft Office or Corel WordPerfect Office.

For information about the image properties supported by file fo rmats, consult the

technical notes for each file format in "Supported file formats" in the Help.

To export an image to another file format

1Click File ` Export.

2Choose the folder where you want to save the file.

3Choose a file format from the Save as type list box.

4Ty p e a f i l e n a m e i n t h e File name list box.

The file extension for the file format you choose is appended to the file name

automatically, but it can be removed.

5Enable any of the following active check boxes:

Selected only — saves only the editable areas defined in the image, when there

are no active and selected objects. If there are no editable areas, this option saves

only the active and selected objects.

Do not show filter dialog — suppresses dialog boxes that provide advanced

exporting options

6Click Save.

420 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

To export an image to Microsoft Office or Corel WordPerfect Office

1Click File ` Export for Office.

2From the Export to list box, choose one of the following:

• Microsoft Office

• WordPerfect Office

3Click OK.

4Locate the folder in which you want to save the file.

5Ty p e a f i l e n a m e i n t h e File name list box.

6Click Save.

Images are exported at 96 DPI with color management settings unchanged.

Layers in an image are flattened when the image is exported to Microsoft Office

or Corel WordPerfect Office.

Closing images

You can close one open image or many open images at any time. If you close images

without saving them, your work is lost.

You can also

Compress a file Choose a compression type from the

Compression type list box.

The Compression type list box is available

only when you are saving an image to a file

format that can be compressed.

Specify information about a file Type any comments you want in the

Comments (Windows Vista) and Notes

(Windows XP) box. In Windows Vista, you

can also attach tags to files.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Saving and closing 421

To close an image

To close Do the following

One open image Click File ` Close.

All open images Click Window ` Close all .

Need more information?

For more information about saving images, see "Saving and closing" in the

"Getting started" section of the Help.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Printing basics 423

Printing basics

Corel PHOTO-PAINT provides extensive options for printing your work.

In this section, you'll learn about

printing your work

laying out print jobs

previewing print jobs

Printing your work

In the Corel PHOTO-PAINT application, you can print one or more copies of the same

image. You can specify whether to print the current image or specific images. Before

printing an image, you can specify printer properties, including paper size and device

options.

To set printer properties

1Click File ` Print .

2Click the General tab.

3Click Properties .

4Set any properties in the dialog box.

To print your work

1Click File ` Print .

2Click the General tab.

3Choose a printer from the Name list box.

4Type a value in the Number of copies box.

If you want the copies collated, enable the Collate check box.

5Enable one of the following options:

424 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Current document — prints the active drawing

Current page — prints the active page

Pages — prints the pages that you specify

Documents — prints the documents that you specify

Laying out print jobs

You can lay out a print job by specifying the size, position, and scale. Tiling a print job

prints portions of each page on separate sheets of paper that you can assemble into one

sheet. You would, for example, tile a print job that is larger than your printer paper.

If the orientation of a print job differs from the orientation specified in the printer

properties, a message prompts you to adjust the paper orientation of the printing

device. You can disable this prompt, so that the printer adjusts paper orientation

automatically.

To specify the size and position of a print job

1Click File ` Print .

2Click the Layout tab.

3Enable one of the following options:

As in document — maintains the image size, as it is in the document

Fit to page — sizes and positions the print job to fit to a printed page

Reposition images to — lets you reposition the print job by choosing a position

from the list box

Enabling the Reposition images to option lets you specify size, position, and

scale in the corresponding boxes.

To tile a print job

1Click File ` Print .

2Click the Layout tab.

3Enable the Print tiled pages check box.

4Type values in the following boxes:

Tile overlap — lets you specify the number of inches by which to overlap tiles

Corel PHOTO-PAINT: Printing basics 425

% of page width — lets you specify the percentage of the page width the tiles

will occupy

Enable the Tiling marks check box to include tiling alignment marks.

To change the page orientation prompt

1Click To o l s ` Options.

2In the list of categories, double-click Global , and click Printing .

3Choose Page orientation prompt from the Option list.

4Choose one of the following from the Setting list box:

• Off — Always match orientation

• On — Ask if orientations differ

• Off — Don't change orientation

Previewing print jobs

You can preview your work to show how the position and size of the print job will appear

on paper. For a detailed view, you can zoom in on an area. You can view how the

individual color separations will appear when printed. You can also increase the speed

of a print preview by hiding the graphics.

Before printing your work, you can view a summary of issues for a print job to find

potential printing problems. For example, you can check the current print job for print

errors, possible print problems, and suggestions for resolving issues.

To preview a print job

•Click File ` Print preview .

To magnify the preview page

1Click File ` Print preview .

2Click View ` Zoom.

3Enable the Percent option, and type a value in the box.

You can also magnify the preview page by choosing a preset zoom level.

426 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

You can also zoom in on a portion of the print preview by clicking the Zoom

tool in the toolbox and marquee selecting an area.

To preview color separations

1Click File ` Print preview .

2On the property bar, click the Enable color separations button .

You can preview the composite by clicking View ` Preview separations `

Composite.

To hide or display graphics

1Click File ` Print preview .

2Click View ` Show image.

A check mark beside the menu command name indicates that graphics are

displayed.

When the Show image menu command is disabled, the print job is

represented by a bounding box that you can use to position and size the job.

To view a summary of issues for a print job

1Click File ` Print .

2Click the Issues tab.

If you want to exclude certain issues from the preflight check, click Settings ,

double-click Printing , and disable any check boxes that correspond to issues you

want overlooked.

You can save settings by clicking the Add preflight settings button and

typing a name in the Save preflight style box.

Need more information?

For more information about printing, s ee "Printing basics" in the "Printing"

section of the Help.

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Glossary 427

Glossary

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z

A

accelerator table

A file that contains a list of shortcut keys. Different tables are active depending on the

task that you are performing.

active object (Corel PHOTO-PAINT)

An object that has a red border around its thumbnail in the Objects docker.

add-in

A separate module that extends the functionality of an application.

alpha channel

A temporary storage area for masks. When you save a mask to an alpha channel, you

can access and reuse it in the image as many times as you want. You can save an alpha

channel to a file or load a previously saved channel in the active image.

ambient lighting

The lighting in a room, including natural and artificial light sources.

anchor point

The point that remains stationary when you stretch, scale, mirror, or skew an object.

Anchor points correspond to the eight handles that appear when an object is selected,

as well as the center of a selection box marked by an X.

animation file

A file that supports moving images; for example, animated GIF and QuickTime®

(MOV).

428 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

anti-aliasing

A method of smoothing curved and diagonal edges in images. Intermediate pixels along

edges are filled to smooth the transition between the edges and the surrounding area.

arrow keys

Direction keys that move or "nudge" selected objects in small increments. You can also

use arrow keys to position the cursor when you type or edit text on-screen or in a dialog

box.

artistic text

A type of text created with the Text tool. Use artistic text to add short lines of text, such

as titles, or to apply graphic effects, such as fitting text to a path, creating extrusions

and blends, and creating all other special effects. An artistic text object can contain up

to 32,000 characters.

aspect ratio

The ratio of the width of an image to its height (expressed mathematically as x:y). For

example, the aspect ratio of an image that is 640 x 480 pixels is 4:3.

B

base color

The color of the object that appears under a transparency. The base color and the color

of the transparency combine in various ways depending on the merge mode you apply

to the transparency.

Bézier line

A straight or curved line made up of segments connected by nodes. Each node has

control handles that allow the shape of the line to be modified.

bit depth

The number of binary bits that define the shade or color of each pixel in a bitmap. For

example, a pixel in a black-and-white image has a depth of 1 bit, because it can only be

black or white. The number of color values that a given bit depth can produce is equal

to 2 to the power of the bit depth. For example, a bit depth of 1 can produce two color

values (2 1 =2), and a bit depth of 2 can produce 4 color values (2 2 = 4).

Bit depth ranges between 1 to 64 bits per pixel (bpp), and determines the color depth

of an image.

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Glossary 429

bitmap

An image composed of grids of pixels or dots.

See also vector graphic.

bitmap fill

A fill created from any bitmap.

black point

A brightness value that is considered black in a bitmap image. In

Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can set the black point to improve the contrast of an

image. For example, in a histogram of an image, with a brightness scale of 0 (dark) to

255 (light), if you set the black point at 5, all pixels with a value greater than 5 are

converted to black.

black-and-white color mode

A 1-bit color mode that stores images as two solid colors — black and white — with

no gradations. This color mode is useful fo r line art and simple graphics. To create a

black-and-white photo effect, you can use the grayscale color mode.

See also grayscale.

bleed

The part of the printed image that extends beyond the edge of the page. The bleed

ensures that the final image goes right to the edge of the paper after binding and

trimming.

blend

An effect created by transforming one object into another through a progression of

shapes and colors.

bookmark

An indicator for marking an address on the Internet.

bounding box

The invisible box indicated by the eight selection handles surrounding a selected object.

brightness

The amount of light that is transmitted or reflected from a given pixel. In the HSB color

mode, brightness is a measure of how much white a color contains. For example, a

430 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

brightness value of 0 produces black (or shadow in photos), and a brightness value of

255 produces white (or highlight in photos).

C

calligraphic angle

The angle that controls the orientation of a pen to the drawing surface, like the slant of

the nib on a calligraphy pen. A line drawn at the calligraphic angle has little or no

thickness, but widens as its angle gets farther from the calligraphic angle.

cascading style sheet (CSS)

An extension to HTML that allows styles such as color, font, and size to be specified for

parts of a hypertext document. Style informat ion can be shared by multiple HTML files.

See also HTML.

center of rotation

The point around which an object rotates.

CERN

CERN (Conseil Europeén pour la Recherche Nucléaire) is the scientific laboratory in

which the World Wide Web was developed. CERN is also one of the World Wide Web

server systems. Contact your server administrator to find out which system your server

uses.

CGI script

An external application that is executed by an HTTP server in response to an action you

perform in a Web browser, such as clicking a link, image, or another interactive element

of a Web page

channel

An 8-bit grayscale image that stores color or mask information for another image.

There are two types of channels: color and mask. Images have one color channel for each

component of the color model on which they are based. In addition, some images use

spot color channels. Each channel contains the color information for that component.

Mask (alpha) channels store masks that you create for your images, and they can be

saved with images in formats that support mask information, such as

Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) format.

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Glossary 431

character

A letter, number, punctuation mark, or other symbol.

child color

A color style created as a shade of another color style. For most of the available color

models and palettes, child colors share the same hue as the parent, but have different

saturation and brightness levels.

See also parent color.

child object

An object whose image elements are inserted into the shape of another object, called a

parent object. The child object and parent object are called a clipping group. The child

object must be on a layer above the parent object.

choke

In commercial printing, a form of trapping created by extending the background object

into the foreground object.

client/server image map

A rarely used image map type that includes code for both client-side and server-side

image maps. This type of image map automatically defaults to the user's Web browser

for image map processing. If the browser does not support image maps, the server uses

the external map file to process information. Currently, most Web browsers support

image maps, so client-side image maps are more common.

client-side image map

This common image map type does not depend on the server to process the map

information.

clipart

Ready-made images that can be imported into Corel applications and edited if required.

Clipboard

An area that is used to temporarily store cut or copied information. The information is

stored until new information is cut or co pied to the Clipboard, replacing the old.

432 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

clip mask

A mask that lets you edit an object's transparency levels without affecting the pixels in

the object. You can change the transparency levels directly on the object and then add

the clip mask, or add the clip mask before making the changes.

clipping range

The percentage of the range of values that is not displayed in the upper part of the

histogram's vertical axis.

clone

A copy of an object or an area of an image that is linked to a master object or image

area. Most changes made to the master are automatically applied to its clones.

See also symbol.

closed object

An object defined by a path whose start point and end point are connected.

closed path

A path whose start point and end point are connected.

color cast

A color tint that often occurs in photos as a result of lighting conditions or other factors.

For example, taking a photo indoors in dim incandescent light can result in a yellow

color cast, and taking a photo outdoors in bright sunlight can result in a blue color cast.

color depth

The maximum number of colors an image can contain. Color depth is determined by

the bit depth of an image and the displaying monitor. For example, an 8-bit image can

contain up to 256, while a 24-bit image can contain roughly up to 16 million colors. A

GIF image is an example of an 8-bit image; a JPEG image is an example of a 24-bit

image.

CMY

A color mode made up of cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y). This mode is used in

the three-color printing process.

CMYK

A color mode made up of cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K). CMYK

printing produces true blacks and a wide tonal range. In the CMYK color mode, color

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Glossary 433

values are expressed as percentages; therefore, a value of 100 for an ink means that the

ink is applied at full saturation.

code page

A code page is a table in the DOS or Windows operating system that defines which

ASCII or ANSI character set is used for displaying text. Different character sets are used

for different languages.

color channel

An 8-bit grayscale version of an image. Each channel represents one level of color in the

image; for example, RGB has three color channels, while CMYK has four. When all the

channels are printed together, they produce the entire range of colors in the image.

See also RGB and CMYK.

color gamut

The range of colors that can be reproduced or perceived by any device. For example, a

monitor displays a different color gamut than a printer, making it necessary to manage

colors from original images to final output.

color mode

A system that defines the number and kind of colors that make up an image. Black-

and-white, grayscale, RGB, CMYK, and paletted are examples of color modes.

color model

A simple color chart that defines the range of colors displayed in a color mode. RGB

(red, green, blue), CMY (cyan, magenta, yellow), CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow,

black), HSB (hue, saturation, brightness), HLS (hue, lightness, saturation), and CIE

L*a*b (Lab) are examples of color models.

color palette

A collection of solid colors from which you can choose colors for fills and outlines.

color profile

A description of the color-handling capabilities and characteristics of a device.

color separation

In commercial printing, the process of splitting colors in a composite image to produce

a number of separate grayscale images, one for each primary color in the original image.

434 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

In the case of a CMYK image, four separations (one for cyan, magenta, yellow, and

black) must be made.

color space

In electronic color management, a virtual representation of a device or the color gamut

of a color model. The boundaries and contours of a device's color space are mapped by

color management software.

See also color gamut.

color swatch

A solid-colored patch in a color palette.

color tolerance

The value that determines the color range or sensitivity of the Lasso mask tool, Magic

wand mask tool, and Fill tool. Tolerance is also used in the Color mask dialog box to

determine which pixels are protected when you create a color mask. A pixel is included

in the specified color range if its grayscale value falls within the defined tolerance.

color trapping

A printing term used to describe a method of overlapping colors to compensate for

misaligned color separations (misregistration). This method avoids white slivers that

appear between adjoining colors on a white page.

See also spread, choke, and overprinting.

color value

A set of numbers that define a color in a color mode. For example, in the RGB color

mode, color values of 255 for red (R) and zero for both green (G) and blue (B) result in

the color red.

combined object

An object created by combining two or more objects and converting them into a single

curve object. A combined object takes on the fill and outline attributes of the last

selected object. Sections where an even number of objects overlapped have no fill.

Sections where an odd number of objects overlapped are filled. The outlines of the

original objects remain visible.

compound blend

A blend created by blending the start or end object of one blend with another object.

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Glossary 435

concave

Hollowed or rounded inward like the inside of a bowl.

content

The object or objects that appear inside a container object when you apply PowerClip

effects.

This term is also used to describe graphics resources included with the product such as

clipart, photos, symbols, fonts, and objects.

contour

An effect created by adding evenly spaced concentric shapes inside or outside the

borders of an object. This effect can also be used for creating cuttable outlines for

devices, such as plotters, engraving machines, and vinyl cutters.

contrast

The difference in tone between the dark and light areas of an image. Higher contrast

values indicate greater differences and fewer gradations between dark and light.

control object

The original object used to create effects su ch as envelopes, extrusions, drop shadows,

contours, and objects created with the Artistic media tool. Changes made to the control

object control the appearance of the effect.

control handles (CorelDRAW)

The handles that extend from a node along a curve that is being edited with the Shape

tool. Control handles determine the angle at which the curve passes through the node.

control points (Corel PHOTO-PAINT)

The points that extend from a node along a curve that is being edited with the Shape

tool. Control points determine the angle at which the curve passes through the node.

convex

Curved or rounded outwards like the exterior of a sphere or circle.

crop

To cut unwanted areas of an image without affecting the resolution of the part that

remains.

436 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

cubist

An abstract style of art that stresses several aspects of the same object simultaneously,

generally in the form of squares or cubes.

curve object

An object that has nodes and control handles, which you can manipulate to change the

object's shape. A curve object can be any shape, including a straight or curved line.

D

desktop

The area in a drawing where you can experiment and create objects for future use. This

area is outside the borders of the drawing page. You can drag objects from the desktop

area to the drawing page when you decide to use them.

DeviceN

A type of color space and device color model. This color space is multi-component,

allowing color to be defined by other than the standard set of three (RGB) and four

(CMYK) color components.

diacritical mark

An accent mark above, below, or through a written character; for example, the acute

(é) and cedilla (ç) accents.

dimension line

A line that displays the size of objects or the distance or angle between objects.

distortion handles

The outward-facing, double-headed arrows located at each corner of the highlighting

box.

dithering

A process used to simulate a greater number of colors when only a limited number of

colors is available.

document navigator

The area at the bottom-left of the application window that contains controls for moving

between pages and adding pages. The document navigator also displays the page

number of the active page and the total number of pages in a drawing.

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Glossary 437

dpi (dots per inch)

A measure of a printer's resolution in dots per inch. Typical desktop laser printers print

at 600 dpi. Imagesetters print at 1270 or 2540 dpi. Printers with higher dpi capabilities

produce smoother and cleaner output. The term dpi is also used to measure scanning

resolution and to indicate bitmap resolution.

drawing

A document you create in CorelDRAW.

drawing page

The portion of a drawing window enclosed by a rectangle with a shadow effect.

drawing window

The portion of the application window on which you can create, add, and edit objects.

drop shadow

A three-dimensional shadow effect that gives objects a realistic appearance.

duotone

An image in the duotone color mode is simply an 8-bit grayscale image that has been

enhanced with one to four additional colors.

dynamic guides

Temporary guidelines that appear from the following snap points in objects — center,

node, quadrant, and text baseline.

E

editable area

An editable area (selection) allows paint and effects to be applied to the underlying

pixels.

See also protected area and mask.

embedding

The process of placing an object created in one application into a document created in

a different application. Embedded objects are included entirely in the current

document; they are not linked to their source files.

438 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

encoding

Determines the character set of text, letting you correctly display text in the appropriate

language.

envelope

A closed shape that can be placed around an object to change the object's shape. An

envelope consists of segments connected by nodes. Once an envelope has been placed

around an object, the nodes can be moved to change the shape of the object.

Exchangeable Image File (EXIF)

A file format that embeds digital camera information, such as the time and date a photo

is taken, shutter speed, and focus into JPEG images.

exposure

A photographic term referring to the amount of light used to create an image. If not

enough light is permitted to interact with th e sensor (in a digital camera) or film (in a

traditional camera), an image appears too dark (underexposed). If too much light is

permitted to interact with the sensor or film, an image appears too light (overexposed).

extrusion

A feature that lets you apply a three-dimensional perspective by projecting lines from

an object to create the illusion of depth.

F

feathering

The level of sharpness along a drop shadow's edges.

fill

A color, bitmap, fountain, or pattern applied to an area of an image.

filter

An application that translates digital information from one form to another.

flattened image

An image in which objects and masks are combined with the background and can no

longer be edited.

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Glossary 439

floating editable area

An editable area that hovers or floats above an image and can be moved and modified

without affecting the underlying pixels.

floating object

A bitmap with no background. Floating objects are also referred to as photo objects or

cutout images.

font

A set of characters with a single style (such as italic), weight (such as bold), and size

(such as 10 point) for a typeface such as Times New Roman.

fountain fill

A smooth progression of two or more colors applied to an area of an image that follow

a linear, radial, conical, or square path. Two-color fountain fills have a direct progression

from one color to another, while custom fills may have a progression of many colors.

fountain steps

The shades of color that make up the appearance of a fountain fill. The more steps in a

fill, the smoother the transition from the beginning color to the end color.

fractal

An irregular shape generated by a repeating pattern. Fractals can be used to

mathematically generate an irregular and complex image by following a pattern,

without having to define all of the individual components in the image.

freehand marquee select

To marquee select objects or nodes while dragging the Shape tool and controlling the

shape of the marquee box enclosure as if you were drawing a freehand line.

See also marquee select.

FTP (File Transfer Protocol)

A method of moving files between two computers. Many Internet sites have established

repositories of material that can be accessed by using FTP.

440 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

G

Gaussian

A type of pixel distribution that spreads the pixel information outward using bell-

shaped curves rather than straight lines.

GIF

A graphic file format designed to use a minimum of disk space and be easily exchanged

between computers. This format is commonly used to publish images of 256 or fewer

colors to the Internet.

glyph

Diamond-shaped handles that can be dragged to alter the form of a shape.

grab area

The area of a command bar that can be dragge d. Dragging the grab area moves the bar,

while dragging any other area of the bar has no effect. The location of the grab area

depends on the operating system you are using, the orientation of the bar, and whether

the bar is docked or undocked. Command ba rs with grab areas include toolbars, the

toolbox, and the property bar.

gradient node

A square point that represents each color on the gradient arrow of a gradient fill, which

is used to change the fill's start and end points, colors, and transparency values.

grayscale

A color mode that displays images by using 256 shades of gray. Each color is defined as

a value between 0 and 255, where 0 is dark est (black) and 255 is lightest (white).

Grayscale images, especially photos, are commonly referred to as "black and white."

grayscale image

An image that uses the grayscale color mode, which can display up to 256 shades of

gray, ranging from white to black. Grayscale images, especially photos, are commonly

referred to as "black and white."

greeking

A method of representing text by using either words that have no meaning or a series

of straight lines.

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Glossary 441

grid

A series of evenly spaced horizontal and vertical dots that are used to help draw and

arrange objects.

group

A set of objects that behaves as one unit. Operations you perform on a group apply

equally to each of its objects.

guideline

A horizontal, vertical, or slanted line that can be placed anywhere in the drawing

window to aid in object placement.

gutter

The space between columns of text, also called the alley. In printing, the white space

formed by the inside margins of two facing pages.

H

halftone

An image that has been converted from a continuous tone image to a series of dots of

various sizes to represent different tones.

handles

A set of eight black squares that appear at the corners and sides of an object when the

object is selected. By dragging individual handles, you can scale, resize or mirror the

object. If you click a selected object, the shape of the handles changes to arrows so that

you can rotate and skew the object.

highlight, shadow, and midtone

Terms used to describe the brightness of pixels in a bitmap image. Brightness values

range from 0 (dark) to 255 (light). Pixels in the first third of the range are considered

shadows, pixels in the middle third of the range are considered midtones, and pixels in

the last third of the range are considered highlights. You can lighten or darken specific

areas in images by adjusting the highlights, shadows, or midtones. A histogram is an

excellent tool for viewing and evaluating the highlights, shadows, and midtones of

images.

highlighting box

A rectangle with eight handles that encloses a selection in an image.

442 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

histogram

A histogram consists of a horizontal bar chart that plots the brightness values of the

pixels in your bitmap image on a scale from 0 (dark) to 255 (light). The left part of the

histogram represents the shadows of an image, the middle part represents the midtones,

and the right part represents the highlights. The height of the spikes indicates the

number of pixels at each brightness level. For example, a large number of pixels in the

shadows (the left side of the histogram) indicates the presence of image detail in the dark

areas of the image.

hotspot

The area of an object that you can click to jump to the address specified by a URL.

hotspotting

The process of adding data to objects or groups of objects, so that they respond to

events, such as pointing or clicking. For example, you can assign a URL to an object,

making it a hyperlink to an external Web site.

hot zone

The distance from the right margin at which hyphenation begins.

HSB (hue, saturation, brightness)

A color model that defines three components: hue, saturation, and brightness. Hue

determines color (yellow, orange, red, and so on); brightness determines perceived

intensity (lighter or darker color); and saturation determines color depth (from dull to

intense).

HTML

The World Wide Web authoring standard comprised of markup tags that define the

structure and components of a document. The tags are used to tag text and integrate

resources (such as images, sound, video, and animation) when you create a Web page.

hue

The property of a color that allows it to be classified by its name. For example, blue,

green, and red are all hues.

hyperlink

An electronic link that provides access directly from one place in a document to another

place in that document or to another document.

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Glossary 443

I

icon

A pictorial representation of a tool, object, file, or other application item.

image map

A graphic in an HTML document that contains clickable areas that link to locations on

the World Wide Web, to other HTML documents, or to graphics.

image resolution

The number of pixels per inch in a bitmap me asured in ppi (pixels per inch) or dpi (dots

per inch). Low resolutions can result in a grainy appearance to the bitmap; high

resolutions can produce smoother images but result in larger file sizes.

imagesetter

A high-resolution device that creates film or film-based paper output used in the

production of plates for printing presses.

insert

To import and place a photo image, clipart object, or sound file into a drawing.

intensity

Intensity is a measure of the brightness of the light pixels in a bitmap compared with

the darker mid-tones and dark pixels. An increase in intensity increases the vividness of

whites while maintaining true darks.

interlaced video image

Interlaced video images take two passes to fill a screen, painting every other line in each

pass. This can produce a flicker.

interlacing

In GIF images, a method that lets you display a Web-based image on the screen at a

low, blocky resolution. As the image data loads, the image quality improves.

intersection

The point at which one line crosses another.

444 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

J

JavaScript®

A scripting language used on the Web to add interactive functions to HTML pages.

JPEG

A format for photographic images that offers compression with some loss of image

quality. Because of their compression (up to 20 to 1) and small file size, JPEG images

are widely used in Internet publishing.

JPEG 2000

An improved version of the JPEG file format that features better compression and

allows you to attach image information and assign a different compression rate to an

image area.

justify

To modify the spacing between characters and words so that the edges on the left, right,

or both margins of a block of text are even.

K

kerning

The space between characters, and the adjustment of that space. Often, kerning is used

to place two characters clos er together than usual, for example WA, AW, TA, or VA.

Kerning increases readability and makes letters appear balanced and proportional,

especially at larger font sizes.

knockout

A printing term that refers to an area wh ere underlying colors have been removed so

that only the top color prints. For example, if you print a small circle on a large circle,

the area under the small circle is not printed. This ensures that the color used for the

small circle remains true instead of overlapping and mixing with the color used for the

large circle.

L

Lab

A color model that contains a luminance (or lightness) component (L) and two

chromatic components: "a" (green to red) and "b" (blue to yellow).

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Glossary 445

layer

A transparent plane on which you can place objects in a drawing.

leader tabs

A row of characters placed between text objects to help the reader follow a line across

white space. Leader tabs are often used in place of tab stops, especially before text that

is flush right such as in a list or table of contents.

leading

The spacing between lines of text. Leading is important for both readability and

appearance.

lens

An object that protects part or all of an image when you perform color and tonal

corrections. You can view the effect of a correction through a lens without affecting the

underlying pixels. If you move a lens, the correction is applied to the pixels at the new

location.

linking

The process of placing an object created in one application into a document created in

a different application. A linked object remains connected with its source file. If you

want to change a linked object in a file, you have to modify the source file.

library

A collection of symbol definitions that are included in a CorelDRAW (CDR) file. To

share a library between drawings, you can export it to the Corel Symbol Library (CSL)

file format.

ligature

A character consisting of two or more letters joined together.

lightness

The level of brightness that is shared between a transparency and the object to which it

is applied. For example, if a transparency is applied to an object whose color appears

bright, the transparency color takes on a comparable brightness. The same is true for a

transparency that is applied to an object whose color appears dark — the transparency

takes on a comparable darkness.

446 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

lossless

A kind of file compression that maintains the quality of an image that has been

compressed and decompressed.

lossy

A kind of file compression that results in noticeable degradation of image quality.

low-frequency areas

Smooth areas in an image where gradual changes take place. That is, areas where there

are no edges or noise.

LZW

A lossless file compression technique that results in smaller file size and faster processing

time. LZW compression is commonly used on GIF and TIFF files.

M

marquee

A dashed outline that surrounds an editable area or an object in an image. By default,

object marquees are blue and mask marquees are black.

marquee select

To select objects or nodes by dragging the Pick tool or Shape tool diagonally and

enclosing objects in a marquee box with a dotted outline.

mask

A mask is applied to an image during image editing to define protected areas and

editable areas.

master object

An object that has been cloned. Most changes you make to the master object are

automatically applied to the clone.

mask modes

Mask tool operation modes that you must choose before you create or fine-tune a mask

and its editable area. There are four mask modes: Normal, Additive, Subtractive, and

XOR. The Normal mode (default) lets you se lect an area in an image. The Additive

mode lets you expand the editable regions by selecting multiple areas in an image. The

Subtractive mode lets you reduce the editable regions by removing areas from a

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Glossary 447

selection. The XOR mode lets you select multiple areas in an image. If areas overlap,

the overlapping regions are excluded from the editable area and added to the protected

area.

master layer

A layer on a master page whose objects appear on every page of a multipage drawing.

A master page can have more than one master layer.

master page

A virtual page that contains global objects, guidelines, and grid settings that apply to

all pages in your document.

merge mode

An editing state that determines how the sele cted paint, object, or fill color combines

with other colors in the image.

mesh fill

A type of fill that lets you add patches of color to the inside of a selected object.

metadata

Information about objects. Examples of metadata are names, comments, and cost

assigned to objects.

micro nudge

To move an object in small increments.

See also nudge and super nudge.

midpoint

The point of a Bézier line that divides it into two parts of equal length.

miter limit

A value that determines when two lines that meet at a sharp angle switch from a

pointed (mitered) joint to a squared-off (beveled) joint.

moiré pattern

The visual effect of radiating curves created by superimposing two regular patterns. For

example, a moiré pattern can result by overlapping two halftone screens of different

angles, dot spacing, and dot size. Moiré patterns are the undesirable result of

448 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

rescreening an image with a different halftone screen or with the same halftone screen

on an angle different from the original.

mosaic

The decorative artwork made by arranging small pieces of variously colored material to

form pictures or patterns.

multichannel

A color mode that displays images by using multiple color channels, each comprising

256 shades of gray. When you convert an RGB color image to the multichannel color

mode, the individual color channels (red [R], green [G], and blue [B]) are converted to

grayscale information that reflects the color values of the pixels in each channel.

multiple select

To select multiple objects by using the Pick tool, or multiple nodes by using the Shape

tool.

N

NCSA (National Center for Supercomputing Applications)

NCSA is a server system. If you are creating an image map to be displayed on the Web,

you need to know the system your server uses, because different codes are used in the

map files. Contact your server administrator to find out which system your server uses.

nested group

A group of two or more groups that behaves as one object.

nested PowerClip objects

Containers that hold other containers to form complex PowerClip objects.

nodes

The square points at each end of a line or curve segment. You can change the shape of

a line or curve by dragging one or more of its nodes.

noise

In bitmap editing, random pixels on the surface of a bitmap, resembling static on a

television screen.

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Glossary 449

nonprinting characters

Items that appear on the screen but do not print. They include the rulers, guidelines,

table gridlines, hidden text, and formatting symbols, such as spaces, hard returns, tabs,

and indents.

NTSC (National Television Standards Committee)

A video color filter that is commonly used to define the gamut of colors supported by

television monitors in North America.

nudge

To move an object in increments.

See also micro nudge and super nudge.

O

object (CorelDRAW)

A generic term for any item you create or place in a drawing. Objects include lines,

shapes, graphics, and text.

object (Corel PHOTO-PAINT)

An independent bitmap that is layered above the background image. Changes applied

to objects do not affect the underlying image.

one-point perspective

An effect created by lengthening or shortening one side of an object to create the

impression that the object is receding from view in one direction.

opacity

The quality of an object that makes it difficult to see through. If an object is 100 percent

opaque, you cannot see through it. Opacity levels under 100 percent increase the

transparency of objects.

See also transparency.

open object

An object defined by a path whose start point and end point are not connected.

origin

The point in the drawing window at which the rulers intersect.

450 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

output resolution

The number of dots per inch (dpi) that an output device, such as an imagesetter or laser

printer, produces.

outline

The line that defines the shape of an object.

overexposure

Excessive light in an image that gives it a washed-out appearance.

See also exposure.

overlay

A red-tinted, transparent sheet that you can superimpose on the protected areas in an

image. The mask overlay makes it easy to distinguish between the editable and the

masked (protected) regions in an image. When the overlay is applied, the masked areas

are displayed in varying degrees of red (according to their transparency). The deeper the

saturation of the red tint, the greater the degree of protection.

See also editable area and protected area.

overprinting

Overprinting is achieved by printing one co lor over another. Depending on the colors

you choose, the overprinted colors mix to create a new color, or the top color covers the

bottom color. Overprinting a dark color on a light color is often used to avoid

registration problems that occur when color separations are not precisely aligned.

See also color trapping, choke, and spread.

P

PAL

A video color filter that is commonly used to define the gamut of colors supported by

television monitors in Europe and Asia.

paletted color mode

An 8-bit color mode that displays images of up to 256 colors. You can convert a

complex image to the paletted color mode to reduce file size and to achieve more precise

control of the colors used throughout the conversion process.

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Glossary 451

pan (CorelDRAW)

To move the drawing page around in the drawing window. Panning changes the page

view in the same way that scrolling moves the drawing up, down, to the left, or to the

right in the drawing window. When working at high magnification levels where not all

of the drawing is displayed, you can quickly pan to see parts of the drawing that were

previously hidden.

pan (Corel PHOTO-PAINT)

To move the image around in the image window, usually when the image is larger than

its window. Panning changes the image view in the same way that scrolling moves the

image up, down, to the left, or to the right in the image window. When working at high

magnification levels where not all of the image is displayed, you can quickly pan to see

parts of the image that were previously hidden.

PANOSE font matching

A feature that lets you choose a substitute font if you open a file that contains a font not

installed on your computer. You can make a substitution for the current working

session only, or you can make a permanent substitution, so that the new font is

automatically displayed when you save and reopen the file.

PANTONE process colors

The colors that are available through the PANTONE Process Color System, which is

based on the CMYK color model.

paragraph text

A text type that allows you to apply formatting options and directly edit large blocks

of text.

parent color

An original color style that you can save and apply to objects in a drawing. You can

create child colors from the parent color.

See also child color.

parent object

An object whose shape is combined with the image elements of another object, called a

child object. The child object and parent object are called a clipping group. The parent

object must be on an object layer below the child object.

452 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

path (CorelDRAW)

The basic component from which objects are constructed. A path can be open (for

example, a line) or closed (for example, a circle), and it can be made up of a single line

or curve segment or many joined segments.

path (Corel PHOTO-PAINT)

A series of line or curve segments connected by square endpoints called nodes.

pattern fill

A fill consisting of a series of repeating vector objects or images.

Perfect Shapes

Predefined shapes, such as basic shapes, arrows, stars, and callouts. Perfect Shapes often

have glyphs, which let you modify their appearance.

perpendicular line

A line that intersects another line at a right angle.

perspective handles

The hollow circles in the corners of the highlighting box.

pixel

A colored dot that is the smallest part of a bitmap.

See also resolution.

pixelation

A type of image distortion in which individual pixels are discernible to the naked eye,

or groups of pixels appear as blocks of colors. Pixelation is caused by incorrect resolution

or incorrect image dimensions, or it can be created intentionally for a special effect.

PNG (Portable Network Graphics)

A graphic file format designed for use in online viewing. This format can import 24-bit

color graphics.

point

A unit of measure used primarily in typesetting to define type sizes. There are

approximately 72 points to an inch and 12 points to a pica.

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Glossary 453

PostScript fill

A type of texture fill designed using the PostScript language.

PowerClip effect

A way of arranging objects that lets you contain one object inside another.

PowerClip object

An object created by placing objects (contents objects) inside other objects (container

objects). If the contents object is larger than the container object, the contents object is

automatically cropped. Only the contents that fit inside the container object are visible.

pressure-sensitive pen

A stylus that you can use to access commands and draw your images. To use with

Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you must install the pressure-sensitive pen, along with a

pressure-sensitive tablet and its corresponding drivers.

process color

In commercial printing, colors that are produced from a blend of cyan, magenta, yellow,

and black. This is different from a spot color, which is a solid ink color printed

individually (one printing plate is required for each spot color).

progressive

In JPEG images, a method of having the image appear on screen in its entirety, at a low,

blocky resolution. As the image data loads, the image quality progressively improves.

protected area

An area that prevents paint and effects from being applied to the underlying pixels.

See also mask and editable area.

Q

QuickCorrect™

A feature that automatically displays the fully worded form for abbreviations or the

correct form for errors as you type. You can use QuickCorrect to capitalize words or to

correct common spelling and typographic errors automatically; for example,

QuickCorrect can replace "asap" with "as soon as possible" and "hte" with "the."

454 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

R

radius

As applied to orbits, sets the distance between the center of the brushstroke and the nibs

that travel around the center of the brushstroke when you paint with orbits. Increasing

this value increases the size of the brushstroke.

As applied to the Dust & Scratch filter, sets the number of pixels surrounding the

damaged area that are used to apply the filter.

range sensitivity

A paletted color mode option that lets you specify a focus color for the paletted

conversion. You can adjust the color and specify its importance to guide converting.

rasterized image

An image that has been rendered into pixels. When you convert vector graphics files to

bitmap files, you create rasterized images.

render

To capture a two-dimensional image from a three-dimensional model.

resample

To change the resolution and dimensions of a bitmap. Upsampling increases the size of

the image; downsampling decreases the size of the image. Resampling with fixed

resolution lets you maintain the resolution of the image by adding or subtracting pixels

while varying the image size. Resampling with variable resolution keeps the number of

pixels unchanged while changing the image size , resulting in lower or higher resolution

than that of the original image.

resolution

The amount of detail that an image file contains, or that an input, output, or display

device is capable of producing. Resolution is measured in dpi (dots per inch) or ppi

(pixels per inch). Low resolutions can result in a grainy appearance; high resolutions can

produce higher quality images bu t result in larger file sizes.

rich text

Rich text supports text formatting, such as bold, italics, and underlining, as well as

different fonts, font sizes, and colored text. Rich text documents can also include page

formatting options, such as custom page margins, line spacing, and tab widths.

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Glossary 455

RGB

A color mode in which the three colors of light (red, green, and blue) are combined in

varying intensities to produce all other colors. A value between 0 and 255 is assigned to

each channel of red, green and blue. Monitors, scanners, and the human eye use RGB

to produce or detect color.

rollover

An interactive object or group of objects that changes its appearance when you click or

point to it.

round-tripping

The conversion of a document saved in a file format such as Portable Document Format

(PDF) in another format such as Corel DESIGNER (DES) and then back again.

rotate

To reposition and reorient an object by turning it around its center of rotation.

rotation handles

The curved, double arrows in the corners of the highlighting box.

ruler

A horizontal or vertical bar marked off in units and used to determine the size and

position of objects. By default, the rulers appear on the left side, along the top of the

application window, but they can be hidden or moved.

S

saturation

The purity or vividness of a color, expressed as the absence of white. A color that has

100 percent saturation contains no white. A color with 0 percent saturation is a shade

of gray.

scale

To change an object's horizontal and vertical dimensions proportionally by a specified

percentage. For example, scaling a rectangle that is 1 inch high and 2 inches wide by

150 percent results in a rectangle that is 1.5 inches high and 3 inches wide. The aspect

ratio of 1:2 (height to width) is maintained.

456 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

scanner

A device that converts images on paper, transparency, or film to digital form. Scanners

produce bitmaps or rasterized images.

seed color

The color of the first pixel that you click when you define an editable area and mask by

using the Lasso and Magic wand mask tools. This color is used by the tolerance value

to set the sensitivity of the color detection in color masks.

segment

The line or curve between nodes in a curve object.

segment (path)

The section of a path located between two consecutive nodes. A path is a series of

segments.

selection

An area of an image, also called editable area, that is not protected by a mask and that

is, therefore, available for editing. The selection can be modified by painting and editing

tools, special effects, and image commands.

selection box

An invisible rectangle with eight visible handles that appears around any object you

select using the Pick tool.

server-side image map

A rarely used image map type that relies on a server to process image map information.

It requires a separate map (*.map) file for the Web server. Currently, most Web

browsers can process image maps, so client-side image maps are more common.

shape cursor

Uses the shape and size of the nib of the current tool as a cursor.

shape recognition

The ability to recognize and convert hand-drawn shapes into perfect forms. To take

advantage of shape recognition, you must use the Smart drawing tool. For example, you

can draw four pen strokes to sketch a rectan gle, and the application will convert your

hand-drawn lines into a perfect rectangle.

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Glossary 457

simple wireframe view

An outline view of a drawing that hides fills, extrusions, contours, and intermediate

blend shapes. Bitmaps are displayed in monochrome.

See also wireframe view.

size

To change an object's horizontal and vertical dimensions proportionally by changing

one of the dimensions. For example, a rectangle with a height of 1 inch and a width of

2 inches can be sized by changing the value of the height to 1.5 inches. A width of

3 inches automatically results from the new height value. The aspect ratio of 1:2 (height

to width) is maintained.

skew

To slant an object vertically, horizontally, or both.

skewing handles

The straight, double-headed arrows located in the center of each side of the highlighting

box.

snap

To force an object that is being drawn or moved to align automatically to a point on the

grid, a guideline, or another object.

source object

The object you use to perform a shaping action on another object, such as welding,

trimming, or intersecting. The source object receives the fill and outline attributes of

the target object.

See also target object.

splash screen

The screen that appears when CorelDRAW starts. It monitors the progress of the

startup process and provides information about copyright and registration.

split blend

A single blend that is broken into two or more components to create a compound blend.

The object where the blend is split becomes the end object for one component of the

blend and start object for the other.

458 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

spot color

In commercial printing, a solid ink color that prints individually, one plate per spot

color.

spread

In commercial printing, a type of trap that is created by extending the foreground

object into the background object.

stacking order

The sequence in which objects are created in the image window. This order determines

the relationship between objects and, therefore, the appearance of your image. The first

object you create appears on the bottom; the last object appears on the top.

style

A set of attributes that controls the appearance of a specific type of object. There are

three style types: graphic styles, text styles (artistic and paragraph), and color styles.

stylus

A pen device, used in conjunction with a pen tablet, that allows you to draw paint

strokes. A pressure-sensitive stylus allows yo u to vary your strokes with subtle changes

in pressure.

subpaths (CorelDRAW)

Paths that are part of one object.

subpath (Corel PHOTO-PAINT)

A segment which is not joined to the main path.

subscript

Text characters that are positioned below the baseline of the other characters in a line

of text.

subtractive color model

A color model, such as CMYK, that creates color by subtracting wavelengths of light

reflected from an object. For example, a colored ink appears blue if it absorbs all colors

except blue.

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Glossary 459

super nudge

To move an object in large increments by pressing Shift and an Arrow key. The super

nudge value is multiplied by the nudge value to obtain the distance by which the object

is moved.

See also nudge and micro nudge.

superscript

Text characters that are positioned above the baseline of the other characters in a line

of text.

swap disk

Hard drive space used by applications to artificially increase the amount of memory

available in your computer.

swatch

One of a series of solid-colored patches used as a sample when selecting color. A printed

booklet of swatches is called a swatchbook. Swatch also refers to the colors contained in

the color palette.

symbol

A reusable object or group of objects. A symbol is defined once and can be referenced

many times in a drawing.

A reusable object or group of objects. A symbol is defined once and can be referenced

many times in an image.

symbol instance

An occurrence of a symbol in a drawing. A symbol instance automatically inherits any

changes made to the symbol. You can also apply unique properties to each instance,

including size, position, and uniform transparency.

T

tangent

A straight line that touches a curve or an ellipse at a point, but does not cross the curve

or ellipse at that point.

target

The frame or Web browser window in which a new Web page appears.

460 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

target object

The object you perform a shaping action on, such as welding, trimming, or intersecting

with another object. The target object retains its fill and outline attributes while

copying these attributes to the source objects used to perform the action.

See also source object.

temperature

A way of describing light in terms of degrees Kelvin — lower values correspond to dim

lighting conditions that cause an orange cast, such as candlelight or the light from an

incandescent light bulb. Higher values correspond to intense lighting conditions that

cause a blue cast, such as sunlight.

template

A predefined set of information that sets the page size, orientation, ruler position, and

grid and guideline information. A template may also include graphics and text that can

be modified.

text baseline

The imaginary horizontal line that text characters appear to be placed on.

text frame

The rectangle that appears as a series of dashed lines around a block of paragraph text

created using the Text tool.

text style

A set of attributes that controls the appearance of text. There are two text style types:

artistic text styles and paragraph text styles.

texture fill

A fractally generated fill that, by default, fills an object or image area with one image

instead of with a series of repeating images.

threshold

A level of tolerance for tonal variation in a bitmap.

threshold (path)

A control available when you create a path from a mask. Threshold values range from

1 to 10 and determine the size of the angle required between two sections of a mask for

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Glossary 461

a node to be created there. A low value prod uces more cusps, and therefore more nodes

on the resulting path.

thumbnail

A miniature, low-resolution version of an image or illustration.

tick

Invisible divisions to which your pointer gravitates

tightness (path)

A control available when you create a path from a mask marquee. Tightness values

range from 1 to 10 and determine how close the path's shape will be to that of the

marquee. The higher the value, the more the new path resembles the marquee; it will

have more nodes than a path with a lower tightness value.

tiling

The technique of repeating a small image across a large surface. Tiling is often used to

create a patterned background for World Wide Web pages.

tint

In photo editing, a tint often refers to a semitransparent color applied over an image.

Also called a color cast.

In printing, a tint refers to a lighter shade of a color created with halftone screening —

for example, a spot color.

See also halftone.

tonal range

The distribution pixels in a bitmap image from dark (a value of zero indicating no

brightness) to light (a value of 255 indicating full brightness). Pixels in the first third of

the range are considered shadows, pixels in the middle third of the range are considered

midtones, and pixels in the last third of the range are considered highlights. Ideally, the

pixels in an image should be distributed across the entire tonal range. A histogram is an

excellent tool for viewing and evaluating the tonal range of images.

tone

The variations in a color or the range of grays between black and white.

462 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

transparency

The quality of an object that makes it easy to see through. Setting lower levels of

transparency causes higher levels of opacity and less visibility of the underlying items or

image.

See also opacity.

TrueType® fonts

A font specification developed by Apple. TrueType fonts print the way they appear on

the screen and can be resized to any height.

true color

A term that refers to digital RGB color that is composed of 24-bits, or 16.7 million

colors.

TWAIN

By using the TWAIN driver supplied by th e manufacturer of the imaging hardware,

Corel graphics applications can acquire images directly from a digital camera or scanner.

two-point perspective

An effect created by lengthening or shortening two sides of an object to create the

impression that the object is receding from view in two directions.

U

underexposure

Insufficient light in an image.

See also exposure.

uniform fill

A type of fill used to apply one solid color to your image.

See also fill.

Unicode

A character encoding standard that defines character sets for all written languages in

the world by using a 16-bit code set and more than 65, 000 characters. Unicode lets

you handle text effectively regardless of the language of the text, your operating system,

or the application you are using.

CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4: Glossary 463

URL (Uniform Resource Locator)

A unique address that defines where a Web page is located on the Internet.

V

vanishing point

A marker that appears when you select an extrusion or an object to which perspective

has been added. With an extrusion, the vanishing point marker indicates the depth

(parallel extrusion) or the point at which the extruded surfaces would meet if extended

(perspective extrusion). In both cases, the vanishing point is indicated by an X.

vector graphic

An image generated from mathematical descriptions that determine the position,

length, and direction in which lines are drawn. Vector graphics are created as collections

of lines rather than as patterns of individual dots or pixels.

See also bitmap.

vector object

A specific object within a drawing that is created as a collection of lines rather than as

patterns of individual dots or pixels. Vector objects are generated from mathematical

descriptions that determine the position, length, and direction in which lines are drawn.

W

watermark

A small amount of random noise added to the luminance component of the image pixels

which carries information about the image. This information survives normal editing,

printing, and scanning.

weld

To combine two objects into a single curve ob ject with a single outline. A source object

is welded to a target object to create a new object that takes on the fill and outline

attributes of the target object.

white point

The measurement of white on a color monitor that influences how highlights and

contrast appear.

In image correction, the white point determines the brightness value that is considered

white in a bitmap image. In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can set the white point to

464 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

improve the contrast of an image. For example, in a histogram of an image, with a

brightness scale of 0 (dark) to 255 (light), if you set the white point at 250, all pixels

with a value greater than 250 are converted to white.

Windows Image Acquisition (WIA)

A standard interface and driver, created by Microsoft, for loading images from

peripheral devices, such as scanners and digital cameras.

wireframe view

An outline view of a drawing that hides fills but displays extrusions, contour lines, and

intermediate blend shapes. Bitmaps are displayed in monochrome.

See also simple wireframe view.

workspace

A configuration of settings that specifies how the various command bars, commands,

and buttons are arranged when you open the application.

Z

zoom

To reduce or magnify the view of a drawing. You can zoom in to see details or zoom out

for a broader view.

ZIP

A lossless file compression technique that results in smaller file size and faster processing

time.

Index 467

CorelDRAW Index

Numerics

3D effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

3-point curve tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 , 68

3-point ellipse tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 , 53

3-point rectangle tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

A

actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

undoing and redoing

in PowerTRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

undoing and repeating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

by using dynamic guides . . . . . . . . . . 100

objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

objects on a page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

anchor points. See nodes

arcs, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Arrow shapes tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

arrowheads, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Artistic media tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 , 75

artistic text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

converting to curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

converting to paragraph text . . . . . . . 200

fitting to path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

ASCII, encoding text in PDF . . . . . . . . . . 270

B

backgrounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

in traced results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

solid color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

Banner shapes tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

bar codes, inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

Basic shapes tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

bevel effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152

Emboss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154

light and color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152

Soft Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152

beveling corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Bézier tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

drawing lines with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219

adjusting color and tone . . . . . . . . . . .223

applying PowerClip . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

checking for watermarks . . . . . . . . . . .271

combining multi-layer bitmaps . . . . .271

converting vector graphics . . . . . . . . .219

correcting color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220, 223

extracting embedded color profiles . .271

linking externally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271

resampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221

resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

special effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

468 Index

CorelDRAW

tracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

Blend tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 , 157

blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

mesh fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

block text. See paragraph text

bold type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199

borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

table cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

boundary, object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

breaking apart combined objects . . . . . .105

breaking paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

brushstrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

creating custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

C

calligraphic lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

creating as outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Callout shapes tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

callouts, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Centerline Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

chamfering corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198

changing properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199

rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

spacing between. See spacing

text

circle text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208

circles, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

closing drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

code pages, choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

color calibration bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261

printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

color cast (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432

color depth (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432

color management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247

settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

using color profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

color modes

changing in traced results . . . . . . . . . 236

color of text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200

color palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

creating custom palettes . . . . . . . . . . 135

creating from documents . . . . . . . . . 135

creating from objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

creating from traced results . . . . . . . . 237

fixed or custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

using in PowerTRACE . . . . . . . . . . . 236

color profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249

applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 , 426

choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

copying from CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

color separations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264

previewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256, 426

printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

adjusting in raw camera files . . . . . . 404

choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 , 309

contour fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

contour outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

controlling in traced results . . . . . . . 234

correcting between devices . . . . . . . . 249

custom palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Index 469

CorelDRAW

default color palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

default for fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

fixed and custom color palettes . . . . . 133

in bevel effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

mesh fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

optimizing bitmap quality . . . . . . . . . 223

reproducing accurately . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

sampling from images . . . . . . . . 132 , 310

columns, adding to text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

combining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

paragraph text frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

commercial printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Complex star tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

connector lines, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Connector tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 , 79

Contour tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 148

contouring objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

color settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

control handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

converting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

objects to curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

outlines to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

table to text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

text to curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

text to table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

vector graphics to bitmaps . . . . . . . . . 219

copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

object properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

objects at specified position . . . . . . . . . 88

outline properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Corel Corporation, training . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Corel PHOTO-PAINT, editing in . . . . . .223

Corel Professional Services . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Corel Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

Corel Technology Partners . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Corel Training Partners (CTPs) . . . . . . . .22

CorelTUTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

chamfering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

filleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

rounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

scalloping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

correcting color and tone . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

crop marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262

printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261

printing composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262

Crop tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 , 121

cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

curve objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107

adding nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Bézier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65, 68

manipulating segments . . . . . . . . . . . .110

reducing number of nodes . . . . . . . . .112

removing nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

curves, converting text to . . . . . . . . . . . .200

cusp nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

customizing

brushstrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

color palettes of traced results . . . . . . .236

cut lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

470 Index

CorelDRAW

D

data source files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256

browsing records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257

deleting records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258

formatting numeric fields . . . . . . . . . .258

importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259

incrementing numeric fields . . . . . . .258

viewing records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258

defaults

text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199

deleting layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188

densitometer scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261

printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262

deselecting nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

designer notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244

adding to a template . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245

printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243

viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243

Desktop layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185

dimension lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Dimension tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

direction points. See control handles

displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186

dynamic guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188

objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188

pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188

Distort tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 , 116

distortion effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

distributing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

object copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

dockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

document information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

documentation conventions . . . . . . . . . . . .16

drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

calligraphic lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

dimension lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

flow lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

preset lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

pressure-sensitive lines . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

rectangles and squares . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

spirals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

using shape recognition . . . . . . . . . . . 59

drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

reverting to saved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

drop caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212

Drop shadow tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 , 155

drop shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154

adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

separating from objects . . . . . . . . . . . 156

duplicating objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

dynamic guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100

displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

enabling or disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Index 471

CorelDRAW

E

editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220, 223

contents of PowerClip objects . . . . . . 129

text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

effects

3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

bevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

color and tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Ellipse tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

3-point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

embedding (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

Emboss effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

encoding (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438

Envelope tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 , 117

envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

converting segments and curves . . . . 118

editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Eraser tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 , 123

erasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

in straight lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

object areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

virtual line segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

exiting CorelDRAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

extracting

embedded ICC profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

paths from objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

subpaths from combined objects . . . .105

Extrude tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 151

extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151

Eyedropper tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 91

F

features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

file information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261

printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263

files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271

exporting to Microsoft Office . . . . . . .274

exporting to WordPerfect Office . . . .274

importing and exporting . . . . . . . . . . .271

Fill tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 , 138

filleting corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

applying to areas outside objects . . . .143

applying uniform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

default color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

fountain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

gradient. See fountain fills

mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

uniform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

film, printing to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266

finding

content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242

fitting text to path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208

flow lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

472 Index

CorelDRAW

Flowchart shapes tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

flyouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

fold marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261

printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262

formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

paragraphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211

text characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199

formatting codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217

inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217

fountain fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

applying custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

applying preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

applying two-color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

fountain steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

frames. See text frames

Freehand tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

drawing lines with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

G

gradient fills. See fountain fills

graphics, adding to tables . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

greeking text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198

Grid layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185

grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

distance between lines . . . . . . . . . . . . .167

snapping objects to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167

grouping objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

adding objects to groups . . . . . . . . . . .104

guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167

adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168

deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

hiding and displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . .168

locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

snapping objects to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Guides layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185

guides. See guidelines

H

halftone screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265

Hand tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 , 46

Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

changing language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

VBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

hotspotting (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442

I

ICC color profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 , 426

Image Adjustment Lab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

inserting in tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271

files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

raw camera files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Insights from the Experts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

to a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Interactive fill tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 , 137

intersecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

italics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199

Index 473

CorelDRAW

K

kerning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

keylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Knife tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 , 122

Knowledge Base, accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

L

languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

changing for user interface and Help .11

changing writing tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

hiding and displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

independent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

maintaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

master pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

printing and exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

stacking order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

for printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 , 424

leading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

lighting

in bevel effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

line spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

adding end shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Bézier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

calligraphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

deleting segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

miter limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

pressure-sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

specifying settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

spraying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

linking (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445

linking paragraph text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215

links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213

live text preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211

locking layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

M

magnifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

print preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255, 425

Make path. See combining, objects

manipulating curved segments . . . . . . . .110

margins, in table cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

master layers, creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187

master pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185

merge documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257

creating data source files . . . . . . . . . . .257

creating forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260

forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257

importing data source files . . . . . . . . .257

inserting merge fields . . . . . . . . . . . . .260

performing merges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257

printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260

474 Index

CorelDRAW

saving to a new file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260

merge fields

creating data source files . . . . . . . . . . .257

inserting in form documents . . . . . . .260

merging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256

colors in traced results . . . . . . . . . . . . .236

documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256

table cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181

Mesh fill tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 , 142

mesh fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

applying to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Microsoft Office

exporting files to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274

mirroring text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207

fitted to path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211

miter limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247

color management settings . . . . . . . . .247

moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

control handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108

objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

objects while drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

setting nudge distances . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208

N

navigating drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

network installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

new features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107

adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

deselecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

editing envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

reducing number in curves . . . . . . . . 112

removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

nudge distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

nudging objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

numeric fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258

formatting in data source files . . . . . 258

incrementing values in . . . . . . . . . . . 258

O

objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

aligning and distributing . . . . . . . . . . 95

aligning text to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

combining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

converting to curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

copying properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

copying size, position, or rotation . . . 91

creating from areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

creating PowerClip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

curve. See curve objects

deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

deselecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

duplicating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

erasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

intersecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

linking with text frames . . . . . . . . . . 215

moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Index 475

CorelDRAW

pasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

removing outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

saving selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

snapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

spraying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 182

ungrouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

wrapping text around . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

ODBC data source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

offsetting object copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

opening drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

optimizing

colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

order of objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

reversing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Outline tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Outline Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

calligraphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

converting to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

specifying settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

P

page numbers, printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

page orientation prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164

background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

custom preset page sizes . . . . . . . . . . .163

deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188

layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

maintaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

matching printer settings . . . . . . . . . .162

moving objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

Paintbucket tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

palettes. See also color palettes . . . . . . . .131

panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

PANTONE Hexachrome colors . . . . . . .265

paragraph text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

See also text

adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197

adding columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212

adding within object . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197

adjusting frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197

aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202

converting to artistic text . . . . . . . . . . .202

fitting to frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212

formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211

separating frame from object . . . . . . .197

spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202

wrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

pasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197

476 Index

CorelDRAW

paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 , 208

adding text to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209

adjusting text on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210

breaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

closing automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

extracting from objects . . . . . . . . . . . .114

fitting text to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208

keeping open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

mirroring text on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211

separating text from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211

pattern fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

tile size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267

editing styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269

publishing to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267

styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267

Pen tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

perfect shapes (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . .452

Perfect Shapes collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

perspective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

applying to effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

applying to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

photos

sampling colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132, 310

Pick tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 , 82

pie shapes, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

placing files. See importing, files

Polygon tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

reshaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Polyline tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

position, copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

text on path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

using anchor points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

using xy coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

PowerClip objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

editing contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

nesting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

PowerTRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

redoing actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

tracing bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

undoing actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

preset fountain fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

preset lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

pressure-sensitive lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

previewing

color separations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255, 425

raw camera files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

printers' marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261

printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253

color calibration bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

color separations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

commercial printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

converting spot colors . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

densitometer scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

file information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

halftone screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Help topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

imposition layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Index 477

CorelDRAW

merged documents . . . . . . . . . . . 256 , 260

page numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

page orientation prompt . . . . . . . 255, 425

preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

printers' marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

registration marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

tiling jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

to film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

process colors

converting spot colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

PANTONE Hexachrome . . . . . . . . . 265

product updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

property bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

publishing to PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Pull distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Push distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Q

Quick Trace, choosing a method . . . . . . 238

quitting CorelDRAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

R

rasterizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

raw camera files

adjusting color and tone . . . . . . . . . . . 404

importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

previewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

sharpening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

viewing properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

browsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

deleting from data source files . . . . . . 258

viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Rectangle tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

rectangles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

rounding corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

redoing actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

reducing number of nodes . . . . . . . . . . . .112

registering Corel products . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

registration marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261

printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262

repairing installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

repeating actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

replacing text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201

resampling bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

resizing

bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200

resolution

changing in bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

rotating

text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

rotation, copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Roughen brush tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

rounding corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

rulers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

calibrating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

displaying and hiding . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

S

sampling colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 , 134

saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267

selected objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245

478 Index

CorelDRAW

scalloping corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

scanners, color management . . . . . . . . . .247

screens in bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

searching

for content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

for templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241

the Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107

deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

disconnecting to create subpaths . . . .113

editing envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

manipulating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

selecting

nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108

objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

separating text from path . . . . . . . . . . . . .211

settings

for importing and pasting text . . . . . .197

lines and outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

page layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162

rulers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

shadows. See drop shadows

shape recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

correcting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

setting recognition delay . . . . . . . . . . . .60

shape recognition (definition) . . . . . . . . .456

Shape tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 , 109

shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

adding text to predefined . . . . . . . . . . .59

adding to line ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

creating from lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

drawing predefined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

modifying predefined . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

predefined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

shaping objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107

shifting text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

size, copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

skewing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Smart drawing tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Smart fill tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 , 143

smooth nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

Smudge brush tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

snapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

dynamic guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

to grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

to guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

turning on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Soft Edge bevel effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202

character (kerning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

paragraph text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

special effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

applying to bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Spiral tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

spirals, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

splitting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

spot colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 , 309

converting to process colors . . . . . . . 265

converting to process colors in PDF 270

spraying lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

spraylists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

spreadsheets, importing as tables . . . . . .183

Index 479

CorelDRAW

squares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

rounding corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

stacking order

of layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

of objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

standard toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Star tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

stars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

perfect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

starting CorelDRAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Straighten Image Lab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

stretching objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

strokes. See outlines

styles

bevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

editing PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

for tracing bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

text wrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

subpaths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

swatches palettes. See color palettes . . .131

symbols. See formatting codes

symmetrical nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

T

tab stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

in table cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

table cells

background color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

border spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

inserting tab stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180

margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

merging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181

moving to next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178, 180

selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

unmerging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

table columns

cutting and pasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

distributing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176

moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

table rows

cutting and pasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

distributing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176

moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

Table tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

background color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

cell border spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

convert text to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172

converting to text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172

formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

images and graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

importing spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . .183

480 Index

CorelDRAW

inserting text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180

manipulating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

merging cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181

moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

moving around cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

rows and columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176

selecting components . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

splitting cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181

tab order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

tabs. See tab stops

tasks, main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241

adding reference information . . . . . . .245

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245

editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246

finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242

viewing designer notes . . . . . . . . . . . .243

viewing details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242

templets. See templates

terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 , 27

application window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

workspace tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 , 200

adding columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212

adding drop caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212

adding to drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

adding to path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209

adding to predefined shapes . . . . . . . . .59

adding to tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180

adjusting position on path . . . . . . . . .210

aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202

artistic. See artistic text

changing appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . .198

changing character properties . . . . . .199

changing color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200

changing default style . . . . . . . . . . . . .199

changing unit of measure . . . . . . . . . 200

combining and breaking apart frames 215

combining frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

convert to table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

converting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

converting tables to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

copying properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

finding and replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

fitting to path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

fitting to text frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195, 211

formatting codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

greeking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

importing and pasting . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

inserting formatting codes . . . . . . . . 217

kerning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

linking with objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207, 211

moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

removing drop caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

removing wrapping style . . . . . . . . . . 217

resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

separating from path . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

wrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

text baseline (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460

text frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

adding columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

adjusting automatically . . . . . . . . . . . 197

aligning paragraph text . . . . . . . . . . . 204

combining and breaking apart . . . . . 213

fitting text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212, 213

fixed size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Index 481

CorelDRAW

formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

separating from object . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Text tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 , 195

texture fills

applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

three-dimensional effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

applying perspective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

contouring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

drop shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

perspective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

thumbnails

previewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

tiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

tiling print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 , 424

tips & tricks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

tone, adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

toolbox flyouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

tooltips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

traced results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

changing color mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

controlling colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

creating custom color palette . . . . . . . 236

determining quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225, 236

grouping objects by color . . . . . . . . . . 234

keeping object overlaps . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

merging adjacent colors . . . . . . . . . . . 234

merging colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 238

preserving background . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

reducing colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

removing background . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

removing color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239

tracing bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

Centerline Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

changing tracing method . . . . . . . . . .233

default options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238

in one step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227

Outline Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

performance level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238

styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226

tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239

tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

training resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

training videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Transform tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

transforming color and tone . . . . . . . . . .223

transparencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159

applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159

fountain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160

uniform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159

Transparency tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

CorelTUTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Insights from the Experts . . . . . . . . . . .21

Twister distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

type. See text

U

underlining text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199

undoing actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

ungrouping objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

uniform fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

uninstalling applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

units of measure for text . . . . . . . . . . . . .200

482 Index

CorelDRAW

unlocking layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

updating Corel products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

user interface, changing language . . . . . . .11

V

VBA programming guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

vector graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

converting to bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . .219

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

vectorizing bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

virtual line segments, deleting . . . . . . . . .123

Virtual segment delete tool . . . . . . . . 33 , 123

W

watermarks

checking while importing . . . . . . . . . .271

Web resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

wedges, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Welcome screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

welding objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

WordPerfect Office, exporting files . . . .274

workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464

application window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

dockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

property bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

standard toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

workspace (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464

wrapping text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

writing tools

changing language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Z

Zipper distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Zoom tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 , 46

zooming

drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Index 485

Corel PHOTO-PAINT Index

Numerics

256 colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

A

Adaptive unsharp filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

adjustment filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

choosing color and tone filters . . . . . . 326

sharpening filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

adjustment layers. See lenses

anti-aliasing (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

product updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

application window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

automating tasks

VBA programming guide . . . . . . . . . . . 22

B

background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

choosing color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 309

combining with lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

combining with objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

converting to object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

revealing background color . . . . . . . . 344

backlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

bitmap fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

creating from editable areas . . . . . . . . 380

tiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

black point (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

black-and-white color mode (definition) 429

black-and-white photos

saturation slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335

cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304

border-shaped editable areas . . . . . . . . .357

brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321

Brush mask tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287

brushes

painting with preset brushes . . . . . . .373

brushstrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371

adjusting color and tone . . . . . . . . . . .327

painting symmetrical patterns . . . . . .375

painting with orbits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375

presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373

rendering as objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387

sharpening images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344

spraying images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374

C

Camera Raw Lab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404

canvas size. See paper size

Channel mixer filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331

channels

spot color channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311

Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297

clipping groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389

undoing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389

Clone tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288, 341

cloning images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340

closing

images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420

486 Index

Corel PHOTO-PAINT

color blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310

color calibration bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261

color cast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321

color cast (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432

color channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330

combining images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331

displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330

editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330

mixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330

splitting images into channels . . . . . .331

color control area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309

color depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315

color depth (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432

color masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358

color threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358

of uniform color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359

surrounded by uniform color . . . . . . .360

throughout an image . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359

color models

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302

viewing image information . . . . . . . .301

color modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315

converting to paletted . . . . . . . . . . . . .316

viewing image information . . . . . . . .291

color palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309

creating custom palettes . . . . . . . . . . .135

creating from editable areas . . . . . . . .135

creating from objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

default color palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309

fixed or custom color palettes . . . . . . .309

in paletted color mode . . . . . . . . . . . .316

color separations

previewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425

Color transparency tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289

colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 , 319

adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

adjusting by using brushstrokes . . . . 327

adjusting in Image Adjustment Lab 319

adjusting using lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

applying color and tone effects . . . . . 367

changing color models . . . . . . . . . . . 302

choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 , 309

color channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

color modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

color palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

color separations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

custom palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

dithering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

replacing with background color . . . 345

sampling from images . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

spot color channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

viewing image information . . . . . . . . 301

commercial printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261

compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411

optimizing images for the Web . . . . 411

contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321

sharpening images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

copying

image areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Corel Corporation, training . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Corel Knowledge Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) files

preserving image properties . . . . . . . 417

Index 487

Corel PHOTO-PAINT

Corel Professional Services . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Corel Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Corel Technology Partners . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Corel Training Partners (CTPs) . . . . . . . . 22

CorelTUTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

correcting color and tone . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

using lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Crop tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 , 304

crop/fold marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

border color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

expanding cropping area . . . . . . . . . . 304

images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

to editable areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

customer support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 , 22

product registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

customizing

language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Cutout Lab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

cutting out images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

D

defringing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

densitometer scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

digital cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

acquiring photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Directional sharpen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

dithering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

dockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

hiding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

documentation conventions . . . . . . . . . . . .16

downsampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334

drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369

changing units of measure . . . . . . . . .302

lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371

outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369

pressure-sensitive pen . . . . . . . . . . . . .375

rectangles and ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . .369

shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369

triangles and polygons . . . . . . . . . . . .370

viewing cursor coordinates . . . . . . . . .301

drop shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398

adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399

customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399

duplicating

image areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340

images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297

objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388

E

editable areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355

applying special effects . . . . . . . . . . . .367

creating bitmap fills from . . . . . . . . . .380

creating border-shaped . . . . . . . . . . . .357

creating color palettes from . . . . . . . .135

creating from Clipboard contents . . .356

creating from objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356

creating from text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356

creating lenses from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347

cropping to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304

defining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356

defining areas of uniform color . . . . .359

defining by brushstrokes . . . . . . . . . . .357

defining by using color . . . . . . . . . . . .358

defining rectangular or elliptical . . . .356

filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377

inverting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361

mask marquee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355

488 Index

Corel PHOTO-PAINT

mask overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355

removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361

rendering as objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387

selecting entire image . . . . . . . . . . . . .357

viewing cursor coordinates . . . . . . . . .301

Effect tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 , 328, 344

effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365

applying with lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347

Ellipse mask tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287

Ellipse tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 , 369

ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369

drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369

encoding (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438

Eraser tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 , 344, 352

erasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344

last action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345

replacing colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345

exporting

combining lenses with background . .353

files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417

for the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411

images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419

to Microsoft Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420

to WordPerfect Office . . . . . . . . . . . . .420

exposure (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438

extended property bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290

Extract filter. See Cutout Lab

Eyedropper tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 , 311, 373

F

feathering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395

objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396

file formats

exporting images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419

viewing image information . . . . . . . . 301

Web-compatible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

file size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334

compressing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

viewing image information . . . . . . . . 301

viewing on status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293

closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

compressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

exporting for the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

exporting to Microsoft Office . . . . . . 420

exporting to WordPerfect Office . . . 420

importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

viewing image information . . . . . . . . 291

Fill tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 , 377

fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377

3D effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378, 381

bitmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

choosing colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131, 309

custom fountain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

fountain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

gradient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

painting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

texture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

uniform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

filters

plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

special effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

flattening images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390

flipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391

images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Index 489

Corel PHOTO-PAINT

flyouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

fountain fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

applying presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

creating custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Freehand mask tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 , 357

freehand masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

full-screen preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

G

GIF

optimizing and exporting . . . . . . . . . . 411

gradient fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

grayscale color mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

grouping objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

undoing clipping groups . . . . . . . . . . 389

ungrouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

guideline (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

H

Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

changing language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

customer support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Knowledge Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

newsletters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

printing Help topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

tips & tricks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

tooltips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

training videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

VBA programming guide . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Web resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Welcome screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

hiding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300

Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300

toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300

High pass filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343

highlight (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441

highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322

Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

hiding and displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326

adjusting image tone interactively . . .328

histogram (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442

I

Image Adjustment Lab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319

panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324

rotating images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324

using automatic controls . . . . . . . . . . .320

using color correction controls . . . . . .321

viewing images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324

zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324

image lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374

loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375

Image slicing tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289

Image sprayer tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289, 374

images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293

adjusting brightness and contrast . . .321

adjusting color and tone . . . . . . . . . . .319

applying color and tone effects . . . . . .367

applying special effects . . . . . . . . . . . .365

changing color mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315

changing dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . .333

changing paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335

490 Index

Corel PHOTO-PAINT

changing resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334

changing units of measure . . . . . . . . .302

cloning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340

closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420

cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303

cutting out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362

duplicating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297

exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419

filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377

flattening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390

flipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307

from Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297

from digital cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296

full-screen preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300

importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295

mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307

new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297

opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293

optimizing for the Web . . . . . . . . . . . .411

orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307

printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423

removing background . . . . . . . . . . . . .362

resampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334

resampling while opening . . . . . . . . .293

resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333

rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307

saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417

sharpening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342

tiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379

viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299

viewing image information . . . .291, 301

working with color channels . . . . . . .330

zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301

importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295

raw camera files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402

imposition layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261

Impressionism clone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341

indexed color mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316

Insights from the Experts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

to a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Interactive drop shadow tool . . . . . .289 , 398

Interactive fill tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 , 383

Interactive object transparency tool . . . .289

Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411

creating rollovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

optimizing images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Invert effect filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367

inverting masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361

J

JPEG files

optimizing and exporting . . . . . . . . . 411

K

knocking out background. See cutting out

images

Knowledge Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

L

languages

customizing application . . . . . . . . . . . 11

installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Lasso mask tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287, 360

layers. See objects

layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424

learning resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Index 491

Corel PHOTO-PAINT

lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

adding areas to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

changing shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

combining with background . . . . . . . 353

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

creating from editable areas . . . . . . . . 347

editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

removing areas from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

using special effects filters . . . . . . . . . 353

Line tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 , 371

lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

linking (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

loading

photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

M

Magic wand mask tool . . . . . . . . . . . 287 , 359

Magnetic mask tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 , 360

magnification level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

mask marquee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

hiding and displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

mask overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

hiding and displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Mask transform tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

border-shaped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

color masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

creating by brushstrokes . . . . . . . . . . . 357

creating from Clipboard contents . . . 356

creating from objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

creating from text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

creating lenses from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

creating rectangular or elliptical . . . .356

cropping to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304

filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377

freehand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357

inverting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361

mask marquee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355

mask overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355

outlining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357

removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361

selecting entire image . . . . . . . . . . . . .357

maximizing work area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300

memory

viewing image information . . . . . . . .301

viewing on status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291

menus

hiding menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300

Microsoft Office

creating compatible images . . . . . . . .420

midtone (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441

midtones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322

mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307

brushstrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375

images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307

objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391

Mouse wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 , 300, 301

N

Navigator pop-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300

network

installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

new features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

O

object marquee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396

customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397

492 Index

Corel PHOTO-PAINT

Object pick tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286

Object transparency brush tool . . . . . . .289

objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385

adding to rollovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414

applying perspective . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391

blending into the background . . . . . .396

changing edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395

clipping groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388

cloning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340

combining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388

combining with background . . . . . . .390

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385

creating clipping groups . . . . . . . . . . .389

creating color palettes from . . . . . . . .135

creating from background . . . . . . . . .387

creating from brushstrokes . . . . . . . . .387

creating from editable areas . . . . . . . .387

creating from shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387

defringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396

distorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391

drop shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398

extracting. See cutting out images

filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377

flipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391

grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388

lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347

modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391

painting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371

removing background . . . . . . . . . . . . .362

resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391

rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391

scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391

skewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391

transforming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391

undoing clipping groups . . . . . . . . . . .389

ungrouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389

opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293

dockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291

images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

raw camera files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

vector graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

optimizing images for the Web . . . . . . . .411

orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307

flipping images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

rotating images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

straightening images . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

outlining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369

rectangles and ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

triangles and polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

output resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334

overexposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321

P

page numbers

printers' marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Paint tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 , 371

painting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369

applying brushstrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

orbits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

sampling colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

spirals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

spraying images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

symmetrical patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

using fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

using preset brushes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

using pressure-sensitive pens . . . . . . 375

paletted color mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316

customizing color palettes . . . . . . . . 316

dithering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

palettes. See dockers

Pan tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 , 300

panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299

panoramic images

viewing areas outside image window 300

Index 493

Corel PHOTO-PAINT

PANTONE Hexachrome process color 264

PANTONE process colors (definition) .451

paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Path tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

creating and editing styles . . . . . . . . . 267

saving files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

pen tablets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

pens, pressure-sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

perspective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

applying to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

acquiring from digital cameras . . . . . 296

adjusting brightness and contrast . . .321

adjusting exposure by using histograms .

326

adjusting highlights, shadows, and mid-

tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

applying special effects . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

backlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

black-and-white . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

converting to grayscale . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

correcting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

correcting color and tone . . . . . . . . . . 319

correcting color casts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

correcting overexposure . . . . . . . . . . . 321

correcting underexposure . . . . . . 321, 326

focusing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

full-screen preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

removing red-eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

removing scratches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

repairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

retouching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

sampling colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321

scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296

sharpening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342

straightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304

temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321

tint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321

using the Image Adjustment Lab . . .319

viewing image information . . . . . . . .301

plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368

installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368

removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368

Pointillism clone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341

Polygon tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288, 370

polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369

drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370

Posterize effect filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367

pressure-sensitive pens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375

setting attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376

previewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299

for the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411

full-screen preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300

print preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425

raw camera files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409

print preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425

color separations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426

zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425

printers' marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261

printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261

printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423

changing resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334

increasing print preview speed . . . . . .425

layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424

page orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424

previewing color separations . . . . . . .425

previewing print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425

setting paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423

setting printer properties . . . . . . . . . . .423

494 Index

Corel PHOTO-PAINT

spot color channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311

tiling print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424

to film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266

process colors

PANTONE Hexachrome . . . . . . . . .264

processed color palettes . . . . . . . . . . . .316

product updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

property bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290

extended property bar . . . . . . . . . . . . .290

protected areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355

R

raw camera files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401

adjusting color and tone . . . . . . . . . . .404

opening and importing . . . . . . . . . . . .402

previewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409

reducing noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408

sharpening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408

viewing properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409

white balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405

Rectangle mask tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287

Rectangle tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 , 369

rectangles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369

drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369

red-eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337

Red-eye removal tool . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 , 337

registering Corel products . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

registration marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261

removing masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361

repairing images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337

Replace color brush tool . . . . . . . . . 289 , 345

resampling images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334

while opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293

resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333

images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333

objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

paper border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Corel on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Corel Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Knowledge Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

product registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

product updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

tips & tricks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

training videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

user guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

retouching photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337

rollovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391

images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

S

sampling colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310

painting with sampled colors . . . . . . 373

saturation

adjusting in Image Adjustment Lab 321

saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417

exporting for the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

to different file formats . . . . . . . . . . . 419

scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391

objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Index 495

Corel PHOTO-PAINT

scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

scratches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

removing from photos . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Scroll wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 , 300, 301

seed color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

selections. See editable areas

shadow (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

adjusting image brightness . . . . . . . . . 322

shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

drawing rectangles and ellipses . . . . . 369

drawing triangles and polygons . . . . . 370

outlining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

rendering as objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Sharpen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

sharpening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

edges of objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

skewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

snapshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

sound files, importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

special effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

applying to editable areas . . . . . . . . . . 367

categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

color and tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

fading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

repeating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

spot color channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

changing properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

spraying images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374

choosing images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374

creating spraylists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375

loading image lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375

spraylists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375

status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291

straightening images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304

stylus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375

setting attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376

support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

product registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

swap disk

viewing image information . . . . . . . .291

symmetrical patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375

T

tablets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375

temperature (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460

terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281

documentation conventions . . . . . . . . .16

Text tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288

texture fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381

Threshold effect filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367

tiling bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380

tint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321

tips & tricks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

tonal range (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461

tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319

adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325

adjusting by using brushstrokes . . . . .327

adjusting in Image Adjustment Lab .319

adjusting tonal range interactively . . .328

adjusting using lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . .347

496 Index

Corel PHOTO-PAINT

applying special effects . . . . . . . . . . . .367

filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325

using histograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326

viewing tonal range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326

Tone Curve filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328

toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284

hiding and displaying . . . . . . . . .285, 300

standard toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284

toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286

hiding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300

tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286

Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

tooltips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Touch-up brush tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 , 339

training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

training videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Transform filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367

triangles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369

drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370

tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 , 22

Corel on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

CorelTUTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Insights from the Experts . . . . . . . . . . .21

U

underexposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321

Undo brush tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 , 345

undoing actions

erasing image areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344

erasing last action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345

uniform fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377

uninstalling applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

units of measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302

Unsharp mask filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343

updating Corel products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

upsampling images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334

V

VBA programming guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

vector graphics

opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299

areas outside the image window . . . 300

changing image view . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

cursor coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

full-screen preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

hiding windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

image information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

image information on status bar . . . 291

images in Image Adjustment Lab . . 324

panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

panoramic images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

previewing for the Web . . . . . . . . . . . 411

print preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

W

Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411

customer support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

exporting images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

image resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

optimizing images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

rollovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Index 497

Corel PHOTO-PAINT

Web resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Welcome screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

dockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

hiding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

WordPerfect Office

creating compatible images . . . . . . . . 420

work area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

maximizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

restoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Z

Zoom tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 , 301

zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

print preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Copyright 2007 Corel Corporation. All rights reserved.

CorelDRAW® Graphics Suite X4 User Guide

Protected by U.S. Patents 5652880; 5347620; 5767860; 6195100; 6385336;

6552725; 6657739; 6731309; 6825859; 6633305; Patents Pending.

Product specifications, pricing, packaging, technical support and information

("specifications") refer to the retail English version only. The specifications for all other

versions (including other language versions) may vary.

INFORMATION IS PROVIDED BY COREL ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT

ANY OTHER WARRANTIES OR COND ITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABLE

QUALITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR

A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR THOSE ARISING BY LAW, STATUTE, USAGE

OF TRADE, COURSE OF DEALING OR OTHERWISE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO

THE RESULTS OF THE INFORMATION PROVIDED OR ITS USE IS ASSUMED

BY YOU. COREL SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY TO YOU OR ANY OTHER

PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, LOSS OF REVENUE OR PROFIT, LOST OR DAMAGED DATA OR

OTHER COMMERCIAL OR ECONOMIC LOSS, EVEN IF COREL HAS BEEN

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR THEY ARE

FORESEEABLE. COREL IS ALSO NOT LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIMS MADE BY

ANY THIRD PARTY. COREL'S MAXIMUM AGGREGATE LIABILITY TO YOU

SHALL NOT EXCEED THE COSTS PAID BY YOU TO PURCHASE THE

MATERIALS. SOME STATES/COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR

LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL

DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

Corel, the Corel logo, CorelDRAW, Corel DESIGNER, Corel PHOTO-PAINT, Corel

R.A.V.E., Corel Support Services, CorelTUTOR, iGrafx, Knowledge Base, Paint Shop

Pro, Painter, Perfect Shapes, PowerClip, PowerTRACE, Professional Services, Quattro

Pro, WinDVD, WinZip, and WordPerfect are tr ademarks or registered trademarks of

Corel Corporation and/or its subsidiaries in Canada, the U.S., and/or other countries.

Access, Excel, Microsoft, OpenType, Visual Basic, Windows, and Windows Vista are either

registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or

other countries. Acrobat, Adobe, Illustrator, Photoshop, PostScript, and Reader are either

registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States

and/or other countries. AutoCAD, DWG, and DXF are registered trademarks or trademarks

of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries. ConceptShare is a trademark of

ConceptShare Inc. in Canada, the United States and/or other countries. DIC is a registered

trademark of Dainippon Ink & Chemicals, Inc. Focoltone® is a trademark of KiKUZE

Solutions Pte Ltd. International Color Consortium is a registered trademark of the

International Color Consortium. MyFonts, MyFonts.com, and WhatTheFont are registered

trademarks or trademarks of MyFonts.com, Inc. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc.

trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. Scitex is a registered trademark of Scitex

Corporation Ltd. SpectraMaster is a registered trademark of E.I. du Pont de Nemours and

Company and affiliates. TOYO is a trademark of Toyo Ink Manufacturing Co., Ltd.

TRUMATCH is a registered trademark of Tr umatch, Inc. Unicode is a trademark of

Unicode, Inc. Other product, font, and company names and logos may be trademarks or

registered trademarks of their respective companies.

012127

Corel Draw X4 Tutorials in Hindi Pdf

Source: https://usermanual.wiki/corel/CDRAWGraphicsSuiteX4GB.1436998178/html

0 Response to "Corel Draw X4 Tutorials in Hindi Pdf"

Post a Comment

Iklan Atas Artikel

Iklan Tengah Artikel 1

Iklan Tengah Artikel 2

Iklan Bawah Artikel